October 2013

AT2650E, Rev. 07

User´s Guide

USER INTERFACE FUNCTIONALITIES

AVL CONCERTO™ 2014
v4.6
Copyright 2013 AVL List GmbH, Graz - Austria

The contents of this document may not be reproduced in any form or communicated to any third party without the
prior written consent of AVL. While every effort is made to ensure its correctness, AVL assumes no responsibility
neither for errors and omissions which may occur in this document nor for damage caused by them.
All mentioned trademarks or registered trademarks are owned by their respective owners.

All rights reserved.

 Table of Contents 3

Table of Contents

1 Menu Commands and Tools .......................................................................................... 13

1.1 Menu Commands .................................................................................................................. 13
1.1.1 File .................................................................................................................................... 13
[Link] New................................................................................................................... 13
[Link] Open ................................................................................................................ 13
[Link] Save.................................................................................................................. 14
[Link] Save As ............................................................................................................ 15
[Link] Work Environment ............................................................................................ 16
[Link] Export Window As ............................................................................................ 16
[Link] Print .................................................................................................................. 16
[Link] Print All Pages .................................................................................................. 17
[Link] Print Select ....................................................................................................... 17
[Link] Print Preview..................................................................................................... 17
[Link] Printer Setup..................................................................................................... 17
[Link] Last Layouts ..................................................................................................... 17
[Link] Last ................................................................................................................... 17
[Link] Exit.................................................................................................................... 17
1.1.2 Edit.................................................................................................................................... 18
[Link] Undo ................................................................................................................. 18
[Link] Redo ................................................................................................................. 18
[Link] Cut .................................................................................................................... 18
[Link] Copy ................................................................................................................. 18
[Link] Insert................................................................................................................. 18
[Link] Delete ............................................................................................................... 18
[Link] Copy (Metafile/Text) ......................................................................................... 18
[Link] Copy (Bitmap)................................................................................................... 18
1.1.3 View .................................................................................................................................. 19
[Link] Components ..................................................................................................... 19
[Link] Full Screen Mode.............................................................................................. 19
[Link] Always on Top .................................................................................................. 19
[Link] Design Mode..................................................................................................... 19
[Link] Display Mode .................................................................................................... 19
[Link] Workbook Mode................................................................................................ 20
[Link] Window Filter .................................................................................................... 20
[Link] Toolbars............................................................................................................ 20
[Link] Shortcut Bar...................................................................................................... 20
[Link] Command Bar................................................................................................... 20
[Link] Message List..................................................................................................... 20
1.1.4 Extras................................................................................................................................ 21
[Link] Layout Settings ................................................................................................. 21
[Link] Unit Conversion ................................................................................................ 21
[Link] Layout Translation ............................................................................................ 21
[Link] User Level (Option u Only) ............................................................................... 21
[Link] Automatic File Comparison Mode..................................................................... 21
[Link] Batch Mode....................................................................................................... 22
[Link] Lock Layout ...................................................................................................... 22
[Link] Pre-Sets............................................................................................................ 22
[Link] User Variables ................................................................................................. 22
[Link] Logfiles ............................................................................................................ 23

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

4 Table of Contents

1.1.5 Execute .............................................................................................................................23

[Link] Script .................................................................................................................23
[Link] Last Scripts .......................................................................................................23
1.1.6 Window .............................................................................................................................23
[Link] Restore..............................................................................................................23
[Link] Minimize ............................................................................................................23
[Link] Maximize ...........................................................................................................23
[Link] Cascade ............................................................................................................23
[Link] Tile Horizontally.................................................................................................23
[Link] Tile Vertically.....................................................................................................23
[Link] Arrange Icons....................................................................................................23
1.1.7 Help ...................................................................................................................................24
[Link] Contents and Index ...........................................................................................24
[Link] Context Help .....................................................................................................24
[Link] Info ....................................................................................................................24
[Link] Tips ...................................................................................................................24
[Link] Release Notes...................................................................................................24
[Link] Online Update ...................................................................................................24
[Link] Show Start Dialog on Startup............................................................................24
1.2 Tools....................................................................................................................................... 25
1.2.1 Display ..............................................................................................................................25
[Link] Zoom .................................................................................................................25
[Link] Zoom In .............................................................................................................25
[Link] Zoom Out ..........................................................................................................25
[Link] Full Page ...........................................................................................................25
[Link] Auto Zoom.........................................................................................................25
[Link] Mirror.................................................................................................................26
[Link] Increase/Spread X ............................................................................................26
[Link] Decrease/Compress X ......................................................................................26
[Link] Increase/Spread Y ............................................................................................26
[Link] Decrease/Compress Y ......................................................................................26
[Link] Redraw..............................................................................................................26
[Link] Auto Range .......................................................................................................26
[Link] First Page..........................................................................................................27
[Link] Previous Page...................................................................................................27
[Link] Next Page .........................................................................................................27
[Link] Last Page ..........................................................................................................27
1.2.2 Format...............................................................................................................................27
[Link] Format Brush ....................................................................................................27
[Link] Colour................................................................................................................28
[Link] Fill Colour ..........................................................................................................28
[Link] Line Width .........................................................................................................28
[Link] Line Style ..........................................................................................................29
[Link] Arrow.................................................................................................................29
[Link] Marker Type ......................................................................................................29
[Link] Frame................................................................................................................29
[Link] Grid Active.........................................................................................................29
[Link] Font ...................................................................................................................29
[Link] Font Size ...........................................................................................................30
[Link] Bold ...................................................................................................................30
[Link] Italic...................................................................................................................30
[Link] Underline...........................................................................................................30
[Link] Font Colour .......................................................................................................30
[Link] Increase Font Size ............................................................................................30
[Link] Decrease Font Size...........................................................................................30
[Link] Align Left, Center, Right ....................................................................................30

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Table of Contents 5

1.2.3 Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................... 31

[Link] Main Cursor ...................................................................................................... 31
[Link] Difference Cursor.............................................................................................. 31
[Link] Crosshair Cursor............................................................................................... 31
[Link] Band Cursor...................................................................................................... 31
[Link] Legend.............................................................................................................. 31
[Link] Synchronize X-axes.......................................................................................... 31
[Link] Link Y-scales .................................................................................................. 31
[Link] Recalculate ....................................................................................................... 31
[Link] GCA/Burn Calculation....................................................................................... 32
[Link] Reload All Data................................................................................................. 32
[Link] Statistics ........................................................................................................... 32
[Link] Properties ......................................................................................................... 32
[Link] Jobs .................................................................................................................. 32

2 Customizing the User Interface ..................................................................................... 33

2.1 Toolbars.................................................................................................................................. 33

2.2 Customizing the Command Bar.............................................................................................. 34

2.3 Setting the Language ............................................................................................................. 35

2.3.1 Translating Data Contents from Tables ............................................................................ 37
2.3.2 Translating Data Contents from Forms and Text Objects................................................. 37
2.3.3 Translating Data Contents from Form Tables................................................................... 38

2.4 Customizing Menus ................................................................................................................ 38

2.5 Adding Your Own Object Types in the Object Wizard ......................................................... 39
2.5.1 Defining the Sequence of Object Categories.................................................................... 40
2.5.2 Defining the Sequence of Object Types within an Object Category ................................. 40

3 Diagrams .......................................................................................................................... 43
3.1 Diagram Window ................................................................................................................... 43
3.1.1 Context Menu of Diagram Window ................................................................................... 43
3.1.2 Properties Dialog of Diagram Window .............................................................................. 45

3.2 Handling Objects .................................................................................................................... 47

3.2.1 Object Types .................................................................................................................... 48
3.2.2 Calling up Properties Dialogs............................................................................................ 57
3.2.3 Multiple Selection.............................................................................................................. 58
3.2.4 Modifying Objects ............................................................................................................. 58
[Link] Selecting Objects.............................................................................................. 58
[Link] Moving Objects ................................................................................................. 58
[Link] Resizing Objects............................................................................................... 59
[Link] Visibility............................................................................................................. 59
3.3 Diagram Object....................................................................................................................... 60
3.3.1 Properties Dialog .............................................................................................................. 60
[Link] General - General ............................................................................................. 60
[Link] Grid - Grid ......................................................................................................... 62
[Link] Attributes - Attributes ........................................................................................ 62
3.3.2 Properties Dialog of the X-Axis ......................................................................................... 63
[Link] General - X-Scale ............................................................................................. 64
[Link] General - Transformation.................................................................................. 66

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

6 Table of Contents

[Link] General - Links .................................................................................................67

[Link] X-Scale - Scale Range .....................................................................................69
3.3.3 Scales ...............................................................................................................................72
[Link] Modifying Scale Ranges ...................................................................................72
[Link] Arranging the Axes............................................................................................73
[Link] Synchronizing X-Axes .......................................................................................73
[Link] Linking to Other Objects....................................................................................74
[Link] Display Offset....................................................................................................74
3.3.4 Quick Diagram ..................................................................................................................74

3.4 Line Curve .............................................................................................................................. 75

3.4.1 Properties Dialog...............................................................................................................75
[Link] General - General .............................................................................................76
[Link] General - Transformation .................................................................................77
[Link] General - Links..................................................................................................79
[Link] Y-Scale - Scale Range......................................................................................79
[Link] Y-Scale - Unit ....................................................................................................81
[Link] Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout......................................................................................82
[Link] Datasets - Datasets...........................................................................................83
[Link] Extras - Z-Class ................................................................................................84
[Link] Attributes - Attributes.........................................................................................85
[Link] Attributes - Marker.............................................................................................86
[Link] Attributes - Labels .............................................................................................87
[Link] Attributes - Cursor ............................................................................................88
3.5 Bar Curve ............................................................................................................................... 89
3.5.1 Properties Dialog...............................................................................................................89
[Link] Attributes - Attributes.........................................................................................90
3.6 Band ....................................................................................................................................... 90
3.6.1 Properties Dialog...............................................................................................................91
[Link] General - General .............................................................................................91
[Link] Datasets - Datasets...........................................................................................92
[Link] Attributes - Attributes.........................................................................................93
3.7 pV Diagrams........................................................................................................................... 93
3.7.1 Properties Dialog...............................................................................................................93

3.8 Contour Maps ......................................................................................................................... 94

3.8.1 Properties Dialog...............................................................................................................95
[Link] General - Transformation ..................................................................................96
[Link] General - Links..................................................................................................97
[Link] Datasets - Datasets...........................................................................................97
[Link] Isolines - Calculation Parameters .....................................................................98
[Link] Isolines - Algorithms .......................................................................................100
[Link] Isolines - Isolines.............................................................................................101
[Link] Isolines - Envelope..........................................................................................102
3.8.2 Map Cross Sections ........................................................................................................104

3.9 Campbell Diagram................................................................................................................ 107

3.9.1 Properties Dialog.............................................................................................................107

3.10 Scatter .................................................................................................................................. 108

3.10.1 Properties Dialog.............................................................................................................108
[Link] Extras - Z-Class ..............................................................................................109

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Table of Contents 7

3.11 Surface ................................................................................................................................. 110

3.11.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 110
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 111
[Link] Datasets - Control Dataset ............................................................................. 112
[Link] Surface - Shading ........................................................................................... 112
3.12 Waterfall Diagram................................................................................................................. 115
3.12.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 115
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 116
3.13 3D Diagram .......................................................................................................................... 116
3.13.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 116
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 117
[Link] Scales - X/Y/Z-Scale....................................................................................... 118
[Link] Grid - Grid ....................................................................................................... 119
3.14 3D Bars................................................................................................................................. 120
3.14.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 120

3.15 3D Curves............................................................................................................................. 120

3.15.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 120
[Link] Datasets - Control Dataset ............................................................................. 121
3.15.2 Data Cursor..................................................................................................................... 121
[Link] Datasets - Control Dataset ............................................................................. 122
[Link] Cursor Marker - Cursor Marker....................................................................... 123
[Link] Shading - Shading .......................................................................................... 124
3.16 Result Bars ........................................................................................................................... 125
3.16.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 126
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 126
[Link] Extras - Grid.................................................................................................... 127
[Link] Extras - Labels................................................................................................ 128
[Link] Extras - Statistics ............................................................................................ 128
[Link] Extras - Limit Display ...................................................................................... 129
[Link] General - Name .............................................................................................. 130
[Link] Attributes - Attributes ...................................................................................... 130
3.17 Table..................................................................................................................................... 131
3.17.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 131
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 132
[Link] Datasets - Datasets ........................................................................................ 133
[Link] Table Layout - Layout ..................................................................................... 134
[Link] Table Layout - Wrap Mode ............................................................................. 135
[Link] Columns - Format ........................................................................................... 136
3.18 Result Tables........................................................................................................................ 137
3.18.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 137
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 138
[Link] Attributes - Attributes ...................................................................................... 139
3.19 Pie Chart............................................................................................................................... 139
3.19.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 139
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 140
[Link] Pie Chart - Pie Chart....................................................................................... 141
3.20 Radar Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 141
3.20.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 141
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 142
[Link] Grid - Grid ....................................................................................................... 143
3.21 VisioFlame Diagram ............................................................................................................. 144
3.21.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 144

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

8 Table of Contents

3.22 VisioKnock Statistics ............................................................................................................ 145

3.22.1 Properties Dialog.............................................................................................................145

3.23 Text / Rich Text ................................................................................................................... 146

3.23.1 Translation of Text ..........................................................................................................146
3.23.2 Properties Dialog.............................................................................................................146
[Link] General - General ...........................................................................................147
3.23.3 Variables ........................................................................................................................148
[Link] System Variables ............................................................................................148
[Link] User Variables.................................................................................................149
3.23.4 Data Variables.................................................................................................................149

3.24 Form ..................................................................................................................................... 150

3.24.1 Translation of Forms .......................................................................................................150
3.24.2 Properties Dialog.............................................................................................................150
[Link] General - General ...........................................................................................151
[Link] Text - Text .......................................................................................................152
3.24.3 Data Variables ................................................................................................................154

3.25 Form Table ........................................................................................................................... 155

3.25.1 Creating a Form Table ....................................................................................................155
3.25.2 Displaying Table Headers ...............................................................................................155
3.25.3 Changing Column Width and Line Height .......................................................................155
3.25.4 Changing the Number of Rows/Columns ........................................................................155
3.25.5 Entering Numerals and Text ...........................................................................................156
3.25.6 Inserting Data ..................................................................................................................156
3.25.7 Entering Formula Expressions ........................................................................................157
3.25.8 Modifying and Locking Cell Contents ..............................................................................158
3.25.9 Formatting Cells ..............................................................................................................158
[Link] Defining Decimal Places .................................................................................158
3.25.10 Translation of Form Tables .............................................................................................159
3.25.11 Transparency ..................................................................................................................159
3.25.12 Properties Dialog.............................................................................................................159
[Link] General - General ...........................................................................................160
[Link] General - Transformation ................................................................................161
[Link] Cell - Cell.........................................................................................................162
3.25.13 Transformations ..............................................................................................................163

3.26 Legend.................................................................................................................................. 164

3.26.1 Property Pages ...............................................................................................................164
[Link] Legend - Legend .............................................................................................165
[Link] Table - Datasets..............................................................................................166
[Link] Text - Text .......................................................................................................168
[Link] Attributes - Attributes for Legend Entry ...........................................................168
3.27 Picture .................................................................................................................................. 169
3.27.1 Properties Dialog.............................................................................................................169
[Link] General - General ...........................................................................................170
[Link] Picture - Picture...............................................................................................171
3.28 Movie .................................................................................................................................... 171
3.28.1 Property Pages ...............................................................................................................172
[Link] General - General ...........................................................................................172
[Link] Picture - Picture...............................................................................................173
3.29 Line....................................................................................................................................... 174
3.29.1 Property Pages ...............................................................................................................174
[Link] General - General ...........................................................................................174

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Table of Contents 9

3.30 Rectangle / Oval ................................................................................................................... 175

3.30.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 176

3.31 Controls ............................................................................................................................... 176

3.31.1 Formats for Controls ....................................................................................................... 177
3.31.2 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 177
[Link] Button/Check Box/Option ButtonList Box/Combo Box/Slider - General ......... 177
[Link] Text Box – General......................................................................................... 179
[Link] Frame – General............................................................................................. 180
[Link] Button - Background ....................................................................................... 181
[Link] List Box/Combo Box – Text ............................................................................ 182
[Link] Slider - Slider ................................................................................................. 183

4 Reports........................................................................................................................... 185
4.1 Report Window ..................................................................................................................... 185
4.1.1 Report Window – Properties ........................................................................................... 186
4.1.2 View ................................................................................................................................ 186

4.2 Report Objects...................................................................................................................... 186

4.2.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 186
4.2.2 Multiple Selection............................................................................................................ 186

4.3 Data List ............................................................................................................................... 187

4.3.1 Properties Dialog ............................................................................................................ 187
[Link] General - General ........................................................................................... 187
[Link] General - Transformation................................................................................ 188
[Link] X-Scale - X-Scale ........................................................................................... 189
[Link] Layout - Layout ............................................................................................... 190
[Link] Table Layout - Wrap Mode ............................................................................. 191
4.4 Table..................................................................................................................................... 193

4.5 Text Object ........................................................................................................................... 194

4.6 Form ..................................................................................................................................... 194

4.7 Page Break........................................................................................................................... 194

4.8 Header.................................................................................................................................. 194

4.9 Footer ................................................................................................................................... 195

5 Page Templates ............................................................................................................. 197

5.1 Page Template Window ....................................................................................................... 197

5.2 Default Templates ............................................................................................................... 197

5.3 Creating Your Own Templates ............................................................................................. 198

5.4 Multiple Page Templates ...................................................................................................... 199

5.5 Printing Page Templates ...................................................................................................... 200

5.5.1 Printing Order.................................................................................................................. 201

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

10 Table of Contents

6 Layout Settings.............................................................................................................. 203

6.1 Fonts..................................................................................................................................... 203

6.2 Scales................................................................................................................................... 204

6.2.1 Scale Layout ...................................................................................................................204
6.2.2 Scale Fonts .....................................................................................................................205

6.3 Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 206

6.3.1 Scales .............................................................................................................................206
6.3.2 Diagram Grid ...................................................................................................................207
6.3.3 Grid Attributes .................................................................................................................208

6.4 Window................................................................................................................................. 209

6.4.1 Window Styles.................................................................................................................209
6.4.2 Snap Grid ........................................................................................................................210

6.5 Page ..................................................................................................................................... 211

6.6 Colours ................................................................................................................................. 212

6.6.1 Colour/Styles ...................................................................................................................212
6.6.2 Automatic Variation .......................................................................................................213

7 Editing Data.................................................................................................................... 215

7.1 Composer ............................................................................................................................ 215
7.1.1 Creating a New Composer Window ................................................................................215
7.1.2 Dragging Datasets to the Composer Window .................................................................215
7.1.3 Dragging Measurements to the Composer Window........................................................216
7.1.4 Editing Data in the Composer Window ...........................................................................216
[Link] Operations with Cells ......................................................................................217
[Link] Operations with Records.................................................................................219
[Link] Working with the * Line ...................................................................................221
[Link] Operations with Columns ................................................................................222
7.1.5 Saving Changed Data .....................................................................................................224
[Link] Backup Copy of Original Data.........................................................................224
[Link] Backing Up the Data Key before Saving.........................................................225
7.1.6 Restoring Original Data and Backup Data ......................................................................225
7.1.7 Closing a Composer Window ..........................................................................................225

7.2 ComposerFile ....................................................................................................................... 226

7.2.1 Creating a New ComposerFile ......................................................................................227
7.2.2 Adding Channels to a Data Key in the ComposerFile .....................................................230
7.2.3 Deleting Channels from a ComposerFile Data Key.........................................................232
7.2.4 Modifying Properties of a Channel in the ComposerFile .................................................232
7.2.5 Adding a New Data Key to a ComposerFile....................................................................232
7.2.6 Deleting Data Keys .........................................................................................................233
7.2.7 Renaming Data Keys ......................................................................................................233
7.2.8 Copying Data from Existing Tests or Measurements to New or Existing ComposerFiles.....
234
[Link] Selective Data Transfer...................................................................................238
[Link] Channel Filter Definition File ...........................................................................240
7.2.9 Creating a New Composer File from the Results of a Query in Data Explorer ...............242
7.2.10 Creating ComposerFiles from MS Excel .........................................................................242
7.2.11 Further Support in Composer for ComposerFile Features ..............................................242

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Table of Contents 11

7.2.12 Exporting and Saving ComposerFile Data...................................................................... 242

7.2.13 Example .......................................................................................................................... 243
7.2.14 Filter Conditons Editor ................................................................................................... 244

7.3 IFile Editor ............................................................................................................................ 246

7.3.1 IFile Editor Dialog ........................................................................................................... 247
7.3.2 Engine Parameters / TDC Values................................................................................... 248
7.3.3 Signals ............................................................................................................................ 249
[Link] Signal Parameters .......................................................................................... 249
7.3.4 Operating Parameters..................................................................................................... 250
7.3.5 File Comment.................................................................................................................. 250
7.3.6 Cycle Extraction .............................................................................................................. 251
7.3.7 Cycle Averaging.............................................................................................................. 251
7.3.8 Recalculation .................................................................................................................. 252

8 Special Functionalities ................................................................................................. 253

8.1 Special Channel Browser Functionalities ............................................................................ 253
8.1.1 Comparison of Files ........................................................................................................ 253
[Link] Interactive File Comparison ............................................................................ 253
[Link] Automatic File Comparison (File Comparison Mode) ..................................... 256
8.1.2 Filtering by Data Point ................................................................................................... 257

8.2 Special Layout Explorer Functionalities .............................................................................. 260

8.3 Unit Conversion .................................................................................................................... 263

8.3.1 ASCII Table for Unit Conversion..................................................................................... 264
[Link] Unit Editor ...................................................................................................... 264
[Link] Unit Table ....................................................................................................... 265
[Link] Unit Name Table............................................................................................. 266
8.3.2 Definitions for Line Curve and Table Objects ................................................................. 267
8.3.3 Global Unit Conversion ................................................................................................... 268

8.4 Automatic Operation / Batch Mode....................................................................................... 269

8.5 Remote Operation ................................................................................................................ 270

9 Special Tools and Applications ................................................................................... 271

9.1 ECU Map Interpolator........................................................................................................... 271
9.1.1 Operating Procedure – Basic.......................................................................................... 271
9.1.2 Operating Procedure – in Detail...................................................................................... 272
[Link] Defining the Source Data Map........................................................................ 272
[Link] Source Map - Smoothing and Range Definition ............................................. 273
[Link] Target Map Interpolation................................................................................. 273
[Link] Special Hints................................................................................................... 274
9.2 IFile Coldstart Converter ...................................................................................................... 274
9.2.1 User Interface ................................................................................................................. 275
9.2.2 Conversion...................................................................................................................... 277
[Link] Improving Signals with CalcGraf..................................................................... 278
[Link] Application Examples ..................................................................................... 279
9.3 Working with Windows Media Player ................................................................................... 280

9.4 MATLAB Interface ................................................................................................................ 281

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

12 Table of Contents

9.5 COM Interface ...................................................................................................................... 284

9.5.1 CONCERTO Interface.....................................................................................................284
[Link] Functions.........................................................................................................284
9.5.2 CONCERTO RunningInterface .......................................................................................286
9.5.3 DataSet Interface ............................................................................................................286
[Link] Functions.........................................................................................................286
[Link] Properties........................................................................................................287
9.5.4 Events .............................................................................................................................288
9.5.5 Error Handling .................................................................................................................288
9.5.6 VB Examples...................................................................................................................288

Index............................................................................................................................................................ 291

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 13

1 Menu Commands and Tools

1.1 Menu Commands

This section describes the CONCERTO menu commands:
„ File on page 13
„ Edit on page 18
„ View on page 19
„ Extras on page 21
„ Execute on page 23
„ Window on page 23
„ Help on page 24

1.1.1 File

[Link] New
„ Window
Opens the Window Wizard to define the window type.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.
„ Layout
Deletes all open windows and resets formats.
Opened data files are closed and if necessary, you will be asked before-
hand to save any changes to the previous layout.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

[Link] Open
„ Layout:
Loads layouts (For details on opening layouts, see below).
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.
„ Window/Template:
Loads diagram windows saved separate from a layout (file extension CDI),
report windows (file extension CRE), page templates (file extension CPT),
Composer windows (file extension CCW) or dialog windows (file extension
CDG).
„ Container:
Opens container files (file extension CCF).
This command is used to load the layout in the container with all its data so
that you end up with exactly the same window that you had before you cre-
ated the container.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.
„ Workfile:
Opens work files (extension CWF).
The Workfile is a work environment compressed to a file.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

14 Menu Commands and Tools

„ Data File:
Opens IFiles (or ASCII files) directly without previously creating a data
source using Data Explorer. Instead, a normal Open File dialog appears
where you can select the file. A temporary data source is automatically cre-
ated in Data Explorer.
Note that all files that were open are closed.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

When you select a data type a dialog appears where you can set filters
according to the exact file type via the File Type list box. The dialog also has a
bar with buttons so that the most important folders can be selected quickly:
Last: Sets the last folder used.
Work Environment: Sets the subfolder of the work environment corresponding
to the file type.
If a work file is opened, this category does not appear and the folder containing
demo work files is displayed instead.
My: Sets the subfolder of the personal library (MyLib) corresponding to the file
type.
Standard: Sets the subfolder of the standard library (StdLib) corresponding to
the file type.
Favourites: Displays the folders that are defined as favorites in the personal
profile under Windows.
Open Layouts:

Fig. 1

Via the drop-down menu for the Open button in the file dialog you can select one
of the following options to define the Open process:
„ Open: Ask for new data - Here when the layout is opened, Data Explorer
appears with a dialog where you can insert the additional data files to be
opened. Currently open data files are closed first. This corresponds to the
normal "Open" function.
„ Open: Load last data - The data last evaluated with the layout is automati-
cally reloaded. Currently open data files are closed first.
„ Open: Keep current data - Only the layout is changed, all currently open
files remain open and are displayed/evaluated immediately with the new
layout.
„ Add Layout - Allows you to add a layout to an open layout.

[Link] Save
Saves the current layout.
Save As is called up the first time a newly created file is saved

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 15

[Link] Save As
„ Layout:
Saves the current layout (all windows + various format settings) as a layout
file (file extension .cly).
„ Window/Template:
This option is used to save the currently displayed window (and its layout
information) as a separate file so that you can load it again separately later.
The file extension depends on the window type:
cdi: Diagram Window
cre: Report Window
cpt: Page Template
ccw: Composer Window
cdg: Dialog Window

Information

Do not confuse saving a window with exporting!

For a Save, the layout information is saved which only contains the name of the
dataset and no data as such.
For an Export, the data content of the window is saved in graphic or numerical
format as a file.

„ Container:
Saves the current layout to a compressed container file (file extension .ccf)
together with all the displayed data (from the current cycle only for indicated
data), calculated formulas and any transformation macros used. If it is then
made available to other users, they can generate the same display without
accessing the original data.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.
The save dialog has a bar with buttons for quick selection of the most important
folders.
Last: Sets the last folder used.
Work Environment: Sets the subfolder of the work environment corresponding
to the file type. If a work file is opened, this category does not appear and the
folder containing demo work file is displayed instead.
My: Sets the subfolder of the personal library (MyLib) corresponding to the file
type.
Standard: Sets the subfolder of the standard library (StdLib) corresponding to
the file type.
Favourites: Displays the folders that are defined as favorites in the personal
profile under Windows.
A drop-down menu next to the Save button in the file dialog enables you to save
files under older program versions.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

16 Menu Commands and Tools

[Link] Work Environment

„ Create
Creates a new folder under \WorkEnvironment with all the necessary sub-
folders. A new layout is also created and all open data files are closed.
„ Exchange
Allows you to change between work environments. A dialog opens where
you can select a different work environment.
„ Load from Workfile:
Allows you to load a work environment from a work file (file extension cwf).
The existing work environment and all open data is closed first.
„ Export to Workfile:
Saves the current work environment (i.e. the work environment folder with
all the subfolders and the files they contain) to a compressed file called the
work file (file extension .cwf). This is a simple way to transport the work
environment to another user.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

[Link] Export Window As

This option exports the contents of the currently displayed window to a file. The
type of export can be defined on a submenu.
ASCII Export „ The contents of the current report window are always exported vertically
irrespective of whether the tables and lists are displayed horizontally or ver-
tically.
„ Only the channel names, units, descriptions (if activated) and data is
exported but no separator lines between the table header and the data.
„ Any column breaks in the tables/lists are ignored, i.e. the data is written in
one line in the target file for each measurement point.
„ If the report contains text or form objects, they are also exported. If you want
separator characters to separate the columns, you have to set the entry in
the [Link] file.
„ For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration
[Link] in the diagram window are applied and the trans-
formed datasets are exported.
Scalable Graphic The contents of the current diagram window (or layout window) are saved as an
Enhanced Metafile (extension .emf). This is a vector format of the Windows
operating system, i.e. the diagrams remain scalable and nothing is lost.
Microsoft Office products do not respond in the same way when reading
Extended Metafiles (the labels may become rotated).
Pixel Graphic The contents of the current diagram window (or layout window) are exported as
bitmap or JPEG graphics (extension .bmp or .jpg). The software creates
Windows bitmaps with the depth of color set in the system. The resolution does
not depend on the monitor resolution and the default is 75 dpi (dots per inch).
The resolution can be changed by means of an entry (ExportBitmapDPI=) in the
[Link] file. Values from 50 to 600 dpi are permissible.
HTML The contents of the current diagram window (or layout window) are exported as
HTML file (extension .htm) - i.e. as HTML page.

[Link] Print
Prints all the pages of the current layout.
If the layout contains page templates, only the diagrams and reports that are
embedded in page templates are printed.
For more on this subject, see Printing Page Templates on page 200.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 17

[Link] Print All Pages

This menu option prints all the windows of the current layout.
If the layout contains page templates, only the windows embedded in page
templates are printed (i.e. diagram and report windows).
In the case of reports, all the pages are printed out. For tables you have to
provide the appropriate settings (see Table Layout - Wrap Mode on page 191).
If a page template contains a multiple-page report or table and a diagram
graphic, the page template is printed out until all report or table pages have been
printed; the diagram graphic is repeated on each page.

[Link] Print Select

This menu option is only activated for page templates.
If your page template contains one or more image objects (placeholders), you
are prompted to select a diagram for each one.
This option is best used in situations where you have a page template with an
image object (placeholder) and a large number of diagrams/reports. When
printing out under this option, you are asked to decide which diagram you want
to use in the page template.
For more on this subject, see Printing Page Templates on page 200.

[Link] Print Preview

Displays a print preview of the active diagram window.
You can zoom in and out, display two pages at the same time and print out from
it.
If the diagram window is embedded in a page template, the page template is
displayed.

[Link] Printer Setup

This menu option opens the standard Windows dialog for printer settings. Here
you can select a printer and the output format.
Remember that the output format is automatically derived from the page format
of the current diagram.

[Link] Last Layouts

This menu option displays a selection of the layouts you used last. so that you
can access them quickly.

[Link] Last
This menu option displays a selection of the windows loaded last so that you can
access them quickly.

[Link] Exit
This menu option is used to terminate the application.
If you have not yet saved the layout, you are prompted to do so now.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

18 Menu Commands and Tools

1.1.2 Edit

[Link] Undo
Undoes the last action.
You can undo up to 20 actions with this option, with a few exceptions, e.g.
opening or closing files, creating new windows or formulas.

[Link] Redo
Carries out the action again that was previously canceled with Undo.
Useful when you undo one step too far.

[Link] Cut
Deletes the active object and stores it on the clipboard.
You can cancel this action with Undo. The Cut option can be used to move
objects from one window to another.

[Link] Copy
Copies the active object and places it on the clipboard.
This is one way to move objects from window to window.

[Link] Insert
Inserts the contents of the clipboard.
This is how to insert a copied object in the current window.

[Link] Delete
Deletes the active object.
Can be canceled by Undo.

[Link] Copy (Metafile/Text)

If the active window contains graphical elements, i.e. the window is a diagram
type or template, the entire contents of the window are copied to the clipboard as
a Windows Metafile and can then be inserted in other applications as a scalable
graphic (e.g. Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word, Microsoft PowerPoint).
If the active window is a report type, the contents are copied to the clipboard as a
text file with no additional formatting (e.g. bold typeface, frames, etc.) and can
then be used in other applications. Reports are always exported in columns irre-
spective of the formatting.

[Link] Copy (Bitmap)

With this menu option the active window is copied to the clipboard as a Windows
bitmap.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 19

1.1.3 View

[Link] Components
Data Explorer
Calls Data Explorer.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about Data Explorer.
Formula/Script Editor
Calls the Formula/Script Editor.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about the Formula/Script
Editor.
CalcGraf
Starts CalcGraf, the graphical calculation editor for indicating data.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about CalcGraf.
GCA/Burn (options G and H only)
Calls up the editor for specifying the parameters for a combustion and gas
exchange analysis.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about the Combustion and Gas
Exchange Analysis.

[Link] Full Screen Mode

In this mode, only the menu bar and display area are shown.

[Link] Always on Top

This option keeps the CONCERTO application window in the foreground, even
when another application is selected.

[Link] Design Mode

Activates Design mode in which objects can be modified.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under Basics of Operation.

[Link] Display Mode

With the following functions you can graphically scale the current window.
The following display options can be selected on a submenu:
Page Zooms the window contents in a way that the entire page is visible. There are no
scroll bars. After using a Zoom tool, you can use this option to return to the full
page view.
Page Width Zooms the window contents in a way that the page width matches the window
width. If needed, a vertical scroll bar appears.
200%, 100%, Here you can select a fixed magnification/reduction ratio in per cent from the list.
75%, 50%, 25%
For specifying an arbitrary factor, see Zoom on page 25.
Fixed Zooms the window contents so that the screen shows the fonts in full size.
All Objects This mode is similar to the Page display mode. It displays all objects fully, also
those which are outside the printable area. If objects are moved outside the print-
able page area (dotted rectangle in Design mode), the display is reduzed in size
so that all objects are visible.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

20 Menu Commands and Tools

Screen In this mode, the display is independent of the print page. The fonts are initially
displayed at a scale of 1:0.8. The scale can be changed (for all windows) using
the zoom symbols on the auto toolbar. However, this only works to a certain
extent, since all objects are always shown, and the display is therefore automati-
cally reduced in size, if necessary. Because of this, there is never a scroll bar.

[Link] Workbook Mode

In this mode, windows are always displayed so that they fill the screen. You can
toggle between windows using the tabs at the screen top.

[Link] Window Filter

When the Window Filter is activated for a specific window type, only these
window types can be called up via the tabs at the bottom of the screen in Work-
book Mode.

[Link] Toolbars
This option allows you to display/hide toolbars or change their appearance.
Customize Opens a dialog where you can customize the toolbar. You can display/hide
various bars or create new ones. You can drag more icons onto the toolbars or
drag them off the bars using Commands.

[Link] Shortcut Bar

This menu option shows/hides the shortcut bar.
The shortcut bar is used for fast access to further software components, such as
Data Explorer, the graphical calculation editor CalcGraf, the GCA/Burn Editor
and the Formula/Script Editor.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface.

[Link] Command Bar

This menu option shows/hides the command bar.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface.

[Link] Message List

This menu option shows/hides the message list.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 21

1.1.4 Extras

[Link] Layout Settings

This menu option opens a dialog where you can adjust fonts, scales, grids,
display area and page setup.
For more on this subject, see Layout Settings on page 203.

[Link] Unit Conversion

„ Define
This option allows you to define the units to be used for all objects in a
layout.
Units are converted based on the unit table (see ASCII Table for Unit Con-
version on page 264).
For ASAM data the unit table is read from the ASAM database.
For more on this subject, see Global Unit Conversion on page 268.
„ Edit Units
This option opens a browser where you can find all units known to the
system as well as the unit names that can be used as conversion units.
For more on this subject, see Unit Conversion on page 263.

[Link] Layout Translation

This function allows you to translate layout contents according to the set
language (see also Setting the Language on page 35).
„ Translation File
This option is used to select a translation file.
„ Use Translation File
This option is used to activate the selected translation file.
„ Alias Name File
This option is used to select an alias table file.
„ Use Alias Name File
This option activates the selected alias table.

[Link] User Level (Option u Only)

„ Change
This option opens a dialog for changing the user level.
For more on this subject, see User Interface in the Exploration Guide.
„ Administrate
This option is used to open a dialog to manage user level privileges.
For more on this subject, see User Interface in the Exploration Guide.

[Link] Automatic File Comparison Mode

This function allows you to compare data from different files.
For more on this subject, see Automatic File Comparison (File Comparison
Mode) on page 256.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

22 Menu Commands and Tools

[Link] Batch Mode

CONCERTO receives status messages from AVL PUMA in this mode. It may be
a simple refresh of the layout, e.g. after a measurement, or a special command
from POI that triggers a specific command sequence in CONCERTO (e.g. script
file).
In addition, this button activates CONCERTO's Batch mode.
For more on this subject, see Automatic Operation / Batch Mode on page 269.

[Link] Lock Layout

This menu option allows you to lock an existing layout so that it cannot be
changed. However, you can load the given layout with other tests.

[Link] Pre-Sets
This menu option calls up an editor to edit INI entries.
The settings you specify here are stored in the [Link] file.
If you move the mouse over the entry value, you obtain a description of the func-
tion of that entry.

[Link] User Variables

This menu option calls an editor to define and edit user variables.
User Variables are placeholders for strings that are replaced by actual values
during the session. Both text variables and numeric variables can be defined. It
is not possible to change the type later on.
To output the value of numeric variables in e.g. text objects, default formatting is
applied. You can circumvent this format by adding a format string to the variable.
The string must have the following syntax:
Format String: (field width. decimal places) or (-field width. decimal places)
e.g. (7.3) or (-8.2)
The format string must be in brackets. The numeral before the decimal point
contains the field width in characters, and the numeral after the decimal point
specifies the number of decimal places.
User variables should begin with a percentage character ("%"), which not only
indicates the start of the variable but also means that it is stored in the uservari-
[Link] file (MyLib folder) for the next session. Such persistent user variables
can be used in formulas/scripts or as path variables in Data Explorer (see docu-
mentation about Data Explorer, under Path and Conditions).
After the "%", user variables may contain arbitrary alphanumeric characters as
well as an underscore (“_”).
User variables may be saved with a work environment or with a layout. As the
variables are additionally given the specific names %CWF_ (for work environ-
ment) or %CLY_ (for layout), the user variables are either saved with the current
work environment or the layout and are retrieved together with these whenever
they are reloaded.
Variables displayed in gray are system variables that the software itself uses. By
contrast with the user-defined variables, they are saved in the [Link] file. It
is not possible to edit or delete system variables.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 23

[Link] Logfiles
CONCERTO provides the option of activating log files for analysis purposes if a
system crash has occurred.
Here you can select the required files.
Further information is shown in the message list.

1.1.5 Execute
Some of the options on this menu are user-definable. There is a script file hidden
behind each option which carries out various actions.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about the Formula/Script Editor.

[Link] Script
This menu option prompts you to define a script to be processed.

[Link] Last Scripts

This menu option allows you to list the scripts that were last used so that you can
select them easily.

1.1.6 Window

[Link] Restore
This menu option restores all windows to their individual size and position.

[Link] Minimize
This menu option minimizes the current window.

[Link] Maximize
This menu option maximizes the current window.

[Link] Cascade
This menu option arranges the windows in an overlapping cascade.

[Link] Tile Horizontally

This menu option arranges windows above each other.

[Link] Tile Vertically

This menu option arranges windows side by side.

[Link] Arrange Icons

This menu option arranges the icons of minimized windows.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

24 Menu Commands and Tools

1.1.7 Help

[Link] Contents and Index

Open the Online Help
The Online Help gives a detailed description of each menu option
(context-specific Online Help). For context-specific information, select Help |
Context Help.
For more on this subject, see Context Help on page 24.

[Link] Context Help

If you click this button and then the relevant CONCERTO user interface
element, you see the appropriate help information. Alternatively press Shift+F1.
You will see that the pointer changes its appearance. Then choose a menu
command. If there are submenus, select the respective submenu command.
The Online Help is then started automatically and the relevant page displayed.
All buttons in CONCERTO have ToolTips, i.e. if you leave the mouse cursor on
the button briefly without moving it, a short description of the button appears
next to the pointer.
For more on this subject, see Menu Commands and Tools on page 13.

[Link] Info
Displays program information, such as program version, license type and expi-
ration date, serial number, options, environment files, etc. Have this information
ready when you contact the AVL hotline.
If you have a Network license, you can use the Borrow License button to
borrow the license from a license server. This is helpful, especially if you want to
use CONCERTO on a Notebook and are not connected to the license server.
Via the Additional Options button you open a dialog with which you can
request individual options temporarily from the license server and give them
back later. It is not necessary to restart the software. In this way, multiple instal-
lations can benefit from a common pool of options.
Use the option buttons to set whether the relevant option is to be requested
automatically at the next program start or if you wish to be prompted.

[Link] Tips
This menu option displays short, useful tips when the program is started.

[Link] Release Notes

This menu option opens a PDF file with the current Release Notes.

[Link] Online Update

This menu option takes you to the AVL Download Area. After registering under
Want to register?, you can access current and future service packs.

[Link] Show Start Dialog on Startup

You can use this function to activate/deactivate the start dialog displayed after
CONCERTO startup.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 25

1.2 Tools

1.2.1 Display

[Link] Zoom
Graphically magnifies or reduces the current window after specification of the
magnification/reduction ratio in per cent. You can select a set zoom factor from
the list or enter your own.
See also Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Toolbars.

[Link] Zoom In
Graphically magnifies the window. This makes it easier to work to pixel accuracy
when editing layouts. You can use the scroll bars at the edge of the window to
scroll over the whole page in zoomed-in mode.
You can also zoom by pressing the left mouse button and drawing a rectangle
around the range you want to enlarge while keeping the Alt key pressed.
See also Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Toolbars.

Information

This function is not meant for magnifying/reducing a diagram axis. For that, you
need the scaling function (described below).

[Link] Zoom Out

Graphical size reduction of the current window. The opposite function to Zoom
in.
See also Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Toolbars.

[Link] Full Page

Press this button to return to the full page view after using the Zoom tool.
See also Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Toolbars.

[Link] Auto Zoom

Under certain conditions (e.g. when working with two screens), it may be helpful
not to display the windows maximized as usual (i.e. as individual windows), but
to arrange several smaller windows next to each other. In this case you can use
zooming mode Auto.
When windows are reduced, the printable page format will be ignored and the
objects will remain centered and the same size, independent of the window size.
This allows you to adjust the window size to the size of the object. In this way,
smaller windows with e.g. only one table object can also be displayed so that
they are still clearly visible.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

26 Menu Commands and Tools

[Link] Mirror
Displays a mirror reflection of the axes along their longitudinal axis.

[Link] Increase/Spread X
If an x-axis is activated, the axis range can be spread by a factor of 2. If the
active object is a y-axis, text, form or similar object, the font size is
increased/spread by one point (unit) each time you click the button.
For more on this subject, see Modifying Scale Ranges on page 72 and Explora-
tion Guide under User Interface - Toolbars.

[Link] Decrease/Compress X
If an x-axis is activated, the axis range can be compressed by a factor of 2. If the
active object is a y-axis, text, form or similar object, the font size is
decreased/compressed by one point (unit) each time you click the button.
For more on this subject, see Modifying Scale Ranges on page 72 and Explora-
tion Guide under User Interface - Toolbars.

[Link] Increase/Spread Y
If a y-axis is activated, the axis range can be spread by a factor of 2. If the active
object is a text, form or similar object, the font size is increased by one point
(unit) each time you click the button.
For more on this subject, see Modifying Scale Ranges on page 72 and Explora-
tion Guide under User Interface - Toolbars.

[Link] Decrease/Compress Y
If a y-axis is activated, the axis range can be compressed by a factor of 2. If the
active object is a text, form or similar object, the font size is decreased by one
point (unit) each time you click the button.
For more on this subject, see Modifying Scale Ranges on page 72 and Explora-
tion Guide under User Interface - Toolbars.

[Link] Redraw
Refreshes the contents of all windows.
This may be necessary after making changes in page templates or when other
programs change the screen structure.

[Link] Auto Range

The limits of the selected axis are set so that all the datasets it contains are fully
visible. If no axis is selected, all the axes of the diagram, including the x-axis are
autoscaled.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 27

[Link] First Page

„ Goes to the beginning of the data displayed in a diagram.
„ Goes to the first page of a multiple page report.
The current page number is displayed on the CONCERTO status bar.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Previous Page

„ Moves the x-axis to the left by the length of the current display range.
„ Allows you to page back in a multiple page report.
The current page number is displayed on the CONCERTO status bar.
In diagrams, you can use the button to page back along the x-axis.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Next Page

„ Moves the x-axis to the right by the length of the current display range.
„ You can use this button to page forward in report windows. The current
page number is displayed on the CONCERTO status bar.
In diagrams, you can use the button to page forward along the x-axis.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Last Page

„ Goes to the end of the data displayed in a diagram.
„ You can use this button in report windows to go to the last page of a mul-
tiple page report. The current page number is displayed on the CON-
CERTO status bar.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

1.2.2 Format

[Link] Format Brush

Transfers the formatting (e.g. color, line width, etc.) of an object to another
object.
First, select the object whose properties you want to transfer, then click the
format brush and finally the destination object.
By double-clicking the format brush you can transfer the formatting to multiple
objects.
When you apply the format brush to an axis containing multiple datasets, this
tool will modify all the datasets.
To cancel the function, press ESC or click the format brush again.
Please note that formatting can only be transferred to objects of the same type.
Excepted from this function are: Result bars, result tables as well as grids,
frames and filling of diagram objects.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

28 Menu Commands and Tools

[Link] Colour
You can change the color of the selected object with this button.
You can also select several objects at the same time to change the color of all of
them. First use the arrow button to select another color. When you have
selected the color, you can also shade other objects by simply clicking on them
and then clicking the paintbrush button.
If an axis contains more than one dataset, all of them are modified with this
[Link] Explorer should be used to set a color for individual datasets or
isolines in an axis. To do that, double-click the axis in Layout Explorer to display
all the datasets it contains. You can then change the color of one or more
datasets with the paintbrush tool.
The frame of text and form objects can be changed using the paintbrush button.
Select the text color button to change the text color.
To assign a color attribute to all datasets of a test or to all datasets of the same
name in the entire layout, use the context auto toolbar of Channel Browser.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Fill Colour

You can change the fill color of the selected object with this button.
You can also select several objects at the same time to change the color of all of
them. Use the arrow button to select another color. When you have selected the
color, you can also shade other objects by simply clicking on them and then
clicking the paintbrush button.
Columns in tables can be shaded individually using this function.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Line Width

This button changes the line thickness of the selected object.
You can select several objects together to apply the change to them all.
If an axis contains more than one dataset, all of them are modified with this tool.
Layout Explorer should be used to set a line width for individual datasets or
isolines in an axis. To do that, double-click the axis in Layout Explorer to display
all the datasets it contains. You can then change one or more datasets with the
line tool as required.
To assign a line style to all tests and across the entire layout, use the context
auto toolbar of Channel Browser.
To assign a line width to all datasets of a test or to all datasets of the same name
in the entire layout, use the context auto toolbar of Channel Browser.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 29

[Link] Line Style

This button is used to change the line style of the selected object.
You can select several objects at the same time to apply the change to them all.
If an axis contains more than one dataset, all of them are modified with this tool.
Layout Explorer should be used to set a line style for individual datasets or
isolines in an axis. To do that, double-click the axis in Layout Explorer to display
all the datasets it contains. You can then change one or more datasets with the
line tool as required.
To assign a line style to all datasets of a test or to all datasets of the same name
in the entire layout, use the context auto toolbar of Channel Browser.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Arrow
This function is only available for lines, but not for curves or maps in axes.
Places an arrowhead at the end of a line.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Marker Type

Sets a marker on each measurement point of the currently selected axis object.
To assign a marker type to all datasets of a test or to all datasets of the same
name in the entire layout, use the context auto toolbar of Channel Browser.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Frame
Sets a border or a line around the selected area.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Grid Active

If the snap grid is activated, objects snap on to the grid at defined intervals when
moved or enlarged. This makes it easier to arrange objects in relation to one
another. The related setting can be found on the Snap Grid property page via
Extras | Layout Settings | Window.
For more on this subject, see Snap Grid on page 210.

[Link] Font
Here you can set the font of your text or formula object.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

30 Menu Commands and Tools

[Link] Font Size

Here you can set the font size of your text or formula object.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Bold
Allows you to display your text or formula object in bold.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Italic
Allows you to display your text or formula object in italic.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Underline
Allows you to display your text or formula object underlined.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Font Colour

Allows you to change the font color of your text, formula or table object.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Increase Font Size

Increases the font size by one point (unit) every time you click the button.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Decrease Font Size

Reduces the font size by one point (unit) every time you click the button.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

[Link] Align Left, Center, Right

When you click these symbols, the text is either left-justified, centered or
right-justified.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under User Interface - Tool-
bars.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Menu Commands and Tools 31

1.2.3 Miscellaneous

[Link] Main Cursor

Activates a cursor line in the current diagram object.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

[Link] Difference Cursor

This button activates a second cursor line which can be dragged left and right
with the mouse like the main cursor. It is also used to scan the displayed curves.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

[Link] Crosshair Cursor

Sets a crosshair cursor in the current diagram object.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

[Link] Band Cursor

Sets a band cursor in the current diagram object.
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

[Link] Legend
Inserts a Legend object.
The Legend dialog is automatically called up to define the legend.
For more on this subject, see Legend on page 164.

[Link] Synchronize X-axes

Links a diagram's x-axes.
For more on this subject, see Synchronizing X-Axes on page 73.

[Link] Link Y-scales

Links a diagram's y-axes.

Unlinks y-scales in a diagram.

For more on this subject, see General - Links on page 67.

[Link] Recalculate
Recalculates all formulas and macros of the layout.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

32 Menu Commands and Tools

[Link] GCA/Burn Calculation

Performs a GCA/Burn calculation.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about the Combustion and Gas
Exchange Analysis.

[Link] Reload All Data

With this button all the data used in the layout is reloaded.
This is advisable when not all of the data has been measured on the test bed
and the content needs updating from time to time. The screen is refreshed
following an update.

[Link] Statistics
This button creates a table with the statistical values of the selected axes.
Minimum, maximum, number of measuring points, standard deviation, etc., are
displayed.
The table with the statistical values contains the selected datasets and a macro
function called [Link]. This macro function can be customized (see docu-
mentation about Formula/Script Editor).
The table can be deleted via Delete and created again at any time.

[Link] Properties
Opens the Properties dialog of the selected object.

[Link] Jobs
This button is used in conjunction with job entries in the [Link] file.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about the Formula/Script
Editor.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Customizing the User Interface 33

2 Customizing the User Interface

2.1 Toolbars
The bars are docked at one side of the screen as the default setting but can be
anchored on any other side of the screen or placed in the main area unan-
chored.
Relocate toolbar To move a toolbar click it with the mouse (see frame in figure) and drag it to the
required position.

If the toolbar is dropped at an application window's screen edge, it is snapped

into position and anchored there.
If the toolbar is dropped in the middle of the screen, it is not snapped into the grid
and can be moved around in the window area.
Customize toolbar / By clicking the arrow (at the end of each toolbar) or selecting the menu option
Define your own View | Toolbars | Customize you can customize toolbars as you wish. You can
toolbar create your own toolbars or add/delete toolbar buttons.

Click on the Commands property page of the dialog and drag the icon you want
to a toolbar or remove one by dragging it away from the toolbar.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

34 Customizing the User Interface

2.2 Customizing the Command Bar

To do that, you have to save the relevant files to the current command folder/s.
The current folders are defined by the [Link] entry CommandDir=Pfad or
the command folder of your work environment currently in use.
Subfolders can, in turn, be created in the command folders which are displayed
as separate pages (buttons at lower edge) on the command bar.

Example
CommandDir=C:\CONCERTO\MyLib\Layouts;

With this entry you can display all files or folders stored under the above path on
the command bar.

Possible contents:
„ Scripts
„ Layouts
„ Work environments
„ Containers
„ etc.
Each file in the folders is represented as a button on the command bar. The icon
is used as a button. Clicking the mouse on the button causes the action to be
performed (loading layout, calling up script, etc.).
The icons can also be defined individually by creating bitmaps in 16x16, 32x32,
48x48 or 64x64 pixel format and storing them in the same folder as the file. If you
are using bitmaps, they must have the same name as the script file and the
numeral 16, 32, 48 or 64 before the extension.

Example
Script: create_series.csf
Icon: create_series.ico
16x16 pixel bitmap: create_series16.bmp
32x32 pixel bitmap: create_series32.bmp
48x48 pixel bitmap: create_series48.bmp
64x64 pixel bitmap: create_series64.bmp

The software uses a default icon if you do not create your own.
The following operations are available on the context menus of the command
bar, depending on the file type (script, layout, etc.):
„ Open
„ Add Layout
„ Execute
„ Edit
„ Delete
„ Add
„ Refresh: when you copy a new script to the command folder
„ Change to Large Buttons
You can define the sequence in which the buttons are displayed on the
command bar or hide files stored in the command folder which would normally
be displayed. This can be done using a text file which must have the name
[Link].

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Customizing the User Interface 35

1. Write a file using a text editor (e.g. Notepad) in which the file names are
listed in the order in which you want the files to be displayed on the com-
mand bar, e.g.:

Example
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]
[Link]

2. Save this file under the name [Link] in the same folder as the files.
The command bar will then only display the files specified in the file [Link] in
the defined sequence:
Using a simple text file and the relevant entry in the [Link] file, you can
translate the command bar and adjust its contents language-specifically.
For more on this subject, see Setting the Language auf Seite 35.

2.3 Setting the Language

Via Extras | Pre-Sets you can change the language for the user interface.
Restart CONCERTO to make the new language setting take effect.
The language of the user interface and Online Help is defined by the entry
Language= in the [Link] file. In addition, it is possible to translate layouts
into the set language. To do that, all texts to be translated must be entered in a
simple text file which is specified in [Link].
The following is translated automatically:
„ Command bar
„ Button, list box, combo box
„ Text of text objects and forms
„ Name and description on axes and tables
„ Name in legends
In order to translate data contents, further settings which depend on the object
type are necessary.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

36 Customizing the User Interface

1. Write a file with the extension .mlg using a text editor (e.g. Notepad) in
which you enter all the texts to be translated, as shown in the following
example:

Example
@Parameter for Knock Evaluation
ENG:Parameter for Knock Evaluation
GER:Parameter für Klopfanalyse

@COMMENT
ENG:Comment
GER:Kommentar

@Specific Fuel Consumption

ENG:Specific Fuel Consumption
GER:spezifischer Kraftstoffverbrauch

@Coldstart Measurement
ENG:Coldstart Measurement
GER:Kaltstart-Messung

For texts with several lines, use \n:

@This diagram shows\nthe Specific Fuel Consumption
ENG:This diagram shows\nthe Specific Fuel Consumption
GER:Dieses Diagramm zeigt\nden spezifischen Kraftstoffverbrauch

2. Save the file e.g. under the name [Link].

3. Create the entry LayoutMLG in the [Link] file to define the path to the
translation file.

Example
LayoutMLG=D:\CONCERTO\MyMLG\[Link]

4. Start CONCERTO and load the desired layout. All the texts, such as table
headers, command bar, etc., should now have been translated according to
your definitions.
Changes to the [Link] file and the translation file do not take effect until the
system is restarted.
During the session, changes only become effective by using the LayoutMlgLang
script command in the Application class (see documentation about
Formula/Script Editor).
The following sections deal with the following:
„ Translating Data Contents from Tables
„ Translating Data Contents from Forms and Text Objects
„ Translating Data Contents from Form Tables
Layout and data contents (e.g. channel descriptions) may also be translated into
other languages.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Customizing the User Interface 37

2.3.1 Translating Data Contents from Tables

1. First perform the steps as described under Setting the Language auf
Seite 35.
2. Call up the Properties dialog via the object's context menu and select the
Transformation property page under the General category.
3. Select <Embedded> under Transform/Reduce.
4. Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor:

5. Write a macro with the following contents:

6. Close the Formula/Script Editor.

7. Click OK.
All the texts in the table should now have been translated according to your defi-
nitions.

2.3.2 Translating Data Contents from Forms and Text Objects

1. First perform the steps as described under Setting the Language auf
Seite 35.
2. Call up the Properties dialog via the object's context menu and select the
Transformation property page under the General category.
3. Select the OnDraw event under Script.
4. Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor:

5. Write a script with the following contents:

6. Close the Formula/Script Editor.

7. Click OK.
All the texts in the form or the text object should now have been translated
according to your definitions.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

38 Customizing the User Interface

2.3.3 Translating Data Contents from Form Tables

1. First perform the steps as described under Setting the Language auf
Seite 35.
2. Call up the Properties dialog via the object's context menu and select the
Transformation property page under the General category.
3. Select <Embedded> under Transform/Reduce.
4. Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor:

5. Write a macro with the following contents:

6. Close the Formula/Script Editor.

7. Click OK.
All the form table contents should now have been translated according to your
definitions.

2.4 Customizing Menus

It is possible to customize the contents of the menu bar (menu titles) and
drop-down menus. You can delete, rename or move entries. You can also
include scripts in menus.
Menus are customized via the [Link] file, which resides in the
CONCERTO installation folder. You can edit this file using e.g. Notepad or an
XML editor.

Example
The example given below shows the menu title File with the menu command
New and its options:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<ConcertoMenu Version = "1">
<MainMenu Name="&amp;File">
<PopupMenu Name="&amp;New">
<MenuEntry Name="Diagram Window" Id="33089"/>
<MenuEntry Name="Report Window" Id="33088"/>
<MenuEntry Name="Template" Id="33090"/>
<MenuEntry Name="Composer Window" Id="33526"/>
<MenuEntry Name="Dialog Window" Id="33679"/>
<Separator/>
<MenuEntry Name="Layout" Id="33091"/>
<Separator/>
<MenuEntry Name="Work Environment" Id="33642"/>
<Separator/>
<ScriptEntry Name="Script1" Path="d:\aFormula\[Link]"/>
</PopupMenu>

If you want to include a script, specify the name and path of the file at the desired
position:
<ScriptEntry Name="Script1" Path="d:\aFormula\[Link]"/>

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Customizing the User Interface 39

Information

Never change a menu entry's ID!

To make your changes take effect, set the following entry in the [Link] file
and then restart CONCERTO:
CustomConcertoMenu=[Link]

2.5 Adding Your Own Object Types in the Object Wizard

In addition to the existing object categories and object types available in the
Object Wizard you can also define your own object categories with the associ-
ated object types.
Up to nine object types can be defined for ach additional object category. The
objects are created via customer-specific scripts, as described below.
In the example given below, the object type Classification is supplemented by
two display objects:

Abb. 2

To create a new object category (e.g. "Classification"), proceed as follows:

1. Create a new folder with the name of the new object type (e.g. "Classifica-
tion") in the CONCERTO installation folder.
2. For each new category, create an entry under the ObjectWizardExtensions
entry in the [Link] file which points to the relevant folder.

Example
ObjectWizardExtensions=%ConcertoDir\Classification

Multiple categories are separated by ";".

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

40 Customizing the User Interface

To generate new object types within a category, proceed as follows:

1. Create two bitmap icons for each object type - one that represents active
state (black background) and one representing inactive state (white back-
ground).
For this purpose, create bitmaps in 64x64 pixel format and save them in the
folder previously created. Assign names to the bitmaps, e.g.
2D_Classification.bmp and 2D_Classification_high.bmp.
2. Create a script for each object type and save it in the previously created
object type folder. The name of the script must match the icon bitmap's
name (e.g. 2D_Classification.csf).
Script contents:
The first three comment lines of the script describe the datasets which are
required by the script:
//X=0 : No x-dataset
//X=1 : One x-dataset
//Y=1: One y-dataset
//Y=2: Several y-datasets
//Z=0 : No z-dataset
//Z=1 : One z-dataset

Example
one x- and one y-dataset:
//X=1
//Y=1
//Z=0

The datasets selected in the Wizard are transferred as arguments. In this

example, this is x and y:
args X,Y
The current window can be queried using the SelWin function. With Addobj
you can then add a new object to this window.

2.5.1 Defining the Sequence of Object Categories

Customer-specific object categories follow after the existing categories. The
sequence of the customer-specific object categories is determined by the order
as given in the ObjectWizardExtensions entry in the [Link] file.

2.5.2 Defining the Sequence of Object Types within an Object Category

The sequence of the object types within an object category can be determined
using a text file which must have the name [Link] .
1. Write a file using a text editor (e.g. Notepad) in which the names of the
scripts (without file extension) are listed in the order in which you want the
display objects to be displayed in the Object Wizard.
If you insert a blank line between the individual entries, a blank space will
appear between the icons.
An object type will not be displayed in the Wizard if its name is not listed in
the [Link] file, although the associated files are available in the folder.
This allows you to hide specific entries, if you do not need them.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Customizing the User Interface 41

2. Save this file under the name [Link] in the same folder as the other files.
The Object Wizard will then only display the display objects specified in the file
[Link] in the defined sequence.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

42 Customizing the User Interface

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 43

3 Diagrams

3.1 Diagram Window

The Diagram Window is a window type used for the graphic visualization of data.
Any number of diagram windows can be created. The active window is selected
(in Workbook Mode) via tabs in the upper display area.
Alternatively, the current window can also be selected in the upper area of
Layout Explorer (e.g. if Workbook Mode is deactivated).
The window sequence can be modified in the display area by using drag &
[Link] doing so, the window sequence in Layout Explorer is also adjusted.
Create diagram A diagram window can be created as follows:
window
„ Option on the workflow bar and selecting New Window.

Alternatively „ Toolbar button

„ Menu option File | New | Window

3.1.1 Context Menu of Diagram Window

If you right-click an empty window area, the context menu shown below opens.
In addition, an auto toolbar appears directly above the context menu. It provides
the tools most frequently required in the diagram window.
„ Properties
Right-click this option to define the general properties of a diagram window.
For more on this subject, see Properties Dialog of Diagram Window auf
Seite 45.
„ Rearrange Diagrams
With this option you can rearrange all diagrams in the window.

Abb. 3

For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under Basics of Operation,
on your installation CD.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

44 Diagrams

„ Align axes
Rearrange axes
These are entries with which you can adjust the appearance of axes.
For more on this subject, see Arranging the Axes auf Seite 73.
„ Create report (diagram windows only):
Creates a copy of the current window. The data is not represented by
curves, maps or bars but as a simple list of numerical values.
That makes it easy to export the current Window quickly as an ASCII file.
Furthermore, the values represented as curves can then also be compared
with the table.

Abb. 4

If you want to return to the original display, use Undo on the Edit menu as
often as is necessary or click Auto Range on the context auto toolbar:

Abb. 5

„ Copy (Metafile, Text, Bitmap)

Copies the contents of the diagram window onto the clipboard.
„ Paste
Inserts the clipboard contents in the current diagram window.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 45

3.1.2 Properties Dialog of Diagram Window

• Right-click an empty window area and select Properties on the context
menu.
The Properties dialog for the diagram window opens where you can define
general properties for the window.

Abb. 6

Window Title:
In this text field you can modify the diagram window's name. It is automatically
assigned when the window is created.
Description:
The text specifed here can be displayed e.g. in a text object of a template if the
user variable $ImageWindowDescription is specified in the text object.

Abb. 7

This is useful in particular if you defined several diagram windows with different
titles (descriptions) in the layout and you now want to present the diagram
windows with the same page template (see Multiple Page Templates auf
Seite 199).
When the user variable $WindowDescription is specified in a text object of a
diagram window, the text input under Description will be displayed in the
diagram window.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

46 Diagrams

Format:
The display orientation of the window is based on what it will look like when
printed out later. The window must therefore always know what its size and
orientation will be when printed on the sheet of paper.
„ With the Landscape Page and Portrait Page options you define the
window orientation. Its size when printed out is derived from the settings
made on the Page property page via Extras | Layout Settings | Page (see
Page auf Seite 211).
„ With Template/Image the page settings are taken from an existing page
template.
For more on this subject, see Page Templates auf Seite 197.
„ Scroll Mode (report window only):
For more on this subject, see Report Window auf Seite 185.
Template (not for template window):
For more on this subject, see Default Templates auf Seite 197.
Image (not for template window):
(Is only activated if an existing page template window contains at least two
image objects.)
With this function you can assign the diagram window to a particular image
object in an existing page template window. The window then correlates its
display with the size of the image object.
For more on this subject, see Page Templates auf Seite 197.
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnLoad / is called if a window is loaded or OnFi-
leExchange / is called if a file shown in the diagram window is exchanged).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Draw Frame around Window:
When this option is activated, the diagram window is printed with a frame drawn
around it.
Draw Template Mask (only available in zoom mode Page):
If this check box is activated, the contents of an existing page template window
(e.g. company logo, header) are arranged as a frame around the diagram
window, but cannot be edited there.
Changes in the template are automatically applied in the diagram window, and
vice versa.
For more on this subject, see Page Templates auf Seite 197.
No File Comparison:
When this check box is activated, the diagram window is excluded from the file
comparison.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 47

Font size (report window only):

This is where you define the font size of the displayed values.
Always load this template from the Template Directory (template window
only):
This control box is normally activated and causes the template to be loaded from
the central template folder when the layout is opened.
For more on this subject, see Page Templates auf Seite 197.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the diagram window is hidden. The object is
still visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable (not for dialog and template window):
When you deactivate this check box, the window is excluded from printing.

3.2 Handling Objects

A diagram window can be made up of more than one display element (i.e. what
we call objects) in which data or additional information is visualized.
Diagram window objects include:
„ y/t / y/CA / y/n
„ x/y
„ pV
„ Contour Maps
„ x/y/z
„ Result Bars (Comparison Bars, Statistics Boxes, Statistics Bars, Stacked
Bars)
„ Standard Tables
„ Result Tables
„ Text
„ Form, Form Table
„ Legend
„ Picture
„ Movie
„ Auxiliary Line
„ Rectangle/Oval
„ Button
„ Controls
The Diagram Object is a special object because it can contain subobjects. While
the diagram object itself corresponds to the drawing frame with the enclosed
diagram grid and an x-axis, subobjects contain the actual display of the curves
as lines, bars, bands or isolines and a y-axis is also always linked. In addition, a
caption (or legend) can also be assigned to a diagram object as a sub-object.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

48 Diagrams

Subobjects of the Diagram Object

„ Line Curve
„ Bar Curve
„ Band
„ Isolines
„ Scatter
„ Legend
„ etc.
Furthermore, an object or a sub-object can often display several datasets at the
same time. For example, a number of channels can be superimposed in a line
curve object as individual curves. Likewise a comparison bar can display a
number of values next to one another as bars.
Objects and subobjects can therefore possess one or more display items (a
single curve in a curve line object is a Display Item). This is usually the same as
the dataset to be displayed and is therefore also given the same name. But for
certain objects, the display items are not the same as the datasets. In a contour
map, for instance, they correspond to the isolines created. Display items typically
have graphical format properties, such as color, style, etc.
Hiding display In order to have a clearly arranged display, it is often helpful to hide individual
items display items (e.g. individual curves of a line curve object). To this end, call up
the Properties dialog for the display item and deactivate the option Visible (see
Calling up Properties Dialogs auf Seite 57).
The current status is shown by the following symbols:
Show display item

Hide display item

This setting is saved in the layout.

3.2.1 Object Types

The Object Wizard provides object types of the following categories:
Indicating Favou- This function is only available as standard with CONCERTO Advanced for Indi-
rites cating. For CONCERTO Premium and CONCERTO Advanced for Test Bed you
have to activate it under Extras | Pre-Sets.
Indicating Favourites are related to evaluation tasks that are important for indi-
cating operations.
The categories described under y/t / y/CA / y/n auf Seite 49 and x/y auf Seite 51
are grouped together here to give you a clear overview and allow you to selec-
tively choose the required curve (crank angle, cycle or time).
CA Data:
Crank angle data of a dataset is displayed as a polyline. The x-axis is
automatically derived from the dataset and contains angle information.
A line curve can be converted to a stair curve by selecting the Stair
Curve check box under General in the Properties dialog of the y-axis.

CA Data, Overlapping:
This type of diagram is used to display cylinder pressure signals with
TDC offset.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 49

CY Data:
Cycle-based data of a dataset is displayed as a polyline. The x-axis is
automatically derived from the dataset and contains cycle-based data.
A line curve can be converted to a stair curve by selecting the Stair
Curve check box under General in the Properties dialog of the y-axis.

Time [ms]
The data of a dataset is displayed as a polyline. The x-axis is automat-
ically derived from the dataset and contains time-based data in milli-
seconds.
A line curve can be converted to a stair curve by selecting the Stair
Curve check box under General in the Properties dialog of the y-axis.

Time [s]
The data of a dataset is displayed as a polyline. The x-axis is automat-
ically derived from the dataset and contains cycle-based data in
seconds.
A line curve can be converted to a stair curve by selecting the Stair
Curve check box under General in the Properties dialog of the y-axis.

Comparison Table Horizontal:

Table for displaying result values in block form with cylinder compar-
ison logic.

Comparison Table Vertical:

This table is especially suitable for compact display of multi-cylinder
indicating results. The individual value types are listed under one
another.

Statistics Table:
The selected datasets undergo a statistical analysis and the results
are displayed in tabular form.

Favourites The list of favorites is predefined. It contains frequently used object types already
existing in other categories.

y/t / y/CA / y/n

Line Curve:
The data of a dataset is displayed as a polyline. The x-axis is automat-
ically derived from the dataset and can contain angle information,
time-based data, etc. A line curve can be converted to a stair curve by
selecting the Stair Curve check box under General in the Properties
dialog of the y-axis.
For more on this subject, see Line Curve auf Seite 75.

Lines with TDC offsets:

This type of diagram is used to display cylinder pressure signals with
TDC offset.
For more on this subject, see Line Curve auf Seite 75.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

50 Diagrams

Stair Curve:
Data of a dataset is represented as a stair curve where each measure-
ment point corresponds to a step. A line curve can be converted to a
stair curve by deactivating the Stair Curve check box under General
in the Properties dialog of the y-axis.

Bar Curve:
Each bar represents a value from a dataset. Several bar curves can be
assigned to the same y-axis if they represent similar data. The bars
are then displayed in an alternating pattern.
A bar curve can be converted to stacked bars by selecting the
Stacked Bars check box under General in the Properties dialog of the
y-axis.
For more on this subject, see Bar Curve auf Seite 89.

Stairs:
Data of a dataset is represented as a stair curve where each measure-
ment point corresponds to a step.
Stairs can be converted to stacked bars by selecting the Stacked Bars
check box under General in the Properties dialog of the y-axis.

Stacked Bars:
Each bar represents a value from a dataset. If more than one dataset
is represented, the bars are displayed one on top of the other (see Bar
Curve auf Seite 89).
In file comparison mode, the compared tests are represented as bars
arranged next to one another. The logic with which several tests are to
be compared graphically is based on the settings made on the
Colour/Styles property page via Extras | Layout Settings | Colours
(see Automatic Variation auf Seite 213).

Band:
This diagram type is used to display statistical data. It usually requires
five curves (minimum, maximum, average, average + standard devia-
tion, average - standard deviation). But it can also be generated
without the average curve and the standard deviation curves. If you
define curves for minimum and maximum only, you can display the
difference between two channels (i.e. differential plots).
For more on this subject, see Band auf Seite 90.

Boxes:
Like a band graph but uses box bars for displaying curves.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 51

x/y
Line Curve:
Normal x/y line diagram. The x–axis can be freely defined.
For more on this subject, see Line Curve auf Seite 75.

Line Curve with markers on all points:

In addition to the represented lines, a marker is displayed at each
measuring point.
For more on this subject, see Line Curve auf Seite 75.

Stair Curve:
Data of a dataset is represented as a stair curve where each measure-
ment point corresponds to a step. A line curve can be converted to a
stair curve by deactivating the Stair Curve check box under General
in the Properties dialog of the y-axis.

Bar Curve:
Each bar represents a value from a dataset. Several bar curves can be
assigned to the same y-axis if they represent similar data. The bars
are then displayed in an alternating pattern.
A bar curve can be converted to stacked bars by selecting the
Stacked Bars check box under General in the Properties dialog of the
y-axis.
For more on this subject, see Bar Curve auf Seite 89.

Stairs:
Data of a dataset is represented as a stair curve where each measure-
ment point corresponds to a step.
Stairs can be converted to stacked bars by selecting the Stacked Bars
check box under General in the Properties dialog of the y-axis.

Stacked Bars:
Each bar represents a value from a dataset. If more than one dataset
is represented, the bars are displayed one on top of the other (see Bar
Curve auf Seite 89).
In file comparison mode, the compared tests are represented as bars
arranged next to one another. The logic with which several tests are to
be compared graphically is based on the settings made on the
Colour/Styles property page via Extras | Layout Settings | Colours.
For more on this subject, see Automatic Variation auf Seite 213.

Band:
This diagram type is used to display statistical data. It usually requires
five curves (minimum, maximum, average, average + standard devia-
tion, average - standard deviation). But it can also be generated
without the average curve and the standard deviation curves. If you
define curves for minimum and maximum only, you can display the
difference between two channels (i.e. differential plots).
For more on this subject, see Band auf Seite 90.

Boxes:
Like a band graph but uses box bars for displaying curves.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

52 Diagrams

Scatter:
Creates a scatter graph. Each measurement point is represented by a
colored marker.
For more on this subject, see Scatter auf Seite 108.

pV
pV-Diagram (linear representation):
Displays the selected cylinder pressures as a function of the relative
volume (normalized to 0 and 1).

pV-Diagram with absolute volume (linear representation):

Displays the selected cylinder pressures as a function of the absolute
volume.

log. pV-Diagram (logarithmic representation):

Displays the selected cylinder pressures as a function of the relative
volume.

log. pV-Diagram with absolute volume

(logarithmic representation):
Displays the selected cylinder pressures as a function of the absolute
volume.

For more on this subject, see pV Diagrams auf Seite 93.

Contour Maps
Contour Map (:
A three-dimensional dataset is displayed as contour lines. The isolines
connect (interpolated) points with the same z-value.

Difference Contour Map:

Calculates the difference between two map measurements. The data
points do not have to have the same position (x,y). CONCERTO inter-
polates both measurements to obtain a regular grid in order to calcu-
late the difference between the two maps. The resulting map is
displayed as a contour map.

Average Contour Map:

Creates isoline diagrams (2D maps).
This diagram type is used to display three-dimensional data in z=f(x,z)
format. Isoline diagrams show the lines that occur when x-y pairs with
the same z-value are displayed.
The mean value between two map measurements is calculated. The
data points do not have to have the same position (x,y). CONCERTO
interpolates both measurements to obtain a regular grid in order to
calculate the mean value of the two maps. The resulting map is
displayed as a contour map.

Compressor Map :
Represents compressor maps.
A compressor map is a special type of contour map which is used to
investigate compressors. This diagram has overlying efficiency curves
and speed curves.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 53

Overlay Map:
Creates two overlapping isoline diagrams.
The isolines of two z-datasets are displayed in one and the same
diagram.

For more on this subject, see Contour Maps auf Seite 94.
Campbell Diagram:
As with the scatter diagram, each measurement point is represented
by a marker. The marker is drawn filled. The marker color is derived
from the defined z-dataset. The color distribution is derived from the
shading that is set.
For more on this subject, see Campbell Diagram auf Seite 107.

Scatter:
Creates a scatter graph.
Each measurement point is represented by a colored marker. The
marker colors can be used as a function of a third dataset (z) to illus-
trate three-dimensional relationships.

Scatter with Z Labels:

This differs from a straight scatter diagram in that it has x, y and z
values. The z values are plotted at the positions using the x and y
values. Each point is labeled with the z-value. This type of scatter
diagram is useful for overlaying the points that were actually measured
on an existing contour map.

For more on this subject, see Scatter auf Seite 108.

x/y/z
Surface:
Displays three-dimensional data as a surface.
The perspective can be set any way you wish.
For more on this subject, see Surface auf Seite 110.

Noninterpolation Surface:
Displays three-dimensional data as a surface.
The perspective can be set any way you wish.
For more on this subject, see Surface auf Seite 110.

3D Scatter:
Displays three-dimensional data as a scatter diagram.
The perspective can be set any way you wish.
For more on this subject, see Surface auf Seite 110.

Waterfall Diagram:
For spatial representation of more than one cycle of crank
angle-based data.
For more on this subject, see Waterfall Diagram auf Seite 115.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

54 Diagrams

3D Bars:
For displaying three-dimensional data as a bars graphic.
Unlike the 3D map, for bars there is no interpolation. Bars are only
drawn for existing data points. The perspective can be set any way
you wish.
For more on this subject, see 3D Bars auf Seite 120.

3D Curves:
For spatial representation of 3D data as a line curve.
For more on this subject, see 3D Curves auf Seite 120.

Result Bars and

Result Tables

Comparison Table Horizontal:

Table for displaying result values in block form with cylinder compar-
ison logic.

Comparison Table Vertical:

This table is especially suitable for compact display of multi-cylinder
indicating results. The individual value types are listed under one
another.

Comparison Bars:
The selected datasets, which should only contain one value, are
displayed next to one another as single bars on a shared y-axis. If the
datasets consist of more than one point, the last one is used for the
visualization. If you are dealing with curves that use a cycle number as
the basis, the point is used that corresponds to the currently set cycle
number.

Statistics Table:
The selected datasets undergo a statistical analysis and the results
are displayed in tabular form.

Statistics Bars:
The selected datasets, which must contain more than one point, are
displayed next to one another as single statistics boxes on a shared
y-axis.
The statistics bar has the same function as the statistics box.
with the difference that a given mean value from the statistics box is
represented in a bar.

Statistics Boxes:
The selected datasets, which must contain more than one point, are
displayed next to one another as single statistics boxes on a shared
y-axis. A statistics box is made up of two parts. The outer box repre-
sents the maximum and the minimum value of the dataset and the
inner box indicates the standard deviation. The mean value is indi-
cated by a horizontal line.

Stacked Bars:
The selected datasets, each with one value, are displayed stacked
one on top of the other. The length of the total bar is the sum of the
values of the individual datasets.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 55

For more on this subject, see Result Bars auf Seite 125 and Result Tables auf
Seite 137.

Standard Tables
Tables display data in alphanumeric format either horizontally or vertically.
Vertical Table, i.e. multiple datasets are displayed next to one another
as columns.

Horizontal Table, i.e. multiple datasets are displayed as rows under

one another.

For more on this subject, see Table auf Seite 131.

classification
Stairs:
Represents the results of a classification as stairs.

Stairs in Percent:
Represents the results of a classification as stairs in percent.

Form Table:
Represents the results of a classification as a form table.

Form Table in Percent:

Represents the results of a classification as a form table in percent.

For more on this subject, see Form Table auf Seite 155.
3D Bars:
Represents the results of a classification as 3D bars.
For more on this subject, see 3D Bars auf Seite 120.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

56 Diagrams

Special
Pie Chart:
Shows data points as percentage value of a total value.
For more on this subject, see Pie Chart auf Seite 139.

Radar Diagram:
A radar diagram can display one or more datasets in the shape of
spider's web. The web has as many outwardly radiating lines as there
are points in the dataset. If you specify an x-dataset in addition to the
y-datasets, the values of the x-dataset are used as labels for the radi-
ating lines.

Radar Diagram with Marker:

In addition to the represented lines, a marker is displayed at each
measuring point.

Radar Diagram filled:

The diagram is displayed filled.

For more on this subject, see Radar Diagram auf Seite 141.
VisioFlame Diagram:
The diagram is for evaluating AVL VisioSet data and consists of
segments arranged in concentric circles with the number of segments
corresponding to the number of light channels.
For more on this subject, see VisioFlame Diagram auf Seite 144.

VisioKnock Statistics:
This diagram is used to evaluate AVL VisioKnock data. The IFile
supplied by AVL VisioKnock contains values for knock probability -
plotted at angles round the combustion chamber circumference.
For more on this subject, see VisioKnock Statistics auf Seite 145.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 57

3.2.2 Calling up Properties Dialogs

When you right-click an object in the diagram window, a context menu appears.
This can be done directly in the diagram window or in Layout Explorer.

Abb. 8

The Properties dialog of the object appears when you select Properties on the
object's context menu. This dialog contains one or usually more Property Pages.
A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that belong together.
The properties of display items are available either via a drop-down list directly in
the Properties dialog (in the Attributes category) or by right-clicking the item in
Layout Explorer and then selecting Properties on the context menu (see figure
above).
By clicking the button labeled with a question mark you can open the Online
Help for the current dialog.
If you make changes in a Properties dialog, they are accepted when you click
OK.
If you want to see what the changes will look like without quitting the dialog, click
Apply.
Interactive changes to an object using the mouse (e.g. scaling) have no effect
until the Properties dialog is closed.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

58 Diagrams

3.2.3 Multiple Selection

Many objects can contain several display items. Very often you want to change
the properties for multiple display items simultaneously. For the attributes avail-
able on the toolbar that is quite simple. Just select the whole object (e.g. click on
a scale) and set the new property.
You can also make the changes in the Properties dialog when several items are
selected. The dialog then adjusts itself accordingly as follows:
„ The common value is displayed for fields where all display items have the
same value. If the value is changed, the change applies to all the selected
display items.
„ The following logic applies to fields that contain different values:
– Input Fields
An input field for which the selected display items have different values
is left empty. If no new value is entered in it, no value is written back. If
a value is entered, it is written to all the display items.
– Check Boxes
Check boxes are displayed with undefined status (i.e. gray back-
ground). When check boxes are deactivated or activated, the status is
then applied to all the selected display items.
– Option Buttons
All option buttons remain deactivated. The associated status is only
applied to the display items when a button is activated.

– List Boxes
A list box for which the selected datasets have different values is dis-
played with no value. If an entry is selected it is then applied to the dis-
play items.

3.2.4 Modifying Objects

[Link] Selecting Objects

Before they can be changed, objects, i.e. axes, text, pictures, etc., have to be
selected first by left-clicking them once. If you want to select several objects at
the same time, hold the shift key down after the first click and then select all the
other objects you want.
Alternatively, you can draw a frame around the objects by clicking the left mouse
button and holding it down when the cursor is in an empty space in the window.
Then draw a frame which encloses all the required objects.
The selected objects are highlighted by a frame or black boxes indicating that
they are selected.
Click on the edge of the diagram to select the entire diagram without axes.

[Link] Moving Objects

To move one or more objects, first select them, then move the mouse pointer to
the selection. If the object(s) can be moved, the following mouse cursor will
appear:

You can then drag the selected object(s) to another place.

When you move axes, they always snap into the currently selected grid of the
diagram. The setting can be changed in the window properties (see Grid - Grid
auf Seite 62).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 59

Axes that are moved to the opposite side of the diagram are automatically
mirrored along the longitudinal axis. This can also be done manually using the
following button:

[Link] Resizing Objects

If you want to enlarge/reduce one or more objects, select them first, then move
the mouse pointer to one of the six handles (small boxes) that surround the
object. The shape of the mouse pointer then changes to a double-headed arrow
(horizontal, vertical or diagonal). That is the symbol for changing the size of
objects. Drag the object to the required size.
Some objects, e.g. text and form, automatically adjust the font size when the
object size is changed.
Some objects, e.g. bitmaps, can retain their height-to-width proportions if you
drag them diagonally. If you don’t want them to do this, you can change the size
by dragging the sides or top.
Remember that enlarging or reducing axes may cause numerical values to jump
about because they always have to snap onto the diagram grid. You can auto-
matically adjust the numerical values using the Auto Range function, or manu-
ally in the Properties of the axis (see context menu of axis).

[Link] Visibility
Order The Order option on an object's context menu allows you to set the display order
for overlapping objects, i.e. whether one object is displayed on top of or under-
neath another.
Transparency In some cases, it is necessary to have objects (Text, Form, Form Table)
displayed transparent in a diagram to optimize the display.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the object.
2. On the toolbar, select No Fill under Fill Colour.
When shading individual cells of a table or form table, transparency is canceled
again.
However, if you nevertheless wish an object to be displayed transparent,
proceed as follows:
1. Select the object.
2. Select Order / To the back from the context menu. The object will disap-
pear.
3. Select the diagram.
4. On the toolbar, select No Fill under Fill Colour.
If you wish to retrospectively change an object that has been moved to the back-
ground, this can only be done via its context menu in Layout Explorer.
Hide The following can be done to hide an object or suppress printing of an object:
„ Use option Visible on an object's context menu
„ Deactivate the Visible and/or Printable check box on the General property
page
The object is still visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

60 Diagrams

3.3 Diagram Object

A diagram object is a rectangular frame with grid lines and an x-axis. To select
the diagram object, just click it.
A diagram object can have multiple subobjects which basically form the y-axes
and visualize one or more datasets as y-t, x/y or x/y/z graphs.
Possible subobjects:
„ Line Curve
„ Bar Curve
„ pV Diagram
„ Scatter
„ Contour Map
„ Legend

3.3.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click a diagram object in the diagram window, a context menu
appears. This can be done directly in the diagram window or in Layout Explorer.
Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties dialog. This
dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more Property
Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that belong
together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 60)
Grid Grid (see Grid - Grid auf Seite 62)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 62)
X-Scale X-Scale (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)

Tab. 1

[Link] General - General

Abb. 9

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 61

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Quick Diagram:
If this check box is activated, the diagram is given the properties of a Quick
Diagram (see Quick Diagram auf Seite 74).
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnDraw / is called before an object is drawn or
OnLoad / is called if a window is loaded).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Position:
Position of the top left corner of the object in relation to the printable area.
The coordinates (0/0) relate to the top left corner of the printable area (dotted
frame in Design mode).
Size:
Object size in mm.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the diagram object is hidden. The object is
still visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the diagram object is excluded from
printing.
Diagram Frame:
If you activate this check box, a frame is drawn around the diagram object. This
frame can be selected separately. Whenever you resize or reposition the frame,
the diagram contents will adjust themselves accordingly. If a frame is already
present and new axes are added – if there is not enough room – the diagram
grid area is reduced in size. The frame thus defines the overall object size, which
is not exceeded even if changes are made to the diagram.
With Quick Diagrams, it is not possible to deactivate this function.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

62 Diagrams

[Link] Grid - Grid

Abb. 10

You can adjust the division of the x and y grid using the X and Y numeric fields.
Divisions:
Defines the number of grid divisions.
Spacing:
Defines the distance between two grid lines in the grid.
Draw Horizontal / Vertical Sub Grid:
When this check box is activated, an unlabeled sub-grid is inserted between two
main grids. On logarithmic scales, nine sub-grids are inserted in each decade.
Draw Frame around Grid:
When this check box is activated, a frame is drawn around the diagram grid.

[Link] Attributes - Attributes

Abb. 11

You can define display attributes for the grid in this dialog.
Grid:
„ Colour:
Defines the grid line color.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 63

„ Style:
Defines the line style (0 = invisible).
„ Width:
Defines the line width in points (pts).
Setting 0 means that the line width is derived from the setting made on the
Grid Attributes property page via Extras | Layout Settings | Diagram
(see Grid Attributes auf Seite 208).
„ Fill Colour:
Defines the fill color of the diagram object.
Diagram Frame:
„ Colour:
Defines the diagram frame color.
„ Fill Colour:
Defines the fill color within the diagram frame.
With Quick Diagrams, this function is always applied because there is
always a diagram frame. With standard diagrams, a frame is only drawn if
the Diagram Frame option in the General property page within the General
category is activated (see General - General auf Seite 60).
If Auto is set, the settings defined under Extras | Layout Settings are used
(see Grid Attributes auf Seite 208).

3.3.2 Properties Dialog of the X-Axis

By double-clicking the x-axis (or right-clicking it and then selecting Properties
from the context menu) you open the Properties dialog of the axis. This dialog is
subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more Property Pages. A
Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that belong together.

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - X-Scale auf Seite 64)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 66)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
X-Scale Scale Range (see X-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 69)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)

Tab. 2

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

64 Diagrams

[Link] General - X-Scale

Abb. 12

This property page is generally used for all objects showing an x-scale. Note,
however, that depending on the object type some of the controls might not be
available.
This property page can also be opened via the context menu of the axis.
Label:
Displayed name of the x-axis.
Description:
This text appears as the second line if via Extras | Layout Settings | Scales the
check box Description is activated on the Scale Fonts property page (see
Scale Fonts auf Seite 205). The description text will initially be derived from the
first dataset to be displayed by the object. After creation of the object you can
modify it as you wish.
Unit:
Displayed unit of the x-axis.
You can select different units for the x-axis from the list box. All the datasets
shown in the diagram are then displayed with the selected unit. If necessary or
possible, the x-dataset is converted to the new unit. If conversion is not possible
(e.g. recorder data to crank angle data), the dataset is not displayed.

Example
A recorder measurement is recorded with ms as the unit. If the measurement is
represented in a y/t diagram, the unit ms is automatically selected for the
display. If the measurement is to be represented in seconds, you just need to
select Time[s] in the list box. The x-values of all the datasets represented in the
diagram are then displayed in seconds.

If a diagram displays curves from differing recorder measurements which have

been taken partly in s and in ms, you can use the Unit setting to set a common
time base for the display of all of these curves. Selecting the time in ms as the
unit will set all the curves represented in the diagram to the common time base
'ms', independent of whether they have been recorded in ms or s during the
measurement.

You can choose from the following settings:

„ Auto: The unit is automatically read from the relevant normname.
„ Free: Any unit can be defined in the input field.
„ Time (s): Displays time-based data in seconds.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 65

„ Time (ms): Displays time-based data in milliseconds.

„ Time (us): Displays time-based data in microseconds.
„ Cycle: Displays indicating data over cycles.
„ Crank Angle: Displays indicating data over degrees CA.
„ TDC-shifted CA: This function deactivates the ignition offset compensation.
See also Transformation Order auf Seite 67.
Hide Scale:
Suppresses the labeling of the x-axis.
To unhide an axis labeling, proceed in one of the following ways:
„ By right-clicking the diagram grid and choosing Scale Properties from the
context menu:

Abb. 13

All axes used in the diagram are shown under this entry. Clicking the
required axis will open the General property page where you need to deac-
tivate the Hide Scale check box.
„ By right-clicking the diagram object in Layout Explorer and choosing Scale
Properties from the context menu.
For the further procedure, see activation via diagram grid as described
above.
Draw with max. resolution:
If this check box is not activated, any channel that has a large number of
measuring points is displayed with a reduced number of measuring points to
match the display range of the x-scale.
Enumeration:
If this check box is activated, the x-axis labeling is determined by the measure-
ment points, and not by the diagram grid. At the x-position of the relevant
measurement point the x-value for this point is shown.
X variable:
The grid is divided into the number of divisions or at the intervals as specified in
the Layout Settings (see Diagram Grid auf Seite 207). CONCERTO adjusts the
area to make sure that odd values are avoided.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

66 Diagrams

[Link] General - Transformation

Abb. 14

This property page allows you to set a two-stage transformation. These are addi-
tional calculations in the form of macros that are executed before the data is
displayed (see Exploration Guide, under Calculations). The transformation is
applied to the x-dataset or the x-base of each dataset displayed in the diagram
object.
Select Macro:
The drop-down list only shows those macros which are provided for the relevant
object.
It is possible to access all available macros by using the Select Macro button. In
a dialog you can select a transformation macro from the folders defined under
the entry "GlobalMacroDir" in the [Link] file (for each entry the relevant
node is shown) or from the current work environment's macro folder. If a macro
is selected whose transfer parameters are defined using the CalcGraf syntax, a
CalcGraf parameter dialog will appear in which you can set the relevant parame-
ters.
The search order for x- and y-transformation macros is as follows:
„ Current work environment
„ XTrafoMacroDir / YTrafoMacroDir
„ GlobalMacroDir
Edit Parameters:
For transformation macro parameters matching the CalcGraf syntax, this button
offers a convenient way to edit the parameters subsequently by calling the
CalcGraf parameter dialog. After clicking OK, the changes are taken over into
the Transformation property page.
1. Transform/Reduce:
This function allows you to call a macro which can either transform data points or
reduce the number of measurement points. Furthermore, the input field on the
right can be used to deliver a parameter to the macro.
2. Transformation:
This function permits another transformation of data points.
Clicking on the following button displays the chosen macro in the Formula/Script
Editor:

In the text field next to it you can also enter argument values as parameters for
the macro call. The individual values have to be separated by commas.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 67

Transformation If you have selected an x unit transformation on the X-Scale property page (see
Order General - X-Scale auf Seite 64), no conversion has been performed yet when
the transformation having priority is called up.
However, if it is necessary to perform unit conversion already before the transfor-
mation, the sequence can be changed via the following entry in the [Link]
file:
CalculateXUnitTransformationFirst=1

[Link] General - Links

Abb. 15

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
This property page is where you can define object links. If you want to link one
object to another, select it under Reference Object.
If the object for which the Properties dialog is displayed is itself a reference
object, the linked objects are listed in the Linked Objects list box. You can
change to the other objects via the properties button next to them.
The effect of links depends on the object:
Objects with Y-Axes The y-axis of the linked object assumes all the properties of the reference axis. If
the linked axis is in the same diagram as the reference axis, it is automatically
hidden. If you want to unhide it, select the linked axis in Layout Explorer and call
up the property page via the context menu (category General / property page
Links).
If the displayed area of the axis is changed, e.g. by zooming in using the mouse,
all of the linked axes are zoomed in too. This mechanism depends on whether
the reference axis or the linked axis is zoomed in.
If the link is to a y-axis in the same diagram, the axis is hidden by default (see
Hide Scale check box). If the link is to a y-axis in another diagram, the linked
axis remains visible by default.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

68 Diagrams

This function can also be conveniently selected from the toolbar and the context
auto toolbar.
If more than one y-axis is selected, these toolbars will additionally show the
following button:

• Click this button to link the selected axes.

If you click on a y-axis, the following button will signalize an activated axis link.
• Click this button to remove the link:

Tables, Texts, You can only link objects of the same type (e.g. table to table). The linked objects
Forms are orientated the same way and arranged one under the other. An object must
be selected before it can be moved. The others follow automatically.
X-Axes This makes it possible to link the x-axis of a diagram to that of another diagram.
Actions like zooming or scale shifting will then take place synchronously for the
axes.
For linking (synchronizing) all matching axes, see Synchronizing X-Axes auf
Seite 73.
If you do not want the axis to be displayed at all, activate the Hide Scale check
box in the X-Scale properties dialog of the linked object (see General - X-Scale
auf Seite 64).
Cursor The x-axis of a diagram can be linked to a cursor of another diagram - of the
reference object. You can then only work with the x-axis of the reference object
(zoom, move) and the scale of the linked object moves automatically with the
cursor movements. Two options are available:
„ Single Cursor:
Here, the value at the current cursor position represents the middle of the
linked axis.
„ Band Cursor:
The band cursor range determines the range of the x-axis.
If you do not want the axis to be displayed at all, activate the Hide Scale
check box in the X-Scale Properties dialog of the linked object.
Related Subjects Synchronizing (linking) cursors
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 69

[Link] X-Scale - Scale Range

Abb. 16

The Scale Range property page offers a convenient way to set the scale range.
Possible actions:
When you select Range, the scale range can be defined by the Start Value and
the End Value of the axis. The Interval is automatically calculated using the
setting specified for Grid Intervals.
When Interval is selected, you can specify a Start Value, an Interval as well as
Grid Intervals. The resulting end value is automatically calculated.
When Range & Interval is selected, you can specify a Start Value, an End Value
and an Interval. The diagram grid adjusts itself automatically to the scale values.
Ranges between the start value and the end value that are not multiples of the
interval are rounded off (e.g. start value -50, end value 50 with interval 30; the
represented range is between -50 and 40).
Definitions may be made for multiple selections of axes.
When the Range mode is active and you nevertheless wish to specify an
interval, you can click the passively displayed interval value to automatically
change to Interval, which is then editable. The same applies to the passively
displayed End Value when you are in Interval mode.
For new data / Auto Range:
CONCERTO matches the scale range to the value range of the displayed
dataset, as soon as new data is loaded.
To match the scale range to the value range of the currently displayed data,
select Auto Range on the context auto toolbar of the axis:

Minimum (Start Value) and maximum (End Value) are set to the x-scale of the
channel used.
For new data - Auto Shift:
The scale range is shifted in the direction of the dataset maximum.
Very often the range changes on the x and y scales when new data is loaded.
The curves are then not displayed properly or even at all in the diagram because
the data no longer lies completely within, or lies outside, the scale range. You
can get round this by activating the check box. The axes are then automatically
re-scaled each time new data is loaded.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

70 Diagrams

Invert Scale Labels:

When this function is activated, the labeling direction of the axes (normally,
ascending axis values) can be inverted to be displayed in descending order.
Logarithmic Scale:
If this function is activated, the axis is displayed logarithmized (for line curves
only). Only the input of the start value is permitted and it is rounded to the
nearest power of ten. The subdivisions are derived from the grid number. Each
grid division represents a decade.
Calendar Scale: (for time-based data only)
When this check box is activated, the data is displayed in absolute terms over a
calendar axis, which can be useful e.g. in the case of endurance test measure-
ments performed over an extended period of time or statistical evaluations over
calendar-related periods. The numerical time stamp is converted into a calendar
format that is easier to read.
When you zoom the axis, the display will adjust automatically.
When the check box is activated, a date selector is available under Range which
provides a convenient way of selecting the time range to be displayed.

Abb. 17

Relative: (for time-based data only)

This check box enables relative data display over the calendar axis besides an
absolute data display as described above. This means that the starting point for
data recording is used as zero point. This display option provides exact informa-
tion on the duration of data recording.
When the check box is activated, a start and end time selector is available under
Range which provides a convenient way of selecting the start and end time to be
displayed.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 71

Abb. 18

Interval rounded:
If you select Range and also activate this function, CONCERTO tries to display
the scale range rounded to match the diagram grid (see Diagram Grid auf
Seite 207). The upper and lower limits of the scale will then no longer correlate
exactly with the data. However, the limits are selected in such a way that the
complete curve can be displayed within the axis. This type of display means no
decimal places are needed in the scale labeling.
Scientific Number Format:
A drop-down list box provides the following setting options:
„ Auto:
With this setting a suitable representation is automatically chosen for each
value on the scale. For values higher than 1E8 the system changes to sci-
entific number format.
„ On:
Scale values are always represented in scientific number format, indepen-
dent of the scale value. For each value the suitable exponent is chosen so
that the base between 1 and 10 can be kept (except for value 0).
„ Fixed exponent:
With this setting a fixed
„ Scale values are always represented in scientific number format, indepen-
dent of the scale value. In this case, contrary to the On setting, the same,
definable exponent is used for all values on the scale. The base values
adjust accordingly.
„ Off:
Scale values are never represented in scientific number format.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

72 Diagrams

3.3.3 Scales

[Link] Modifying Scale Ranges

This action should not be confused with enlarging/reducing the axis object. Here
we are talking about adjusting the full scale values.
Zooming and Moving a Scale
1. First select the axis to be changed.
2. Move the mouse pointer into the frame that marks and surrounds the axis.
3. To change its position, move the mouse pointer closer to the axis within
the selection. The mouse pointer then becomes the symbol shown below.
To enlarge the scale, move the mouse pointer further away from the axis
within the selection. The mouse pointer then becomes the symbol shown
below.
Move x-axis

Enlarge x-axis

Move y-axis

Enlarge y-axis

When you see the icon you need for your action, drag with the mouse, i.e. hold
the left mouse button down and drag the curve or select the range that you want
enlarged.
Instead of dragging in the axes, you can also use the arrow buttons on the
toolbar:

They spread and compress the selected axes incrementally in the direction
shown by the arrows.
Simultaneous Zoom in X and Y Direction
You can also enlarge using the mouse. Press the left mouse button and draw a
rectangle while holding down the Alt key. The cursor will assume the following
shape:

When you release the mouse button, the area of the rectangle is enlarged to the
size of the full diagram.
If the diagram has multiple y-axes, the y-zoom only ever works on y-axes that lie
in the y-direction with at least a part inside the zoom rectangle. If the drawn

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 73

zoom rectangle in the y-direction is only inside one axis, that axis is enlarged in
the y-direction. Enlargement in the x-direction always works on all the axes of
the diagram.
To return to the original display, select Auto Range on the context auto toolbar of
the axis/diagram:

[Link] Arranging the Axes

All Axes You can call up the following actions from the diagram window's context menu:
Align axes (diagram windows only):
All axes (x and y) of the active window are moved to the edge of the diagram
(left/right for y-axis/axes, bottom for x-axis). Y-axes are automatically moved in a
horizontal direction and not in a vertical direction. When this function is executed,
the distance between diagram edge and axis is determined by the setting made
via Extras | Layout Settings | Diagram | Scales.
Rearrange axes (diagram windows only):
A dialog opens in which you can define how the axes of the selected diagram
should be rearranged.
This dialog enables you to set the most frequently used axis arrangements.
These settings only affect the selected diagram. Detailed scale arrangement
settings for all diagrams in the layout can be made via Extras | Layout Settings
| Diagram | Scales.
If you previously set the axes interactively to another position, the settings are
lost when this function is initiated. You can restore the previous status by using
Undo on the Edit menu.
To return to the original display, select Auto Range on the context auto toolbar of
the axis.
For more on this subject, see Scales auf Seite 206.
X-Axis The Position option on the context menu for the x-axis allows you to position the
x-axis as required:
Bottom:
The axis is displayed below the diagram.
Top:
The axis is displayed mirrored above the diagram.
Free:
The axis can be dragged vertically to an arbitrary position.

[Link] Synchronizing X-Axes

All matching x-axes belonging to one layout can be linked together. They will
then behave synchronously, i.e. all actions applied on the x-axis (e.g. zooming,
shifting, auto range, settings in the x-axis' properties dialog, etc.) apply synchro-
nously to all x-axes. This function requires a uniform axis type and the same unit.
To synchronize x-axes, proceed as follows:
1. Select an arbitrary diagram object or x-axis.
2. Click on Synchronize x-axes on the toolbar:

The area of each x-axis now corresponds to that of the selected one which does
not in any way act as the master. Modifications with general effect can be
performed on all x-axes belonging to one layout.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

74 Diagrams

The axes will return to behaving autonomously if you click in the toolbar on
Synchronize x-axes again.
For individual linking of axes, see General - Links auf Seite 67.
Related Subjects Synchronizing (linking) cursors
For more on this subject, see Basics of Operation in the Exploration Guide.

[Link] Linking to Other Objects

For more on this subject, see General - Links auf Seite 67.

[Link] Display Offset

In the context menu of a y-axis or a curve line in Layout Explorer, you can set a
channel offset as part of the grid via the option Display Offset. I.e. all channels
sharing the same axis are displayed offset in y-direction (corresponding to the
set interval).
In the case of same-type curves (e.g. cylinder pressure), this function has the
purpose of making the diagram easier to read.

3.3.4 Quick Diagram

When generating a diagram window, there is a check box on the first page of the
Object Wizard that enables you to create what is referred to as a Quick
Diagram. A Quick Diagram is especially suited for the Screen mode of the
diagram window and is used to create diagram objects with automatic,
easy-to-read axes arrangement and automatic legend in as few steps as
possible. It contains the following properties and components:
„ Diagram grid (grid lines) of an x-axis and of one or more y-axes which are
arranged automatically depending on the window scale
„ Channel legend, which is automatically arranged above the diagram grid.
The first line of the channel legend contains the channel name (colored
accordingly) and the second contains the units. The third line is only pro-
vided if a cursor is activated. In such a case, the cursor values are written
directly beneath the legend in the corresponding color.
If a difference cursor is additionally activated, the third line only shows the
cursor differences.
„ Outer diagram frame for convenient scaling of the entire object. The dia-
gram and the legend automatically adjust themselves to ensure good dis-
play and readability.
The diagram, the axes and the legend thus form something like a grouped,
easy-to-handle unit.
The axes in a Quick Diagram are always automatically positioned. It is not
possible to arrange them manually.
In addition, when generating a Quick Diagram, the grid mode Spacing is auto-
matically activated which ensures always the same level of readability whenever
the diagram object is scaled.
The Quick Diagram's properties can be deactivated/activated via a check box in
the diagram object's Properties dialog (see General - General auf Seite 60).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 75

3.4 Line Curve

Line curves are subobjects of a diagram object. They display data using
polylines. A line curve object consists of a y-axis with several properties and one
or more display items that are to be displayed as individual polylines. Every
display item may have its own display attributes. Line curves may display data
via their implicit base (i.e. base trace contained in the dataset), such as y-time or
y-crank angle displays. You can also display data channels as a function of a
specific data channel (x/y).
The x-axis and consequently also the x-dataset belong to the diagram object but
are also displayed, however, in the dataset properties of every line curve object.

3.4.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 76)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Unit (see Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Extras Extras (see Extras - Z-Class auf Seite 84)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 90)
Marker (see Attributes - Marker auf Seite 86)
Labels (see Attributes - Labels auf Seite 87)
Cursor (see Attributes - Cursor auf Seite 88)

Tab. 3

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

76 Diagrams

[Link] General - General

Abb. 19

This property page is used for all objects showing a y-scale. Note, however, that
depending on the object type some of the controls might not be available (e.g.
Stair Curve).
Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer. It is derived from the first y-dataset or from the z-dataset with
x/y/z displays.
Auto:
If this check box is activated, the y-axis takes the name of the first dataset.
Description:
This text appears as the second line if via Extras | Layout Settings | Scales the
check box Description is activated on the Scale Fonts property page. The
description text will initially be derived from the first dataset to be displayed by
the object. After creation of the object you can modify it as you wish.
Hide Scale:
Suppresses the labeling of the y-axis.
If an object is linked to another object via the Links property page (see General -
Links auf Seite 67), the axis is always hidden.
To unhide an axis labeling, proceed in one of the following ways:
„ By right-clicking the diagram grid and choosing Scale Properties from the
context menu:

Abb. 20

All axes used in the diagram are shown under this entry. Clicking the
required axis will open the General property page where you need to deac-
tivate the Hide Scale check box.
„ By right-clicking the object in Layout Explorer and choosing Scale Proper-
ties from the context menu.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 77

For the further procedure, see activation via diagram grid as described
above.
No File Comparison:
When this check box is activated, the object is excluded from the file compar-
ison.
Stair Curve:
If this check box is activated, the curve(s) of this y-axis is/are displayed as a stair
curve(s).
Show All Names:
If this check box is activated, the axis labeling includes the names of all the
display items (i.e. datasets) represented on the axis.

[Link] General - Transformation

Abb. 21

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
This property page allows you to set transformations. These are additional calcu-
lations in the form of macros that are executed before the data is displayed (see
Exploration Guide, under Calculations).
A transformation is applied to each dataset element in the object.
Select Macro:
The drop-down list only shows those macros which are provided for the relevant
object.
It is possible to access all available macros by using the Select Macro button. In
a dialog you can select a transformation macro from the folders defined under
the entry "GlobalMacroDir" in the [Link] file (for each entry the relevant
node is shown) or from the current work environment's macro folder. If a macro
is selected whose transfer parameters are defined using the CalcGraf syntax, a
CalcGraf parameter dialog will appear in which you can set the relevant parame-
ters.
The search order for x- and y-transformation macros is as follows:
„ Current work environment
„ XTrafoMacroDir / YTrafoMacroDir
„ GlobalMacroDir

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

78 Diagrams

Edit Parameters:
For transformation macro parameters matching the CalcGraf syntax, this button
offers a convenient way to edit the parameters subsequently by calling the
CalcGraf parameter dialog. After clicking OK, the changes are taken over into
the Transformation property page.
1. Transform/Reduce:
This function allows you to call a macro which can either transform data points or
reduce the number of measurement points. Furthermore, the input field on the
right can be used to deliver a parameter to the macro.
2. Transformation:
This function permits another transformation of data points. This second trans-
formation is not supported by all objects.
Clicking on the following button displays the chosen macro in the Formula/Script
Editor:

In the text field next to it you can also enter argument values as parameters for
the macro call. The individual values have to be separated by commas.
Merge to a single resulting dataset:
If multiple datasets are defined in an object, the defined macro function is called
up separately for each of the datasets. The transformation therefore returns as
many transformed datasets to the display as are defined in the object.
If the check box is activated, only one dataset is returned, even if more than one
dataset is defined in the object. The macro function is then only called up once.
You can use this function to access all the datasets defined in the object to calcu-
late an averaged dataset, for example, which is then displayed.

Example
avgmap macro function:
This macro function calculates and returns an averaged dataset from all the
datasets defined in the object. It is used in the average contour map object
type.
args()
avgmap = objds(1)
for i = 2 to nobjds()
avgmap = avgmap + objds(i)
next i
return avgmap/nobjds()

The following functions are used in the macro:

objds(i):
Allows you to access the various datasets defined in the object.
nobjds():
Delivers the number of datasets defined in the object.

If the Merge to a single resulting Dataset function has been activated for trans-
formations to y-axes, the transformation macro is not called up separately for
each curve associated to the axis but only once and only this result dataset is
displayed.
This is useful e.g. if you want to add up all datasets or subtract two datasets. In
the macro you can address the individual datasets via the objds(n) function.

Example
//Subtraction of two curves (also x/y display)
//ds2 is interpolated to ds1 so that curves with a differing number of points can
also be subtracted
arg ds
ds2= yval( objds(2), xds(objds(1)))
return objds(1) - ds2

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 79

Transformation If you have selected a unit transformation on the Unit property page (see
Order Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81), no conversion has been performed yet when the
transformation having priority is called up. This causes the unit transformation to
fail.
To change the sequence (1st transformation, 2nd transformation), set the
following entry in the [Link] file:
CalculateYUnitTransformationFirst=1

[Link] General - Links

For more on this subject, see General - Links auf Seite 67.

[Link] Y-Scale - Scale Range

Abb. 22

This property page is generally used for all objects showing a y-scale. Note,
however, that depending on the object type some of the controls might not be
available (e.g. Logarithmic Scale).
This property page can also be opened via the context menu of the axis.
Possible actions:
When you select Range, the scale range can be defined by the Start Value and
the End Value of the axis. The Interval is automatically calculated using the
setting specified for Grid Intervals.
When Interval is selected, you can specify a Start Value, an Interval as well as
Grid Intervals. The resulting end value is automatically calculated.
When Range & Interval is selected, you can specify a Start Value, an End Value
and an Interval. The diagram grid adjusts itself automatically to the scale values.
Ranges between the start value and the end value that are not multiples of the
interval are rounded off (e.g. start value -50, end value 50 with interval 30; the
represented range is between -50 and 40).
Definitions may be made for multiple selections of axes.
For new data - Auto Range:
CONCERTO matches the scale range to the value range of the displayed
dataset, as soon as new data is loaded.
To match the scale range to the value range of the currently displayed data,
select Auto Range on the context auto toolbar of the axis:

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

80 Diagrams

Minimum (Start Value) and maximum (End Value) are set to the x-scale of the
channel used.
For new data / Auto Shift:
The scale range is shifted in the direction of the dataset minimum.
Very often the range changes on the x and y scales when new data is loaded.
The curves are then not displayed properly or even at all in the diagram because
the data no longer lies completely within, or lies outside, the scale range. You
can get round this by activating the check box. The axes are then automatically
re-scaled each time new data is loaded.
Invert Scale Labels:
When this function is activated, the labeling direction of the axes (normally,
ascending axis values) can be inverted to be displayed in descending order.
Logarithmic Scale:
If this function is activated, the axis is displayed logarithmized (for line curves
only). Only the input of the start value is permitted and it is rounded to the
nearest power of ten. The subdivisions are derived from the grid number. Each
grid division represents a decade.
Interval rounded:
If you select Range and also activate this function, CONCERTO tries to display
the scale range rounded to match the diagram grid (see Diagram Grid auf
Seite 207). The upper and lower limits of the scale will then no longer correlate
exactly with the specified range limits. In an auto scaling, however, the limits are
selected in such a way that the complete curve can be displayed within the axis.
This type of display means no decimal places are needed in the scale labeling.
Scientific Number Format:
A drop-down list box provides the following setting options:
„ Auto:
With this setting a suitable representation is automatically chosen for each
value on the scale. For values higher than 1E8 the system changes to sci-
entific number format.
„ On:
Scale values are always represented in scientific number format, indepen-
dent of the scale value. For each value the suitable exponent is chosen so
that the base between 1 and 10 can be kept (except for value 0).
„ Fixed exponent:
With this setting a fixed exponent is chosen for representation for each
value on the scale.
Scale values are always represented in scientific number format, indepen-
dent of the scale value. In this case, contrary to the On setting, the same,
definable exponent is used for all values on the scale. The base values
adjust accordingly.
„ Off:
Scale values are never represented in scientific number format.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 81

[Link] Y-Scale - Unit

Abb. 23

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
This is where you define the unit to be displayed for the specific object. If the
Auto check box is activated, the unit text is automatically taken from the
displayed dataset. If the check box is deactivated, you can choose the unit string
to meet your requirements.
The unit may be either the dataset's Original Unit or the result of a conversion
(Conversion Unit 1/2). For the latter functionality, a unit conversion table is
required. For ASAM data, this table is read from the ASAM database. For more
on this subject, see Unit Conversion auf Seite 263.
If you activate Conversion Unit 1 or Conversion Unit 2, you can select the
conversion unit from the list box. The list box contains all conversion units for the
physical dimension of the original unit.
You can actually define two conversion units but, of course, only one can be
used at a time.
See also Transformation Order auf Seite 79.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

82 Diagrams

[Link] Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout

Abb. 24

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
Auto
The settings on this property page are taken from the Layout Settings (see Scale
Fonts auf Seite 205). Deactivating this check box enables you to specify indi-
vidual settings for the relevant axis.
Specific
If this check box is activated, you can specify individual settings for the relevant
axis which will take effect immediately. The settings are then no longer taken
from the Layout Settings (see Scale Fonts auf Seite 205).
Font Name:
Defines the font for the axis.
Tick Labels:
Here you can set the font size and style and the orientation (vertical or hori-
zontal) for the numeric labeling of the axis.
Name:
Here you can set the font size and style and the orientation (vertical or hori-
zontal) for the name of the axis.
Description:
The default setting for the scale description is not normally displayed, but you
can display it if you want to by ticking this check box.
Scale Colour:
„ Auto
The Auto setting displays the axis in the curve color used for the first
dataset displayed on this axis. Deactivating this check box enables you to
specify individual settings for the relevant diagram.
„ Specific
If this check box is deactivated, the color for displaying the axis in the rele-
vant diagram can be selected as you wish.
Suppress Tick Labels:
Either the first or the last scale value is suppressed.
Show Sub Ticks:
When this check box is activated, an unlabeled intermediate scale tick is
inserted between two main scale ticks.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 83

On logarithmic axes, the Sub-Ticks correspond to the logarithmic scale subdivi-

sions 2 to 9. If possible, all sub-ticks are labeled.

[Link] Datasets - Datasets

Abb. 25

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
This property page is where you define the datasets to be displayed in the
object.
The datasets you selected are listed in the list box. If you want to add a dataset,
drag it to this list from Channel Browser or Data Explorer.
It is inserted where you drop it in the list.
If you want to delete a dataset, select it and click the following button:

You can change the order of the datasets using the two arrows.

Dataset X/Y If multiple datasets are specified they are drawn overlaid at the same position for
each cycle.
The x-dataset is listed below. Different objects of the diagram can have different
x-datasets. Changes affect all objects.
If a new x-dataset is dragged to the list, it will replace the existing x-dataset.
For doing file comparisons, the individual y-datasets may be taken from different
files. The x-dataset should be taken from the first file. When the y-dataset from
the second file is being displayed it is automatically correlated to the x-dataset of
the same name from the second file and so on. A comparison can even be made
therefore when the files compared have different values and a different number
of points.
For more on this subject, see Comparison of Files auf Seite 253.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

84 Diagrams

[Link] Extras - Z-Class

Abb. 26

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
With this function you can display a certain part of your data based on a given
condition.
A typical application is a trend analysis in an endurance test: The engine is run
several times under defined conditions and the data is saved.
After a test like this you often want to display the change in a certain measure-
ment signal for the duration of a given condition over time. But because all the
data was recorded sequentially, the data points you are interested in have to be
extracted.
This is easy to do if you set the z-condition. Click the following button and enter a
number in the input field:

The values are entered in the Z-Classes list box. To remove a class, click the
following button:

When drawing the y-curve, CONCERTO then also reads in the related value of
the z-dataset and decides whether the point is to be used in the display or not.
The z-dataset can be a mode number, for example, or another measured quan-
tity, such as speed.
Since the specified value and the actual measurement data value are never
absolutely identical, CONCERTO allows a tolerance band around the defined
z-value. The tolerance band is to be understood as a percentage of the distance
between two z-classes. If the value is 50 %, for example, the tolerance band
goes as far as exactly half the distance to the very next z-class. In such a case,
each data value is automatically assigned to its nearest z-class.
The tolerance value is 5% by default, but you can change this value via the entry
ZClassTolPercent=n in the [Link] file for each future CONCERTO session.
The value modified on this property page is saved in the layout.
If ZClassTolPercent=0, CONCERTO only looks for identical values. This should
only be used for integers, however.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 85

You can also enter several z-values. If you do, CONCERTO automatically gener-
ates several curves corresponding to the defined conditions. When you define a
z-dataset, the display attributes, such as color and line style, relate to the
currently selected z-condition. In this way, you can assign a different style to
each z-value.
Text conditions You can also select a dataset that contains text as a z-dataset. If you do that, just
insert a text as the text condition and CONCERTO will automatically make a
string comparison. If the strings are the same, the condition is fulfilled. This is
particularly useful when you have assigned special tests to specific test phases
and want to use the texts as a condition for trend analyses.

[Link] Attributes - Attributes

Abb. 27

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
This property page is where you can define display attributes.
Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
In the selection box you can select the datasets whose attributes you wish to
change. The button Select All allows you to select all datasets.
It is also possible to edit the envelope attributes in contour maps. The dataset list
now also contains the additional item Envelope.
To add or delete datasets, use the Datasets category.
Show Data Points (isoline diagram only):
Shows the actually measured values used for map interpolation.
Markers and labels are drawn as specified under Marker and Labels.
If you select a line style under Style, the data points are joined by lines, thus
providing information about how the individual measurement points were
executed.
Draw Frame (window image only):
Draws a frame around the window image.
Colour:
Selection of line color.
Style:
Choice of line style (0 = invisible).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

86 Diagrams

Width:
Choice of line width in points (pts).
0 means Auto, i.e. the line width is derived from the setting made via
Extras | Layout Settings | Window | Window Styles (Auto Pen Width) (see
Window Styles auf Seite 209).
Fill: (radar diagrams only)
Fills the area enclosed by the lines between the measurement points.
Fill Colour: (waterfall diagrams only)
A waterfall consists of curves arranged one behind the other whose areas are
shaded. The fill color of the areas can be defined on this property page. This
dialog is opened by selecting Properties from the display item's context menu in
Layout Explorer. It is possible to include multiple curves (i.e. datasets) in a water-
fall. With different area fill colors you can immediately spot the channels that rise
above the others.

[Link] Attributes - Marker

Abb. 28

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
This property page is where you can define markers.
Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
In the selection box you can select the datasets whose attributes you wish to
change. The button Select All allows you to select all datasets.
To add or delete datasets, use the Datasets category.
Show Data Points (isoline diagram only):
Shows the actually measured values used for map interpolation.
Markers:
„ Off: No marker is set.
„ Auto: Distributes a number of markers over the curve so that a meaningful
representation is achieved.
This function is helpful in particular for curves with many measurement
points.
The number of markers distributed over the curve by selecting Auto is set
to 15, by default.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 87

You can change this value via the AutoMarkerCount= entry in the con-
[Link] file.
„ All Points: Sets a marker on each measurement point of the object.
„ Markers: Specifies the number of markers to be displayed on the object
evenly distributed.
Type:
Choice of marker type.
Fill Marker:
Lets the marker be displayed filled.
Marker Size:
„ Global: default setting for the marker
„ Specific: selection of any marker size

[Link] Attributes - Labels

Abb. 29

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
The labels you want displayed (labels of curves) can be defined on this property
page.
Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
In the selection box you can select the datasets whose attributes you wish to
change. The button Select All allows you to select all datasets.
To add or delete datasets, use the Datasets category.
Show Data Points (isoline diagram only):
Shows the actually measured values used for map interpolation.
Position:
Selection of the position of the reference point where the label is to be displayed.
Text:
Selection of the information to be displayed in the label.
X and Y Offset:
Shifts the label to the left, center or right.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

88 Diagrams

Background:
Sets the label's background color.
The different label colors are a graphical feature that among other things allows
you to distinguish clearly between contour lines of isoline diagrams and actually
measured values.
Transparent:
Makes the label appear transparent.
Frame:
Adds a frame to the label.
Horizontal:
Displays the label horizontal to the x-axis.
Tangential:
Displays the label as a tangent to the curve.
Vertical:
Displays the label vertical to the x-axis.
Decimal places:
Specification of the decimal places when Y-Value or Z-Value is selected as the
label type.
Auto:
The decimal places of a label for y and z value are set to three by default. If
you deactivate this check box, you can set the decimal places to anything
from 0 to 12.
Font:
Defines the font and font size for the label.

[Link] Attributes - Cursor

Abb. 30

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
This property page defines properties of the cursor window which are related to
a display item:
Hide from cursor:
If this check box is activated, the display item will be hidden from the cursor
display. This helps to prevent the cursor window from getting too crowded.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 89

Cursor Text:
Allows you to define an individual name for the display item in the cursor window.
Auto:
Applies the name of the dataset.
Decimal places:
Defines the decimal places for the cursor values.
Auto:
Applies the general settings from a cursor's properties dialog (see Exploration
Guide, under Basics of Operation - Graphical Data Analysis).
The settings described above only refer to cursor display in the display items
currently selected.
For setting cursor properties which refer to a diagram object's cursor and the
related cursor window, see Exploration Guide, under Basics of Operation -
Graphical Data Analysis.

3.5 Bar Curve

For bar curves, each measurement point of the dataset to be displayed is repre-
sented by a single bar. If more than one dataset is displayed with only one
y-axis, the bars are arranged next to one another.

3.5.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 76)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 90)
Labels (see Attributes - Labels auf Seite 87)

Tab. 4

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

90 Diagrams

[Link] Attributes - Attributes

Abb. 31

This dialog is where you can define display attributes.

Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
This property page is only for changing the attributes. To add or delete datasets,
use the Datasets category.
Colour:
Setting for the fill color of bars and bands
Style:
Choice of the fill pattern
Bar Width (bar curves only):
Specification of the bar width in %, where 100 % means bars touching one
another.

3.6 Band
Band diagrams are used for evaluating data that has been searched for the
maximum, minimum, mean, mean+standard deviation and mean-standard devi-
ation. Band diagrams therefore require at least 5 curves. They can also be
generated without standard deviation datasets.
If you only specify two datasets (one for minimum and one for maximum), you
simply display the difference between two channels as a band or bar (also called
a differential plot).
The properties are similar to those of bar curves. The main difference is that you
do not enter any y-datasets but special datasets for minimum, maximum, mean,
mean + standard deviation and mean - standard deviation. They then also
appear in Layout Explorer as display items and have the display attributes.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 91

3.6.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 91)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 92)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 93)

Tab. 5

[Link] General - General

Abb. 32

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Auto:
If this check box is activated, the y-axis takes the name of the first dataset.
Description:
This text appears as the second line if via Extras | Layout Settings | Scales the
check box Description is activated on the Scale Fonts property page (see
Scale Fonts auf Seite 205). The description text will initially be derived from the
first dataset to be displayed by the object. After creation of the object you can
modify it as you wish.
Band:
Display as band graph.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

92 Diagrams

Boxes:
Display as differential bar curve.
Hide Scale:
Suppresses the labeling of the y-axis.
If an object is linked to another object via the Links property page (see General -
Links auf Seite 67), the axis is always hidden.
To unhide an axis labeling, proceed in one of the following ways:
„ By right-clicking the diagram grid and choosing Scale Properties from the
context menu.
All axes used in the diagram are shown under this entry. Clicking the
required axis will open the General property page where you need to deac-
tivate the Hide Scale check box.
„ By right-clicking the object in Layout Explorer and choosing Scale Proper-
ties from the context menu.
For the further procedure, see activation via diagram grid as described
above.
No File Comparison:
When this check box is activated, the object is excluded from the file compar-
ison.
Show All Names:
If this check box is activated, the axis labeling includes the names of all the
display items (i.e. datasets) represented on the axis.

[Link] Datasets - Datasets

Abb. 33

This dialog is where you define the limits of the band graph. The Mean line and
Standard Deviation Range check boxes can be activated as additional parame-
ters.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 93

[Link] Attributes - Attributes

Abb. 34

Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
This property page is only for changing the attributes. To add or delete datasets,
use the Datasets category.
The various display items of a band (e.g. upper and lower envelope curve, mean
value, etc.) possess individual display attributes, such as color, fill pattern, width,
etc.

3.7 pV Diagrams
pV Diagrams are normal line curves. When inserted in a diagram object, the
diagram object undergoes an x-transformation at the same time:
„ pV diagrams:
– transformation macro XT_pVdiag_rel
– transformation macro XT_pvdiag_abs
„ log. pV diagrams:
– transformation macro XT_pvdiag_norm
– transformation macro XT_pvdiag_abs
In this transformation, the normal crank angle trace is replaced by the standard-
ized or absolute cylinder volume curve and possibly a logarithmation is
performed.

3.7.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

94 Diagrams

Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 76)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Unit (see Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Extras Z-Class (see Extras - Z-Class auf Seite 84)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)
Marker (see Attributes - Marker auf Seite 86)
Labels (see Attributes - Labels auf Seite 87)

Tab. 6

3.8 Contour Maps

A contour map represents three-dimensional data.
Contour maps are sub-objects of diagram objects. They are used to display
three-dimensional data in z=f(x,y) format. Contour maps are isolines projected
onto the x/y [Link] join points that have the same z-value. They do not
consist of measurement data. They are interpolated three-dimensionally by
cubic spline functions, comparable to contour lines on maps.
It is also possible to display the actually measured values used for map interpo-
lation (via check box Show Data Points in the Properties dialog of the contour
map/Meas. Values category). These (like the isoline attributes) are then shown
as markers whose attributes may be changed as desired. The property pages in
the Attributes category largely correspond to the property pages of a line curve.
Refer to the following sections:
„ For marker color and connecting lines between markers, see Attributes -
Attributes auf Seite 85.
„ For the marker color/size/fill/type, see Attributes - Marker auf Seite 86.
„ For marker labeling, see Attributes - Labels auf Seite 87.
„ For the envelope attributes, see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85.
The following types of contour maps have the same Properties dialogs:
„ Normal Contour Map
„ Difference Contour Map
A difference contour map is a normal contour map which visualizes the dif-
ference between two 3-dimensional datasets. The z-values of the interpo-
lated grid points of two maps are subtracted from each other and the
isolines are calculated in accordance with the resultant grid.
„ Average Contour Map
An average contour map is a normal contour map that visualizes the mean
values of several 3-dimensional datasets, i.e. several separate maps.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 95

„ Compressor Map
The Compressor Map represents the efficiency and the speed with respect
to the mass flow (x) and the pressure ratio between compressor input and
compressor output.
„ Overlay Map
With this type of map, the z-datasets of two contour maps are displayed
overlapping each other in one and the same diagram (e.g. consumption
map and power map).
The map settings during the creation process refer to the main map, while
the overlying map is created with standard settings.
In Layout Explorer, two linked maps are shown, the properties of which can
be edited individually, as usual.
The overlying map can be identified by the postfix _Overlay.
For details about linked objects, see General - Links auf Seite 67.

Information

If you would like to scan maps with the crosshair cursor and compare the values
with other surfaces, you must ensure that the surfaces you want to compare are
provided with the same calculation parameters (calculation range y, y and size of
calculation grid).

3.8.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 76)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 96)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 97)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 97)
Isolines Calculation Parameters (see Isolines - Calculation Parameters auf Seite 98)
Algorithms (see Isolines - Algorithms auf Seite 100)
Isolines (see Isolines - Isolines auf Seite 101)
Shading (see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112)
Envelope (see Isolines - Envelope auf Seite 102)

Tab. 7

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

96 Diagrams

Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)

Marker (see Attributes - Marker auf Seite 86)
Labels (see Attributes - Labels auf Seite 87)
Here the display attributes do not apply to the source datasets but to the gener-
ated isolines which can be individually selected in Layout Explorer. Each one
can be assigned its own color, style and thickness, as well as a label (name =
isoline value).
Meas. Values Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)
Marker (see Attributes - Marker auf Seite 86)
Labels (see Attributes - Labels auf Seite 87)

Tab. 7

[Link] General - Transformation

Abb. 35

This property page allows you to set transformations. These are additional calcu-
lations in the form of macros that are executed before the data is displayed.
For more on this subject, see Exploration Guide, under Calculations on your
installation CD.
Select Macro:
The drop-down list only shows those macros which are provided for the relevant
object.
It is possible to access all available macros by using the Select Macro button. In
a dialog you can select a transformation macro from the folders defined under
the entry "GlobalMacroDir" in the [Link] file (for each entry the relevant
node is shown) or from the current work environment's macro folder. If a macro
is selected whose transfer parameters are defined using the CalcGraf syntax, a
CalcGraf parameter dialog will appear in which you can set the relevant parame-
ters.
The search order for x- and y-transformation macros is as follows:
„ Current work environment
„ XTrafoMacroDir / YTrafoMacroDir
„ GlobalMacroDir

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 97

Edit Parameters:
For transformation macro parameters matching the CalcGraf syntax, this button
offers a convenient way to edit the parameters subsequently by calling the
CalcGraf parameter dialog. After clicking OK, the changes are taken over into
the Transformation property page.
Clicking on the following button displays the chosen macro in the Formula/Script
Editor:

In the text field next to it you can also enter argument values as parameters for
the macro call. The individual values have to be separated by commas.
For the transformation of contour maps, the interpolated map grid is passed to
the transformation, and not the input datasets. Then you can change the grid's
z-values in the transformation. Afterwards, the isolines are calculated automati-
cally from the transformed grid.
For the contour map, only one transformation is available.
For difference contour maps the macro Dif and for average contour maps the
macro AvgMap is preset as transformation.

[Link] General - Links

This function is particularly practical when two contour maps are to be superim-
posed or a map overlaid by a scatter graph. The link makes it easy to impose the
same scale on different objects (see General - Links auf Seite 67).

[Link] Datasets - Datasets

Abb. 36

In this dialog you can define the x-, y- and z-dataset to be represented in the
object.
The datasets you selected are listed in the list box. If you want to add or replace
a dataset, drag it to this list from Channel Browser or Data Explorer.
It is inserted where you drop it.
For a difference contour map, a separate z-dataset can be set for each partial
map. X and Y datasets are only specified for the first map. The file alias and data
key from the z-dataset are substituted, however, when the second map is deter-
mined internally.
For an average contour map, more than one z-dataset can be specified. They
can also come from different files.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

98 Diagrams

X and Y datasets are only specified for the first map. The file alias and data key
of the respective z-dataset are substituted, however, when further maps are
determined internally.
For doing file comparisons with difference contour maps and average contour
maps, the individual z-datasets may be taken from different files. The x-dataset
should be taken from the first file. When the z-dataset from the second file is
being displayed it is automatically correlated to the x-dataset of the same name
from the second file and so on. A comparison can even be made therefore when
the files compared have different values and a different number of points.
If you want to delete a dataset, select it and click the following button:

You can change the order of the datasets using the two arrows.

For more on this subject, see Comparison of Files auf Seite 253.

[Link] Isolines - Calculation Parameters

Abb. 37

This dialog is where you define the calculation limits for the three datasets and
other settings.
Do not confuse these limit values with the display limit values. Display limit
values are the scale values for the display and are changed by scaling and
shifting. The calculation limits only define the data limits and prevent the calcula-
tion process from extrapolating too far beyond the data range. When you
generate maps with the specific fuel consumption as the z-value, you should
reduce the Z1 value to exclude the idle point with its high z-value.
Spike Filter for Auto Range:
CONCERTO has an algorithm that automatically filters out these idle points. The
algorithm checks the frequency distribution of the dataset that is used as the
z-axis by classifying the values. If a class does not contain any values after the
classification, all values from higher classes are filtered out.
Negative values are taken into account with active spike filter.
With the entry AllowNegativeZValuesForSpikeFilter=0 you can suppress this
behavior - negative values are also filtered out.
When the dialog is first called up, you will see the filtered values already in the
Z1 box.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 99

For example, say the highest specific fuel consumption is about 3000 g/kWh but
the average consumption at most of the measured points is about 300 g/kWh. If
this data were to be displayed as a distribution diagram, there would be a big
gap in it. CONCERTO's logic decides that the very high values are not to be
used for the calculation because they distort the display too much.
When new contour maps are created, the spike filter is always enabled, by
default. By setting the entry MapZSpikeFilter=0 (default=1) in the [Link] file
you can deactivate this behavior.
Auto:
When you click this button, the lower and upper limits of the axis are re-scaled.
This means that pre-filtered values for the z-axis or any other axis can be
replaced by the actual minimum and maximum values of the dataset.
for new data:
If this check box is activated, the axes are scaled automatically when the layout
is reloaded or data changed, etc. That is particularly useful when the contents of
the data files show substantial scatter from test to test. You should activate the
function when that occurs. If the test data is not too scattered in relation to the
value distribution, the same settings should be used for all tests to facilitate later
comparison.
Filter points with a distance smaller than:
Measurement points that are too close together in the map grid can produce an
unsatisfactory map display. This function activates a filter for points that are too
close in the map grid. Points in the x/y planes that are closer than the % value of
the calculation range set here are removed from the grid and not included in the
calculation.
Calculation Grid:
Here you can change the resolution of the calculation grid. A higher grid means
greater accuracy, but longer calculation times.
Handling Depending on the available map data, there are various ways to determine the
Envelopes envelope curve. In a regularly distributed engine map, it is assumed that the data
is divided into curves with a constant x-value. The points with the maximum
y-value in each curve are selected as the envelope points.
In engine maps with irregular distribution, the envelope points cannot be unam-
biguously identified.
Display Grid (surface diagram only):
In the case of very high calculation-grid resolutions (see Calculation Grid above),
the grid on the map surface is in most cases very dense. In order to reduce the
displayed grid lines while keeping the same calculation resolution, the calcula-
tion grid can be divided by a specific factor (max. 5).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

100 Diagrams

[Link] Isolines - Algorithms

Abb. 38

Algorithm:
CONCERTO supports the following algorithms for maps and envelope curves:
„ Cubic Spline:
Algorithm for map points with a regular distribution.
The points can be divided into groups with the same or very similar x-values
(usually speed).
Use the function if CONCERTO does not display the envelope curve cor-
rectly. For example, when there is a turning point in the envelope curve (i.e.
envelope points fall and rise again in relation to the y-axis) which causes the
standard algorithm for the envelope curve to deliver incorrect values.
„ Weighted:
Algorithm for map points without a regular distribution.
This algorithm determines the z-values by a weighted function. The weight
is in the distance between the measuring point and the grid point which
decides whether the measured point has more or less impact on the inter-
polated value.
„ Delauney Triangulation:
Raw data can be scattered freely in the x/y plane. This algorithm uses the
Delaunay triangulation and barycentric weighting for interpolating the grid
values.
Smoothing with the function Smoothing is optionally possible.
„ Quick Hull:
The Quick Hull algorithm is a standard algorithm that typically produces
very smooth characteristic map lines by placing a convex hull over the sur-
face.
This algorithm is especially well suited for compressor maps where it is set
by default.
Step tolerance (algorithm Cubic Spline only):
This specifies (in %) how far a value can stray from the x-values of a point group
before it is excluded from the group (e.g. x = SPEED at 1500 rpm). Using
another INI file ([Link] in the folder where CONCERTO is installed), you can
define the combination of algorithms that CONCERTO is to use for regularly
distributed points (whether only the envelope curve is to be calculated using
algorithm 2 or the isolines as well). The [Link] file is defined in the [Link]
file (entry MapConfig=Pfad zu [Link]). It also contains a description of the
parameters.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 101

[Link] Isolines - Isolines

Abb. 39

Creating and 1. Click the following button:

Editing Isolines

2. Enter an isoline value (z) in the text box and confirm by pressing ENTER.
The value is inserted in the isoline box. To delete an isoline, select the
desired value (isoline) and click the following button:

3. If you want to display the contour map, click the Apply button or close the
dialog with OK.
If you want to add or remove other isolines, open the object properties again if
you have closed the dialog, or simply add/delete them.
The Z0, Z1 and Interval settings are needed to create the isolines. They define
the range (from ZO to Z1) and the distance (Interval) between the isolines. If you
click the Auto button, the settings of the calculation range field are applied to the
isoline definition.
When you first create an engine map, click Add Isolines to insert the isolines
suggested by IndiCom.
If you want to change the interval or range of isolines without deleting the
existing isolines, click Add Isolines. The new isolines will be added to the
existing ones. By contrast, if you click Replace Existing Isolines, all the existing
lines are deleted and the new, changed lines are inserted.
If you activate the Auto box, the isoline settings are automatically adjusted to
other tests.
Isoline Colours from Item Attributes:
When this option button is activated, the settings from the Attributes category
(see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85) will take effect. This allows you to set the
attributes (e.g. line width) for isolines individually (multiple selection also
possible).
Isoline Colours from Shading:
When this option button is activated, the colors set in the Isolines category of
the Shading property page can be applied to the isolines. This will shade the
isolines in accordance with the color design. This is useful in particular if the
function Enable Shading is deactivated.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

102 Diagrams

Uniform Colour for Isolines:

When this option button is activated, you can select a color in the color selection
box that will be applied to all isolines.
Invisible Isolines:
Activating this option button makes all isolines invisible.

[Link] Isolines - Envelope

Abb. 40

In this dialog you can specify whether the map is to be limited by an envelope
curve. It gives you the option of setting whether and how the envelope curve is to
be calculated from the data or whether an external envelope curve should be
used.
Clip map on envelope:
Clips the map along the envelope curve.
Calculate envelope from data:
Calculates the envelope curve from the available data.
You can specify whether the envelope curve is only to limit the map at the top
(envelope curve) or also at the bottom (envelope curve with curve of motored
engine).
„ Envelope: linear:
Joins the points of the envelope curve by straight lines.
„ Envelope: Spline:
Joins the points of an envelope curve by a spline.
„ Envelope: Approximation:
Applies polynomial approximation to the envelope curve.
„ Convex Hull: linear:
Lays a convex hull around the data points so that all of the data points are
enclosed by this hull. The points of this hull are data points which are con-
nected by straight lines.
„ Convex Hull: Spline:
Joins the points of an envelope curve by a spline.
„ Convex Hull: Spline(upper)/linear(lower):
Joins the points of the envelope curve by a spline and the points of the
curve of the motored engine by straight lines.
„ FLC(linear) from Step Maximum:
Joins the points of the envelope curve by a straight line.
The envelope points are represented by the maxima of the individual speed
steps.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 103

„ FLC(Spline) from Step Maximum:

Joins the points of the envelope curve by a spline.
The envelope points are represented by the maxima of the individual speed
steps.
„ Hull(linear) from Step Min/Max:
Joins the points of an envelope curve by a straight line.
The envelope points are represented by the maxima, the points of the curve
of the motored engine by the minima of the individual speed steps.
„ Hull(Spline) from Step Min/Max:
Joins the points of an envelope curve by a spline.
The envelope points are represented by the maxima, the points of the curve
of the motored engine by the minima of the individual speed steps.
„ Circle:
Puts a circle as envelope around the data points. The radius has to be
selected in the unit of the x-axis.
Typical use: visualization of the temperature distribution at the piston
Use external envelope:
Here you can specify whether the envelope curve is to be derived from the
y-channel or whether another channel is to be used for the calculation. You can
switch this function on by clicking the Use external envelope option button.

Abb. 41

Information

In this case, the map's x-dataset must also be available in the external envelope
file.

„ File Alias:
Enter the substitute name for the file that you want to use.
„ Data Key:
Enter the data key where the envelope curve is stored.
„ Name:
Enter the normname of the measured envelope curve.
„ Use external envelope also for map calculation:
Use this option if the points of the specified curve are also to be used to cal-
culate the isolines.
Because the behavior of the engine map in the envelope range is critical, it
is often advisable to record the envelope curve at a higher resolution.
On the one hand, you can use this separate envelope curve to delimit the
map, and on the other hand, you can also use it for the map calculation
itself. That is assuming, of course, that the z-value (e.g. specific fuel con-
sumption) was also recorded. What you then get is a much more accurate
calculation in this critical range.
This option is less important for a regularly distributed map because you will
already have saved the envelope curve in the map data.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

104 Diagrams

3.8.2 Map Cross Sections

Map cross sections are horizontal or vertical cross sections through a contour
map, the position of which is determined by a single (dynamic) or band cursor
(static).
By selecting the context menu option Create Map Cross-Sections of a contour
map (can be called via Layout Explorer or via the y-axis of a contour map), you
can apply single or multiple sections to a contour map. One can distinguish
between dynamic and static cross sections.

Abb. 42

The dynamic cross section can be changed permanently by moving a single

cursor, while, in the case of a static cross section, a fixed and pre-defined range
is intersected (either manually or by band cursor). Dynamic cross sections are
consequently always single cross sections while static cross sections are
multiple cross sections.
The following examples demonstrate the different kinds of map cross sections,
depending on the selected context menu option:

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 105

Single vertical/horizontal (dynamic)

1 .....Single vertical (dynamic)

2 .....Single horizontal (dynamic)
Abb. 43

A vertical/horizontal single cursor is set at the center of the map and, in addition,
using the single cross section and one of the cursor’s position label a line
diagram is created, which displays the cross section area’s values, depending
on the current position of the cursor.
In this respect, if the selection is:
Single vertical (dynamic)
„ the x-axis of the line diagram corresponds to the y-axis of the isoline dia-
gram
and
„ the y-axis of the line diagram corresponds to the z-axis of the isoline dia-
gram.
Single horizontal (dynamic)
„ the x-axis of the line diagram corresponds to the x-axis of the isoline dia-
gram
and
„ the y-axis of the line diagram corresponds to the z-axis of the isoline dia-
gram.
The line diagram is dynamically linked to the cursor, i.e. if you move the cursor to
select another position to create the cross section, the line diagram will adjust
automatically.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

106 Diagrams

Multiple vertical/horizontal (static)

With this section variation, there are two ways to define the range you would like
to view in the cross section diagram:
„ by setting a band cursor from the toolbar and calling up the context menu
option Multiple vertical (static) or Multiple horizontal (static)
„ by calling up the context menu option Multiple vertical (static) or Multiple
horizontal (static) directly
In both cases, a dialog will be shown which contains either the start and end
value of the band cursor or the start and end value of the x-axis, depending on
the variant you selected.
Via Intervall you can define how many individual curves you would like your
multiple cross section to have (e.g. start value 0, end value 100, interval 10 – the
multiple cross section will have 10 curves.)
• If required, reset the values and confirm the dialog with OK.

1 .... Multiple vertical (static)

2 .... Multiple horizontal (static)
Abb. 44

An additional line diagram with multiple cross sections and a legend is created.
The lines displayed in red and/or green correspond to the ones further in the
foreground.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 107

In this respect, if the selection is:

Multiple vertical (static)
„ the x-axis of the line diagram corresponds to the y-axis of the isoline dia-
gram
and
„ the y-axis of the line diagram corresponds to the z-axis of the isoline dia-
gram.
Multiple horizontal (static)
„ the x-axis of the line diagram corresponds to the x-axis of the isoline dia-
gram
and
„ the y-axis of the line diagram corresponds to the z-axis of the isoline dia-
gram.
The line diagram is not dynamic. If you would like to create another map cross
section, delete the cross section diagram and make another selection.

3.9 Campbell Diagram

A Campbell diagram is an x/y/z representation in which markers are drawn at the
appropriate point of the x/y planes. The z-value determines the color for the
marker fill.
The Campbell diagram can be used, for example, to visualize acoustic evalua-
tions or classification results.
The marker symbols can be given different color fills depending on the z-value.

3.9.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 76)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 97)
Extras Shading (see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112)
Attributes Marker (see Attributes - Marker auf Seite 86)
Labels (see Attributes - Labels auf Seite 87)

Tab. 8

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

108 Diagrams

3.10 Scatter
The scatter graph is an x/y display in which only points are drawn. The correla-
tion between two datasets can thus be examined or the point distribution visual-
ized. If the z-dataset is added, x/y/z data can then also be visualized. The
z-information can be represented by a z-label.
Furthermore, if you divide the values into categories for the z-dataset, the marker
symbols used can be colored differently depending on the z-value.

3.10.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 76)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Extras Z-Class (see Extras - Z-Class auf Seite 109)
Shading (see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)
Marker (see Attributes - Marker auf Seite 86)
Labels (see Attributes - Labels auf Seite 87)

Tab. 9

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 109

[Link] Extras - Z-Class

Abb. 45

In this dialog you can define a z-dataset. It can be used for labeling the individual
points with values from another dataset or for assigning different colors to the
points depending on the corresponding z-value.
For this purpose, the value range of the z-dataset has to be divided into classes.
Enter a class value in the list box after clicking the New button in the list header.
The Remove button allows you to remove a defined class.
The values must always be regarded as class mean values, i.e. the z-range for a
class always starts/ends in the middle between the current class value and the
value of the previous/next class. The exceptions are the first and last class. The
first class always starts at -infinite and the last class stops at +infinite. Defining
only one class therefore has no effect at all.
As soon as you have defined a z-dataset and classes, you will see the classes
as display items in Layout Explorer. They represent partial amounts of group of
points to which separate attributes can be assigned. Select each display item in
turn and set the color or marker type accordingly.
If you want a z label, define the Marker label position and the Z-Value label
content.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

110 Diagrams

3.11 Surface
Surface diagrams are standalone objects used to display an x/y/z set of data as
three-dimensional surfaces. A polygon matrix is used to represent the surface.
Each polygon is given a color that relates to the height in the z direction. The
surface can be rotated through 360° azimuth and 0° to 90° elevation.
CONCERTO provides two types of surface diagrams: interpolation surfaces and
non-interpolation surfaces. For representing the non-interpolation map, interpo-
lated values are calculated from the measured values along a regular calculation
grid. Then the surface of the map is drawn via these interpolated values. Since
no interpolation is applied for this type of map, the displayed grid corresponds
directly to the grid drawn by the measured values. As a prerequisite for this, the
measured values must be distributed equally in the x- and y-direction. If this is
not the case, the message "Invalid Data for the noninterpolation surface
diagram" is output. The number of measurement points in the x- and y-direction
may differ.

3.11.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 111)
Scales X-Scale / Y-Scale / Z-Scale (see Scales - X/Y/Z-Scale auf Seite 118)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 97)
Control Dataset (see Datasets - Control Dataset auf Seite 112)
Grid Grid (see Grid - Grid auf Seite 119)
Surface Calculation Parameters (see Isolines - Calculation Parameters auf Seite 98)
Algorithms (see Isolines - Algorithms auf Seite 100)
Shading (see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112)
Envelope (see Isolines - Envelope auf Seite 102)
Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)

Tab. 10

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 111

[Link] General - General

Abb. 46

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer. It is derived from the first y-dataset or from the z-dataset with
x/y/z displays.
Show Measurement Points on Surface:
If this check box is activated, markers are displayed for the actual measurement
points on the map surface. The markers appear in the color defined for the
z-value of the measurement point.
For more on this subject, see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112.
Show Measurement Points in X/Y Plane:
If this check box is activated, the individual measurement points are represented
on the x/y plane.
Show Lines for Measurement Point:
If this check box is activated, a line is drawn which connects the markers of the
measurement points on the x/y plane and the map surface.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the diagram object is hidden. The object is
still visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the diagram object is excluded from
printing.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

112 Diagrams

[Link] Datasets - Control Dataset

Option N[4] is required for this function. (For options, see Help | Info.)

Abb. 47

In this dialog you can specify a dataset that is to be taken for map shading
instead of the z-dataset, thus adding a fourth dimension to the map.
The value of the control dataset at the current point so determines the color of
the map and provides information about a fourth quantity.
The color design of the map no longer matches the values of the z-dataset but
the ones of the control dataset.

[Link] Surface - Shading

Abb. 48

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 113

This property page is generally used for all objects for which the color is derived
from a z-dataset (e.g. 3D map, contour map with shading activated, 3D bars).
This is where you assign a color design to a value range of the z-dataset. Not all
of the controls are available at all times (e.g. Range derived from Data) or there
may be additional controls, depending on the object. The available options are
described below.
Enable Shading:
When this check box is activated, the 2D/3D map is shaded in accordance with
the set color design (on the right).
Colors and weightings can be selected to obtain a color curve.
„ Continuous (contour map only):
The whole contour map is shaded in accordance with the set color design.
„ Bands (contour map only):
The area between two isolines is shaded homogeneously with the preset
color. Colors are assigned to the heights of the isolines in the z direction.
For all z-heights between two isolines the same color is applied, which is
derived from the color used for the height in the center of the band in accor-
dance with the preset shading.
Shaded Mesh (surface diagram only):
When this check box is activated, the map grid is shaded in accordance with the
set color design (on the right).
Colors and weightings can be selected to obtain a color curve.
Colours:
„ Blend
The diagram is represented by a blend of the two set colors and the sub-
tractive color mix is used.
„ Spectrum
The diagram is represented by the spectral color design and the additive
color mix is used.
Weight:
A bias can be given to the color shades so that there are slight differences
between subareas. The following biases are possible:
„ Even: The color gradient of the color range is straight.
„ Low Bias: The color gradient of the color range increases at the lower end.
This makes small changes in the data in the lower range more easily recog-
nizable.
„ High Bias: The color gradient increases at the upper end. This makes
changes in the data in the higher range more easily recognizable.
„ Middle Bias: Changes in the values in the middle range are more easily
recognizable.
„ Low-High Bias: Changes in both the high value and the low value ranges
are easier to see whereas the middle range is given less bias.
Shading Resolution (not for Campbell and 3D-bar diagrams):
This function allows you to set the graphic resolution to be used for the shading.
Colour Resolution:
This function allows you to set the color transitions. A fine resolution results in
flowing transitions. A coarse color resolution can be used to make color bands
visible.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

114 Diagrams

Range derived from Data:

When this check box is activated, the top color corresponds to the maximum of
the z-dataset and the bottom one to the minimum. That automatically allocates
the complete color range to the complete data range.
If you deactivate the check box, you can specifically allocate the two color values
to z-values which correspond to that color value. That way you can specify that
the complete color range is only to be used for a partial range of the data in order
to achieve higher color dynamics.
Project to X/Y plane:
The surface diagram is projected onto the x/y plane two-dimensionally.
To change the color for the highest z-value, click the upper color selection box. A
standard color dialog appears where you can select a color and have it used in
the diagram.

Abb. 49

To change the color for the smallest z-value, click the bottom color selection box.
To select user-defined colors, proceed as follows:
1. Click the More Colors button.
2. In the Custom tab, select the shade with the cursor in the rainbow color
field or enter the RGB values directly in the numerical fields.
You can select the color saturation with the color slide on the right of the
dialog.
3. Click OK.
The color is automatically transferred to the dialog.

Abb. 50

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 115

Additional Controls:
Display Isolines (contour map only):
If the Enable Shading function is activated, the isolines can be displayed or
hidden by means of this check box.
Fill Marker with Shading Colour (scatter diagram only):
Here you can define that the markers are to be filled with the preset shading.
Selecting this option only makes sense when a z-dataset is defined for the
scatter diagram. It is used primarily for the Campbell Diagram. The marker is
filled with the color that corresponds to the value of the z-dataset at the marker
position.
VisioFlame For the diagram types VisioFlame Diagram and VisioKnock Statistics two addi-
Diagram and Visio- tional color selection boxes are available with which you can define the color of
Knock Statistics values that exceed or undershoot specific range limits.
Diagram
Entering 0 in the bottom-most color selection box (see the figure above) displays
all values below 0 in black.
If you use this function, deactivate the Range derived from Data check box.

3.12 Waterfall Diagram

A waterfall diagram is an independent object which represents cycles of a curve
in 3D format. It is a good way to obtain a clear overview of dynamic changes in
the curve shape. Not only cylinder pressures, but often also frequency spec-
trums are displayed this way for each cycle.

3.12.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 116)
Scales X-Scale / Y-Scale / Z-Scale (see Scales - X/Y/Z-Scale auf Seite 118)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Grid Grid (see Grid - Grid auf Seite 119)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 97)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)

Tab. 11

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

116 Diagrams

[Link] General - General

Abb. 51

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer. When creating the object, the object name is automatically
derived from the z-dataset.
Auto:
If this check box is activated, the z-axis takes the name of the first dataset.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the object is hidden. The object is still visible
and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the object is excluded from printing.

3.13 3D Diagram
The 3D Diagram object is a cube provided with grid lines and an x-, y- and
z-axis. To select the diagram object, just click it.
The object can contain sub-objects of type 3D Bars and 3D Curves. The labeling
of the axes (scale name) is taken from the first object inserted, but can be
changed manually afterwards, if required.

3.13.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click a diagram object in the diagram window, a context menu
appears. This can be done directly in the diagram window or in Layout Explorer.
Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties dialog. This
dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more Property
Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that belong
together.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 117

Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 117)
Scales X-Scale / Y-Scale / Z-Scale (see Scales - X/Y/Z-Scale auf Seite 118)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Grid Grid (see Grid - Grid auf Seite 119)

Tab. 12

[Link] General - General

Abb. 52

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the diagram object is hidden. The object is
still visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the diagram object is excluded from
printing.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

118 Diagrams

[Link] Scales - X/Y/Z-Scale

Abb. 53

Label:
Displayed x/y/z scale name.
Description:
This text appears as the second line if via Extras | Layout Settings | Scales the
check box Description is activated on the Scale Fonts property page. The
description text will initially be derived from the first dataset to be displayed by
the object. After creation of the object you can modify it as you wish.
Unit:
Displayed x/y/z unit.
Auto: The unit is automatically read from the relevant normname.
Range:
X0/Y0/Z0 sets the lower limit, X1/Y1/Z1 the upper limit of a channel range.
Round:
When this function is activated, CONCERTO tries to display the scale range
rounded to match the diagram grid (see Diagram Grid auf Seite 207). The upper
and lower limits of the scale will then no longer correlate exactly with the data.
However, the limits are selected in such a way that the complete curve can be
displayed within the axis. This type of display means no decimal places are
needed in the scale labeling.
Auto Range:
CONCERTO matches the scale range (X0/Y0/Z0, X1/Y1/Z1) to the displayed
curves. Minimum (X0/Y0/Z0) and maximum (X1/Y1/Z1) are set to the x-scale of
the channel used.
Auto Shift:
The selected range is automatically shifted when new data is loaded.
The range is shifted in the direction of the dataset minimum, Z0=min,
Z1=min+range.
Very often the range changes on the x and y scales when new data is loaded.
The curves are then not displayed properly or even at all in the diagram because
the data no longer lies completely within, or lies outside, the scale range. You
can get round this by activating the check box. The axes are then automatically
re-scaled each time new data is loaded.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 119

[Link] Grid - Grid

Abb. 54

Divisions:
In this dialog you can predefine the grid divisions in the x, y and z direction. If
rounding is permitted in the Scale dialog, the grid intervals should only be seen
as guidelines.
3D bars only:
Bar Width X: Defines the width of the bar in the x direction based on the divi-
sions or data interval.
Bar Width Y: Defines the width of the bar in the y direction based on the divi-
sions or data interval.
Related To
„ Data Intervals (recommended for constant intervals between x and y mea-
surement points, such as is the case after classifications): The bars are dis-
played based on the % value set under Bar Width X and Y with reference
to the distance between the individual measurement points.
„ Grid Intervals: The bars are displayed based on the % value set under Bar
Width X and Y with reference to the diagram grid.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

120 Diagrams

3.14 3D Bars
3D bar diagrams are independent objects for displaying x/y/z datasets as 3D
bars.
By contrast with the surface diagram, here each data value is displayed as a
separate bar (i.e. no interpolation). The color of the bar corresponds to the height
in the z direction.
The bar diagram can be rotated through 360° azimuth and 0° to 90° elevation.

3.14.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 116)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 97)
Shading Shading (see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112)

Tab. 13

3.15 3D Curves
3D curves are independent objects for displaying x/y/z datasets as three-dimen-
sional curves. The 3D curve diagram is of particular interest when used in
conjunction with the data cursor.
The curve diagram can be rotated through 360° azimuth and 0° to 90° elevation.

3.15.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 116)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 97)
Control Dataset (see Datasets - Control Dataset auf Seite 121)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)

Tab. 14

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 121

[Link] Datasets - Control Dataset

Option N[4] is required for this function. (For options, see Help | Info.)

Abb. 55

In this dialog you can specify a dataset that is to be taken for shading the 3D
curve instead of the z-dataset, thus adding a fourth dimension to the map.
The value of the control dataset at the current point so determines the color of
the curve and provides information about a fourth quantity.

3.15.2 Data Cursor

Option N[3] is required for this function. (For options, see Help | Info.)
The Data Cursor is a subobject of a 3D-curve object.
Via the context menu of the 3D Diagram (Add Data Cursor option) any number
of data cursor objects can be inserted in 3D-curve objects. The data cursor
objects are also displayed in Layout Explorer.
The data cursor places a marker on each curve in the 3D Diagram object, the
same point being used on each as an index.
As with a genuine cursor object, a table with the x/y/z coordinates of the points is
displayed at the same time at the current cursor position. The table can be
moved, enlarged and reduced. The table is visible on the hardcopy.
Below the table is a slider with which the point number (i.e. index) can be
selected. Alternatively if the cursor box is selected, it is also possible to proceed
step-by-step with the arrow-left/arrow-right keys on the keyboard. That moves
the marker in parallel on all the curves.
A data cursor's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on the data cursor
„ By right-clicking on the cursor and selecting Properties on the context
menu
„ By right-clicking on the data cursor object in Layout Explorer and selecting
Properties on the context menu

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

122 Diagrams

Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 60)
Format Format (see Exploration Guide, under Basics of Operation)
Datasets Control Dataset (see Datasets - Control Dataset auf Seite 122)
Cursor Marker Cursor Marker (see Cursor Marker - Cursor Marker auf Seite 123)
Shading Shading (see Shading - Shading auf Seite 124)

Tab. 15

[Link] Datasets - Control Dataset

Abb. 56

In this dialog you can specify a dataset which is used to vary the color and size
of the cursor marker. The value of the control dataset at the current cursor index
so determines the color and size of the cursor marker.
In diagram objects containing several curves you can assign a dataset sepa-
rately to each curve via their Properties dialog.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 123

[Link] Cursor Marker - Cursor Marker

Abb. 57

Cursor Marker:
Choice of marker type.
Fill Marker:
Lets the marker be displayed filled.
Connect Markers:
If there are several 3D curves in a diagram object, the data cursors are linked to
one another by a line. The sequence in which they are linked corresponds to the
order in which the curves appear in Layout Explorer.
Marker Size:
„ Fixed: Permanent setting for the cursor size, independent of the control
dataset.
„ From Control DS: The cursor size is derived from the dataset selected on
the Control Dataset property page.
– From: Here you specify the marker size to be used for the smallest
value in the Control Dataset.
– To: Here you specify the marker size to be used for the largest value in
the Control Dataset.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

124 Diagrams

[Link] Shading - Shading

Abb. 58

Control Dataset controls the Markers Colour (Shading):

If you activate this check box and a dataset has been defined on the Control
Dataset property page, the values of the control dataset are used to vary the
color of the cursor marker.
The value of the control dataset at the current cursor index so determines the
color of the cursor marker.
Colours:
„ Blend
The value of the data cursor at the current cursor index determines the color
of the cursor marker. The color is a blend of the two set colors and the sub-
tractive color mix is used.
„ Spectrum
The value of the data cursor at the current cursor index determines the color
of the cursor marker. The color matches the spectral color design and the
additive color mix is used.
Weight:
A bias can be given to the color shades so that there are slight differences
between subareas. The following biases are possible:
„ Even: The color gradient of the color range is straight.
„ Low Bias: The color gradient of the color range increases at the lower end.
This makes small changes in the data in the lower range more easily recog-
nizable.
„ High Bias: The color gradient increases at the upper end. This makes
changes in the data in the higher range more easily recognizable.
„ Middle Bias: Changes in the values in the middle range are more easily
recognizable.
„ Low-High Bias: Changes in both the high value and the low value ranges
are easier to see whereas the middle range is given less bias.
Colour Resolution:
This function allows you to set the color transitions. A fine resolution results in
flowing transitions. A coarse color resolution can be used to make color bands
visible.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 125

Range derived from Data:

When this check box is activated, the top color corresponds to the maximum of
the z-dataset and the bottom one to the minimum. That automatically allocates
the complete color range to the complete data range.
If you deactivate the check box, you can specifically allocate the two color values
to z-values which correspond to that color value. That way you can specify that
the complete color range is only to be used for a partial range of the data in order
to achieve higher color dynamics.

3.16 Result Bars

Result bars represent characteristic values graphically. These values typically
include cycle-based and cylinder-specific engine results. With result bars you
can conveniently compare the result values of different cylinders of an engine.
There are four types of result bars:
Comparison Bars The selected datasets, which should only contain one value, are displayed next
to one another as individual bars with a common y-axis. If the datasets consist of
more than one point, the last one is used for the visualization. If you are dealing
with curves that use a cycle number as the basis, the point is used that corre-
sponds to the currently set cycle number.
Statistics Boxes The selected datasets, which must contain more than one point, are displayed
next to one another as single statistics boxes on a shared y-axis. A statistics box
is made up of two parts. The outer bar represents the maximum and the
minimum value of the dataset and the inner bar indicates the standard deviation.
The mean value is indicated by a horizontal line.
Statistics Bars The selected datasets, which must contain more than one point, are displayed
next to one another as single statistics boxes on a shared y-axis.
The statistics bar has the same function as the statistics box. By contrast, a
statistics bar represents only one statistical parameter (e.g. mean value).
Stacked Bars The selected datasets, each with one value, are displayed stacked one on top of
the other. The length of the total bar is the sum of the values of the individual
datasets.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

126 Diagrams

3.16.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 126)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Extras Grid (see Extras - Grid auf Seite 127)
Labels (see Extras - Labels auf Seite 128)
Statistics (see Extras - Statistics auf Seite 128)
Limit Display (see Extras - Limit Display auf Seite 129
Columns Name for display items (see General - Name auf Seite 130)
Unit for display items (see Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81)
Format for display items (see Columns - Format auf Seite 136)
Attributes for display items (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 130)

Tab. 16

[Link] General - General

Abb. 59

In this dialog you can define the general appearance of the result bars.
Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Frame:
When this check box is activated, a frame is drawn around the object.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 127

Field Frame:
Boxes are displayed around the value fields in the supplementary table.
Position:
In these fields you can input the top left corner of the table in relation to the print-
able area (dotted line frame in Design mode) in mm.
Size:
Size of the table in mm.
Font:
Here you can set the font size which is automatically adjusted on magnifica-
tion/reduction.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the object is hidden. The object is still visible
and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the object is excluded from printing.

[Link] Extras - Grid

Abb. 60

Divisions:
Defines the number of divisions on the bar
Minimal Spacing:
Defines the minimum space between two divisions on the bar

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

128 Diagrams

[Link] Extras - Labels

Abb. 61

This property page enables you to specify the position of an additional result
value table.
Position:
„ Off = no result table is displayed
„ Bottom = the table is placed beneath the bars
„ Top = the table is placed above the bars
„ Split = names and units are positioned above the bars and the values
beneath
Bar Width:
Defines the bar width. 100% means that the bars are touching.

[Link] Extras - Statistics

Abb. 62

This is where you can define the statistics values that are to be output as a value
table.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 129

Selection:
Select the values you want using the check boxes. You can input the displayed
abbreviations for the values in the text fields next to them.
Statistics Window:
Here you can define whether you want to perform a statistics calculation over all
of the cycles of a cycle-based characteristic value or if you want to use a partic-
ular section (cycle window). In the latter case, only the most recent cycles of the
characteristic value will be used for the statistics calculation.

[Link] Extras - Limit Display

Abb. 63

With this property page you can define how to represent any limit violations that
might occur. In the event of a limit violation, the background color of the bar or
number field changes. You can set the priority by selecting the Warning or
Alarm option.
Warning/Alarm Enabled:
Use these check boxes to activate the function.
„ Absolute Limits
If this option button is activated, you can define limits (Minimum and Max-
imum). If these limits are violated, they will be displayed.
„ RTP Plausibility Limits
If this option button is activated, the plausibility limits saved in the relevant
dataset will be used. This is only possible if these dataset attributes are
available.
„ Colour:
Here you can set a color for a warning or alarm, depending on the priority
that has been set. The background color of the bar or number field will
change to the color set here if a limit violation occurs.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

130 Diagrams

[Link] General - Name

Abb. 64

Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
In the selection box you can select the datasets whose attributes you wish to
change. The button Select All allows you to select all datasets.
To add or delete datasets, use the Datasets category.
Under Column Name you can change the text displayed for a dataset in the
name field of the table. The Auto check box has to be deactivated first.
The text can also be modified in the table itself by In-Place Editing. Double-click
the text in the table to open the In-Place Editor.

[Link] Attributes - Attributes

Abb. 65

Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
In the selection box you can select the datasets whose attributes you wish to
change. The button Select All allows you to select all datasets.
To add or delete datasets, use the Datasets category.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 131

On this property page you can define the color and style (i.e. fill pattern) of each
bar separately.
The Label Text field can be used to change the names displayed in the value
table. If no input is made there, the dataset names are used.

3.17 Table
Tables allow you to display data in alphanumeric format. Tables with columns
(vertical tables) and tables with rows or lines (horizontal tables) are available.
The order of the columns/lines is the same as the order of the inserted datasets.
To change the order move the datasets on the Datasets property page or shift
the display elements (i.e. dataset equivalents) in Layout Explorer using the
Cursor Up and Down keys while holding down the Ctrl key.
Tables can also be part of a report windows (see Table auf Seite 193).

3.17.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 132)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
X-Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 66)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 133)
Table Layout Layout (see Table Layout - Layout auf Seite 134)
Wrap Mode (see Table Layout - Wrap Mode auf Seite 135)
Columns Name for display items (see General - Name auf Seite 130)
Unit for display items (see Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81)
Format for display items (see Columns - Format auf Seite 136)

Tab. 17

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

132 Diagrams

[Link] General - General

Abb. 66

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
It is advisable to assign meaningful names especially if you are working with
multiple tables in a Table window.
Orientation:
A table can be organized in columns (Vertical) or in rows (Horizontal).
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnDraw / is called before an object is drawn).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
No File Comparison:
When this check box is activated, the object is excluded from the file compar-
ison.
Position:
In these fields you can input the top left corner of the table in relation to the print-
able area (dotted line frame in Design mode) in mm.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the table is hidden. The object is still visible
and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the table is excluded from printing.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 133

[Link] Datasets - Datasets

Abb. 67

All the datasets loaded in the current table are listed here. Use the arrows to
change the order of the channels in the table, if you want to:

Range:
This list box is where you can specify the points of the datasets that are to be
displayed if they contain more than one. If you select Last n points and First n
points you can set point count n in the field that appears to the right.
Don't use Preview channels:
In order to avoid long loading times in the case of large amounts of data, the data
is not loaded to its full extent. The system first only loads the preview channels,
i.e. the data is only shown in coarse resolution.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about Data Explorer on your
installation CD.
In tables, data is normally displayed using Preview channels. However, if you
wish to show the data with the full resolution, you can use the feature Don't use
Preview channels. When this check box is activated, the datasets are always
loaded with the full resolution. Transformation macros in the table then also
calculate based on full resolution.
Range:
Via this drop-down list box you can specify the dataset points to be displayed.
The following options are available:
„ All Points - shows all data points of the dataset
„ First n Points - shows the first n points of the dataset in the table
„ Last n Points - shows the last n points of the dataset in the table

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

134 Diagrams

[Link] Table Layout - Layout

Vertical table

Abb. 68

Horizontal table

Abb. 69

This property page is where you can specify via check boxes whether the name,
description and unit of each dataset are to be displayed or not. You can also
assign the bold and italic attributes to different parts of the header.
The column width can be set separately for each dataset in vertical tables and is
therefore a property of the display item that the dataset contains. You can also
change the width of a column with the mouse by selecting the column head.
In horizontal tables, the name, description, unit and the data can each be
assigned their own Field Width (measured in characters). The widths then apply
to all the channels in a table.
Unit [ ]:
If you activate the [ ] box, the unit is placed in square brackets.
Header Separator:
This check box generates a straight line between the header and the data.
Frame:
When this check box is activated, a frame is drawn around the object.
Values:
Here you can set the column width.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 135

Show Base Channel:

If this box is checked, the internal base trace of the first dataset is displayed as
the first column/row.
Grid:
If this check box is activated, separator lines are drawn between the columns of
a vertical table and the rows of a horizontal table.
Since the table consists of text, you can also define a font size. When you alter
the height of a table, the font size is also changed to ensure that all of the table
contents fit inside the new frame.
Font:
Defines the font and font size.
Show lines/columns for missing Datasets:
If you activate this check box, rows (for vertical tables) or columns (for horizontal
tables) containing no data are hidden.

[Link] Table Layout - Wrap Mode

Abb. 70

With this property page you can define the print order.
Page order:
„ Single Page:
If this check box is activated, only the displayed page will be printed.
„ Down, then over:
If this check box is activated, the table will be printed from top to bottom, as
shown in the graphic.

„ Over, then down:

If this check box is activated, the table will be printed from right to left, as
shown in the graphic.

Fixed Columns:
Here you can define the number of columns that should remain visible when the
table is scrolled.
Fixed Rows:
Here you can define the number of rows that should remain visible when the
table is scrolled.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

136 Diagrams

[Link] Columns - Format

Abb. 71

This property page is where you can define how the displayed numerals are to
be formatted.
Field Width:
Defines the width of the columns of the selected objects or of the table,
depending on the selection.
Decimal places:
Defines the number of decimal places for the selected objects or the table,
depending on the selection.
Text Alignment:
Defines whether the text is left-justified, centered or right-justified.
Auto:
Predefined settings are taken from the database for ASAM data and for other file
formats the settings are defined depending on the structure of the file.
Highlight Cells (for table only):
Maximum/Minimum
If you activate these check boxes, you can set the color in which you want
to display the maximum/minimum value in a table.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 137

3.18 Result Tables

Result tables represent characteristic values numerically. Unlike tables, they only
represent one value for each dataset. On the other hand, they offer special
features for comparing result values from different cylinders of an engine. There
are two types of result tables.
Result Table Hori- If the cylinder sorting function is disabled, all result values are displayed as
zontal blocks next to one another as in a horizontal table. If the cylinder sorting function
is active, the same types of values from different cylinders are displayed next to
one another whereas different result types are displayed one below the other.
Result Table The cylinder sorting function is always active for this kind of table. It corresponds
Vertical to a horizontal result table with cylinder sorting where the fields are not labeled
separately but the names and units are output in the first column one below the
other and the data columns only have a cylinder label. That makes for consider-
able space savings.
Statistics Table Statistics tables display the statistical quantities of curves in tabular format.
Usually they include minimum, maximum, mean value, standard deviation, etc.
The statistics table object corresponds to the statistics box, but with no graphics.

3.18.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 138)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Extras Limit Display (see Extras - Limit Display auf Seite 129)
Columns Name for display items (see General - Name auf Seite 130)
Unit for display items (see Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81)
Format for display items (see Columns - Format auf Seite 136)
Attributes for display items (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 139)

Tab. 18

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

138 Diagrams

[Link] General - General

Abb. 72

This property page is where you define the general appearance of the result
table.
Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Frame:
When this check box is activated, a frame is drawn around the object.
Field Frame:
Displays small boxes around the value fields in the table
Sorted by Cyl. Nr. (horizontal tables only):
When this check box is activated, only same-type result values which are the
same except for their cylinder number are arranged next to one another and
others are arranged underneath.
Position:
In these fields you can input the top left corner of the table in relation to the print-
able area (dotted line frame in Design mode) in mm.
Size:
Size of the table in mm.
Font:
Defines the font and font size.
Behavior of font size when scaling the table:
When the table is resized proportionally (by dragging a corner handle of the
object), the font size will adjust itself accordingly. When you only change the
object width (by dragging one side of the object), the font size will remain
unchanged.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the result table is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the result table is excluded from printing.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 139

[Link] Attributes - Attributes

Abb. 73

Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
In the selection box you can select the datasets whose attributes you wish to
change. The button Select All allows you to select all datasets.
To add or delete datasets, use the Datasets category.
This property page is where you can define the Colour of your table text. The
table text color is a property of the display item.

3.19 Pie Chart

A Pie Chart displays data points as a percentage of an overall value and is
particularly well suited to display distribution and proportions. Accordingly, it is a
display format that shows partial values of a whole as portions (slices) of a circle
(pie). Each sector of the circle represents a partial value while the circle repre-
sents the sum of the partial values.

3.19.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 140)
Pie Chart Pie Chart (see Pie Chart - Pie Chart auf Seite 141)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Attributes Attributes for display items (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)

Tab. 19

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

140 Diagrams

[Link] General - General

Abb. 74

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Auto:
If this check box is activated, the diagram in Layout Explorer is named after the
first y-dataset.
Label:
Diagram title displayed.
Angle:
The angle for the first portion of the pie chart is freely definable.
A negative angle effects counterclockwise rotation, a positive angle effects clock-
wise rotation.
The default setting is 0°. The first part (first y-dataset) is drawn at the 12 o'clock
position. 90° is equivalent to 3 o'clock, etc.
Border:
When this check box is activated, a frame is drawn around the object.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the pie chart is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the pie chart is excluded from printing.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 141

[Link] Pie Chart - Pie Chart

Abb. 75

Label Position:
Here you can choose at which position of the circle sectors the dataset labels are
to be displayed.
Gradient Type:
Here you can define the direction of the color gradient to specify how the color is
to be applied to the circle sectors. Setting it to Off gives the filling a uniform color.
Appearance:
Here you can define whether the individual sectors should be fit into the diagram
frame allowing for a gap, or whether they should be represented in 3D (multiple
selection also possible).

3.20 Radar Diagram

A radar diagram can display one or more datasets in the shape of spider's web.
The number of outward radiating lines corresponds to the number of points in the
first y-dataset. The line of the first point in the dataset is drawn at the 12 o'clock
position and also acts as the y-axis. If you specify an x-dataset as well as the
y-dataset, the values of the x-dataset are used as the labels for the lines.
If no x-dataset is defined, the implicit base of the first dataset is used for the
labeling.

3.20.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

142 Diagrams

Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 142)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Unit (see Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Grid Grid (see Grid - Grid auf Seite 143)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Attributes Attributes for display items (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)
Marker for display items (see Attributes - Marker auf Seite 86)

Tab. 20

[Link] General - General

Abb. 76

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Auto:
If this check box is activated, the diagram is named after the y-dataset.
Angle:
The angle for the first radiating line of the radar diagram is freely definable.
If the data is not crank angle-based, the angle specified here is used for the first
point.
If the data is crank angle-based, the value of the first value's basis is taken as
the degree value for drawing the first radiating line. The remaining values are
drawn equidistantly.
A negative angle effects counterclockwise rotation, a positive angle effects clock-
wise rotation.
The default setting is -90°. The first channel is drawn at the 6 o'clock position. 0°
is equivalent to 3 o'clock.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 143

Hide Scale:
Suppresses the labeling of the axis.
In the case of the radar diagram, the object remains visible even if Hide Scale is
activated. This object is an exception to the other axis objects, such as e.g. Line,
Band, etc. Drawing of the axis is only suppressed within the object itself. Thus,
with the radar diagram, you only have to select the object, open the object's
properties and switch the axis back to Visible.
Border:
When this check box is activated, a frame is drawn around the object.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the radar diagram is hidden. The object is
still visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the radar diagram is excluded from
printing.

[Link] Grid - Grid

Abb. 77

You can define display attributes for the grid in this dialog.
# Divisions:
Defines the y-axis scaling of a radar diagram.
Colour:
Grid line color setting.
Style:
Choice of line style (0 = invisible).
Width:
Choice of line width in points (pts).
0 means that the line width is derived from the setting made on the Grid
Attributes property page via Extras | Layout Settings | Diagram (see Grid
Attributes auf Seite 208).
Fill Colour:
Defines the fill color of the diagram object.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

144 Diagrams

3.21 VisioFlame Diagram

The VisioFlame diagram is used to evaluate AVL VisioSet data.
AVL VisioSet is a visual measuring system for recording the flame radiation in
gasoline or gas engines using an optical sensor (or sensors). Features of the
AVL VisioFlame sensor:
„ Monitoring of flame core composition from 8 view angles
„ Evaluation of the flame's burning characteristics in the combustion chamber
In addition, AVL VisioSet enables crank angle-resolved digitization of eight light
signals (datasets).
The diagram is made up of segments in concentric circles with the number of
segments corresponding to the number of light channels.
The data base (crank angle) is plotted from the center of the circle outwards
along the radius. The signal magnitude determines the color, the signal values
having been assigned to specific colors in the color dialog.
For more on this subject, see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112.

3.21.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 142)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
X-Scale Scale Range (see X-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 69)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Shading Shading (see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112)

Tab. 21

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 145

3.22 VisioKnock Statistics

The VisioKnock Statistics diagram is for evaluating AVL VisioKnock data and
shows the distribution of knock origins round the combustion chamber circumfer-
ence. AVL VisioKnock is a measuring system for determining the places where
knocking combustion originates in gasoline and gas engines.
The defined fan-shaped arrangement of the sensors' observation angles
enables the origin of a knock event to be pinpointed exactly.
In addition, the AVL VisioKnock Spark Plug Sensor lets you evaluate the flame
burning characteristics in the combustion chamber.
The typical knocking combustion in S.I. engines caused by spontaneous ignition
of the fuel-air mixture produces a brief flash in the oxidizing end gas region and
also sends out a pressure wave.
As this pressure wave develops, a compression wave also occurs. Because the
compression wave propagates in a gas that shines extremely brightly, the bright-
ness increases in the more compressed regions and decreases in the less
compressed regions. A brightness wave is therefore also associated with the
pressure and compression wave.
The AVL VisioKnock Spark Plug Sensor records the brightness and brightness
changes in the view angle ranges of the individual measurement channels.
The IFile supplied by AVL VisioKnock contains values for knock probability -
plotted at angles round the combustion chamber circumference. Its circular
diagram corresponds to the fan-shaped arrangement of the sensors on the
cylinder. The x-axis data is plotted anti-clockwise with the color reflecting the
signal magnitude. As a result, the circle circumference corresponds to the
channel's x-axis.

3.22.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 142)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 77)
Y-Scale Scale Range (see Y-Scale - Scale Range auf Seite 79)
Unit for display items (see Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81)
Fonts/Layout (see Y-Scale - Fonts/Layout auf Seite 82)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 62)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
Shading Shading (see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112)

Tab. 22

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

146 Diagrams

3.23 Text / Rich Text

In CONCERTO you have the choice between purely Text and Rich Text objects.
Text object Text Objects are comment objects. They do not contain datasets but simply
display fixed single- or multi-line text. A text object may also contain system and
user variables (see Variables auf Seite 148) in addition to normal text.
Formatting is only possible to a certain degree; font changes will always affect
the entire text.
A text object is created via the Object Library. It appears in the middle of the
window and can then be moved to the required position and resized.
There are three ways to change the text object interactively in the diagram:
„ By changing the object height. If you do this, the font size is adjusted so that
the text fits in the new space available. The width is adjusted accordingly.
„ By changing the object width. This is only possible for texts that are aligned
centered. When the width is changed with the mouse, the font size remains
the same, but the object box is adjusted and the text stays centered.
„ The object is changed in both directions. This is the same as method 1.
The display color and fill color can only be changed using the relevant toolbar
buttons.
Rich Text object A Rich Text object is a text object which may also contain system and user vari-
ables (see Variables auf Seite 148) and also data variables in addition to normal
text. These data variables are values from datasets that are referenced via a
placeholder in the body text of the Rich Text object (see Data Variables auf
Seite 149).
Rich Text objects and the Rich Text editor also provide additional formatting
options (tabs, structuring, text color selection, etc.) as well as the option of
changing the font within a given text, e.g. to use special characters such as
Greek letters.
This object is created via the Object Library. It is displayed at the position of the
window where you draw the Rich Text editor.
You exit the editor by clicking anywhere outside the editor. The Rich Text object
can then be moved to another position or scaled like a normal Text object.
Double-clicking on the Rich Text object re-opens the editor.
Text objects or Rich Text objects can also be part of report windows (see Text
Object auf Seite 194).

3.23.1 Translation of Text

Using a simple text file and the relevant entry in the [Link] file, you can
adjust the data contents of a text object language-specifically.
This option is not available for Rich Text objects because here the text also
contains control characters for the formatting information and the font used.
For more on this subject, see Translating Data Contents from Forms and Text
Objects auf Seite 37.

3.23.2 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 147

Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 147)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Text Text (see Text - Text auf Seite 152)

Tab. 23

[Link] General - General

Abb. 78

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Script (not for Rich Text objects):
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnDraw / is called before an object is drawn).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Position:
Defines the origin of the object which is the top left corner. The coordinates (0/0)
relate to the top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in
Design mode.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

148 Diagrams

Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the text object is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the text object is excluded from printing.

3.23.3 Variables

[Link] System Variables

System variables (also known as Global Variables) contain various general infor-
mation. They can be inserted in text and form objects by means of keywords. All
keywords start with the $ character. There must be at least one blank after the
keyword.
Date/Time $DATE current date
$TIME current time
Print The following variables may not be displayed correctly in test mode as they are
determined when printing.
$PAGENO or $P current page number on hardcopy
$PAGESTOTAL or $T total number of pages on a hardcopy (i.e. all windows,
layouts)
Files The following variables can be used with physical files (not for ASAM tests).
They require specification of a file alias (including the file number).

Information

The alias must not be enclosed in quotes. For use in forms, you can omit the file
alias, i.e. you just write $FILENAME. The alias is then taken from the first dataset
of the form.

$FILENAME(Alias) returns the name of a file with the specified alias

$FILESTRING(Alias) returns the full file name (for data sources with more
than one folder)
$FILEDATE(Alias) returns the file date
$FILETIME(Alias) returns the file time
$FILESIZE(Alias) returns the file size

ASAM Data $ATTRIBUTE(Alias, AttributeName)

Returns the value of an attribute of a test.
Alias and AttributeName should be written without quotes.

Example
„ $ATTRIBUTE(PUMA1,iStartTime):
Returns the attribute iStartTime.
It is also possible to use custom-translated attribute names.
„ $CURRENT_FILE (for PUMA remote operation only)
Returns the name of the current PUMA test (so that it can be opened in
scripts).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 149

General
$BUILD returns the current build number of
CONCERTO
$C returns the current cycle number
(for indicating data)
$LAYOUT returns the current layout name
$LAYOUTPATH returns the current layout path
$IMAGEWIN- returns the diagram name linked to the image
DOWNAME in a template
$M returns the current measurement number (for
ASAM data)
$VERSION returns the current version of CONCERTO

[Link] User Variables

It is also possible to insert user-defined variables defined e.g. via a script (see
documentation about Formula/Script Editor) or in the [Link] file, or
path variables (the first character is usually %, e.g. %testname).

3.23.4 Data Variables

Information

It is only possible to insert data variables in Rich Text objects, but not in normal
Text objects.

1. When you have created a Rich Text object, drag the dataset to be displayed
from Channel Browser to the Rich Text object. In Layout Explorer, a place-
holder in #A, #B, #C etc. format is displayed under the RichText diagram
object. These placeholders also called data variables.

2. Double-click the Rich Text object to open the editor and specify the place-
holder(s) (#A, #B, #C, etc.) at the desired position in the text. When you exit
the editor, the placeholder is then replaced by the contents of the datasets
which can be a value or a text.
Numerical formats Numerals use a default format, derived from the file object. You can circumvent
this format by adding a format string to the variable. The string must have the
following syntax:
Format String: (field [Link] places) or (-field [Link] places)
e.g. (7.3) or (-8.2)
The format string must be in brackets. The numeral before the decimal point
contains the field width in characters, and the numeral after the decimal point
specifies the number of decimal places.
The left/right-justification is deactivated when you use format strings. A prefixed
minus (-) generates left-justified output and otherwise, the output is right-justi-
fied. It ends at the position of the closing bracket.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

150 Diagrams

Selecting single A number can be added to the variable. #A2, for example, has the effect of
data points displaying the second point of the dataset. A negative number takes the nth data
point from the end, e.g. #E-1 (last data point), #E-2 (last-but-one data point).
Displaying dataset Instead of displaying the actual data contents, you can also display the dataset
properties attributes, i.e. its name, unit and description:

#An displays the name

#Au displays the unit
#Ad displays the description

3.24 Form
A form object is a text object which can also contain data variables in addition to
normal text and text variables. These data variables are values from datasets
that are referenced via a placeholder in the body text of the form.
Form objects can also be part of report windows (see Form auf Seite 194).
Form objects are created via the Object Library.

3.24.1 Translation of Forms

Using a simple text file and the relevant entry in the [Link] file, you can
adjust the data contents of a form language-specifically.
For more on this subject, see Translating Data Contents from Forms and Text
Objects auf Seite 37.

3.24.2 Properties Dialog

A form's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on a cell
„ By right-clicking on a cell and selecting Properties on the context menu
„ By selecting multiple cells, right-clicking on the selection and choosing
Properties on the context menu
„ By right-clicking on the object in Layout Explorer and selecting Properties
on the context menu
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 151)
Links (see General - Links auf Seite 67)
Text Text (see Text - Text auf Seite 152)

Tab. 24

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 151

[Link] General - General

Abb. 79

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnDraw / is called before an object is drawn).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Position:
Defines the origin of the object which is the top left corner. The coordinates (0/0)
relate to the top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in
Design mode.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the form is hidden. The object is still visible
and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the form is excluded from printing.
No File Comparison:
When this check box is activated, the object is excluded from the file compar-
ison.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

152 Diagrams

[Link] Text - Text

Abb. 80

This property page is used both for pure text objects (except for Fill with Space
Characters function) and for forms. The same settings apply.
Text:
The text itself can be entered in the input field and may consist of one or more
lines. You have to end each line by pressing ENTER, except the last line where
there is no automatic line break.
In addition to pure text, you may use also system and user variables (see Vari-
ables auf Seite 148) in the input field, and also data variables (placeholders for
datasets) in the case of forms.
For formatting (decimal places) a user variable, the same conditions apply as for
a data variable (see Data Variables auf Seite 154, under Numerical Formats).
(in diagrams only)
Here you can set the font you want.
(in diagrams only)
Here you can set the font size you want.
Allows you to specify that the whole text of the object, i.e. all lines, will be
displayed in bold.
Allows you to specify that the whole text of the object, i.e. all lines, will be
displayed in italic.
Allows you to specify that the whole text of the object, i.e. all lines, will be
displayed underlined.
The text can be displayed left-justified, centered or right-justified within its frame.

Angle:
You can rotate the text any way you want. A positive angle rotates it clockwise
and a negative angle rotates it counterclockwise.
Frame (only in diagrams):
When this check box is activated, a frame is drawn around the object.
Transparent (only in diagrams):
When this box is checked, the object appears transparent.
For more on this subject, see Transparency auf Seite 59.
Test:
If variables are used within the text, checking this box will resolve them and
show the results as they are displayed in the final object.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 153

Fill with Space Characters:

Form tables are typically used to insert data contents into form type structures.
When creating a form, placeholders are specified in the form. Before the form is
output in the window, CONCERTO replaces these placeholders by the actual
data values. In order to maintain the form structure even if the actual data values
need less space than reserved by the placeholders, the appropriate number of
blanks are automatically inserted. Thus, subsequent text appears exactly at the
place at which it was set when creating the form.

Example
Text with placeholders:
Value Unit
First value :#B1 #Cu
Last value :#B-1 #Cu
n the display, the placeholders will be replaced by the actual data values, e.g.:
Value Unit
First value : 0 mm
Last value :10 mm

However, in some case, this might not be what you want the program to do. For
example, if a placeholder gets very long because of its formatting characters,
you can deactivate the Fill with Space Characters check box. In this case, no
blanks will be inserted.

Example
Bore: #A-1(3.1) #Au
Bore: 50.0 mm
If blanks were inserted here, the text would become too long:
Bore: 50.0 mm

Individual text In multiline texts, you can select text styles that differ from the main setting for
styles any lines you want. To do that, place one of the following characters at the start
of the line:
^B outputs line in bold
^I outputs line in italics
^U outputs line underlined
You can also combine the characters:
e.g. ^B^U^IFeedgas Bench

produces
Feedgas Bench
If there is more than one ^ character at the start of the line, they are ignored. You
can use the ^ character in lines without formatting to see more easily whether the
lines are aligned correctly.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

154 Diagrams

3.24.3 Data Variables

• When you have created a form object, drag the dataset to be displayed from
Channel Browser to the text input field on the Text property page. The
dataset contents are not displayed when you do that but instead a place-
holder in the format #A, #B, #C etc. These placeholders also called data
variables. When you activate the Test check box, the placeholder is then
replaced by the contents of the datasets which can be a value or a text.
Left/right justifica- Normally the dataset contents are output left-justified at the position of the hash
tion character. If there is not enough room on the right-hand side (blanks are over-
written), the next text or data contents are shifted to the right.
If you add an underline ( _ ) to the placeholder, the data content is output
right-justified and ends at the position of the underline. Any empty space on the
left is then padded with blanks.
Numerical formats Numerals use a default format, derived from the file object. You can circumvent
this format by adding a format string to the variable. The string must have the
following syntax:
Format String: (field [Link] places) or (-field [Link] places)
e.g. (7.3) or (-8.2)
The format string must be in brackets. The numeral before the decimal point
contains the field width in characters, and the numeral after the decimal point
specifies the number of decimal places.
decimal places As for form table.
For more on this subject, see Defining Decimal Places auf Seite 158.
The left/right-justification is deactivated when you use format strings. A prefixed
minus (-) generates left-justified output and otherwise, the output is right-justi-
fied. It ends at the position of the closing bracket.
Selecting single A number can be added to the variable. #A2, for example, has the effect of
data points displaying the second point of the dataset. A negative number takes the nth data
point from the end, e.g. #E-1 (last data point), #E-2 (last-but-one data point).
Displaying dataset Instead of displaying the actual data contents, you can also display the dataset
properties attributes, i.e. its name, unit and description:

#An displays the name

#Au displays the unit
#Ad displays the description

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 155

3.25 Form Table

A Form Table is a combination of form objects and a spreadsheet object similar
to an MS Excel spreadsheet. It consists of a definable number of lines and
columns. Texts or data references can be inserted in the cells of the table in the
same way as with form objects.
It is also possible to deposit one-line formula statements. Each line can be
formatted separately as in MS Excel which means that you can create an attrac-
tive numeric data representation. Form tables are therefore graphic objects that
can be inserted in diagram windows or layouts.

3.25.1 Creating a Form Table

1. Select Form Table in the Object Library.
2. Drag the mouse to draw a rectangle in the window area. A small tool tip is
displayed to indicate how many lines and columns the object will consist of.
You can also change these parameters retrospectively in the object’s Prop-
erties dialog which is opened by double-clicking on a line. The number of
lines and columns can be set on the General page.

3.25.2 Displaying Table Headers

In Design mode you can activate and deactivate the display of gray line and
column headers with the Show Table Header context menu option. The object
remains in position and the headers are added to the left of or above it.
The headers label the lines with numbers and the columns with letters.

3.25.3 Changing Column Width and Line Height

You can change column widths and line heights individually by moving the rele-
vant grid lines with the mouse. The table is then enlarged or reduced as a whole.
Setting col- 1. To set more than one column to the same width, first switch the table
umns/lines to the headers to visible via the Show Table Header context menu option.
same width 2. Then select the columns by dragging the mouse across the column headers
while holding down the left mouse button.
3. Move one vertical grid line and all the selected columns will adjust to the
same width.
Use the same procedure by analogy to set several lines at a time to the same
height.
To select several consecutive table columns, click the first and the last column to
be selected and hit the Shift key simultaneously.
To select several table columns not listed consecutively, left-click on the first
required entry, press Ctrl, hold it down and click the other entries you want.
After that you can remove the cell selection by clicking anywhere in the black
area.

3.25.4 Changing the Number of Rows/Columns

The maximum number of rows and columns that can be displayed in a form table
is preset as 200.
This limit can be adjusted individually in the [Link] file via the entry
FormTableMaxColCount= or FormTableMaxRowCount=, respectively.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

156 Diagrams

3.25.5 Entering Numerals and Text

• Click a cell to select it.
It is then highlighted by a double border and you can enter numerals or text
in the field.
Alternatively you can double-click to call up the Properties dialog of a cell
and edit the content in the input field there.
If the text is longer than the cell is wide, it runs over into the next cell, unless
that cell already contains a value. If it does, you can activate the text wrap
mode via the Properties dialog which, while wrapping to the next line, does
not adjust the cell height automatically. Automatic cell height adjustment is
additionally achieved by selecting the Adapt Size feature (see Cell - Cell
auf Seite 162). This also automatically adjusts the size of the entire form
table.
Multiple selection (applied either only to columns, rows, the entire form table
or especially selected cells) is possible.
If the entire form table is selected instead of a single cell, settings in the
Properties dialog will have an effect on the entire table.

3.25.6 Inserting Data

Data is managed in a form table in the same way as in a form object. In other
words, you can add datasets to the object which are then displayed in Layout
Explorer hierarchically under the object. Each of these object datasets is given a
reference name as #A, #B, #C, etc. The names can be inserted straight into the
cells of the form table where they are stored as field functions. If you have not
activated the Show Field Names option on the context menu, the expressions
are converted immediately, i.e. your result value is displayed.
It is important not to enter the contents of the datasets in the cells simply as
numerals or text, but indirectly as references in the form of field functions
because that is the only way, when one open test is replaced by another, that a
form table can adapt to the new data in it. This is the advantage a form object
has over a straight spreadsheet like MS Excel.
Not only can the dataset contents be addressed via the references but also
descriptive data. The same convention applies as in form objects:

#A Data content of the first object dataset. If the dataset

consists of more than one point, only the first value is
displayed in the cell.
#A1, #A2, #A3, First, second, third value of the first object dataset
etc.
#An Name of the first object dataset
#Ad Description of the first object dataset
#Au Unit of the first object dataset
#AU Unit of the first object dataset; shown in square brackets []

• To add a dataset to the form table, select it in Channel Browser and drag it
to a cell in the table. When you drop it, a menu appears offering the fol-
lowing insertion options:
Insert single value The first value of the dataset is inserted in the cell, or more precisely, a field func-
tion #A , #B, etc.
Insert as column The name, description, unit and then the data contents of the dataset are
inserted as field functions in the corresponding number of cells one below the
other. If the inserted dataset is longer than the number of lines in the form table,
the number of lines in the form table is adjusted accordingly and, in working
mode, a vertical scrollbar appears which allows you to select the dataset range
to be shown. However, the form table range shown in the diagram remains
unchanged. The display range can be modified by drawing a rectangle with the

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 157

mouse In Design mode or by specifying a new value for Rows on the General
property page.
Insert as line The name of the channel, its description, its unit and then the data values are
inserted as field functions from left to right in cells next to one another. If the
inserted dataset is longer than the number of columns in the form table, the
number of columns in the form table is adjusted accordingly and, in working
mode, a horizontal scrollbar appears which allows you to select the dataset
range to be shown. However, the form table range shown in the diagram remains
unchanged. The display range can be modified by drawing a rectangle with the
mouse In Design mode or by specifying a new value for Columns on the
General property page.
Insert reference Here the dataset is added to the object only and is therefore given a reference
only name but nothing is inserted in the current cell. That is useful when you want to
use the dataset later in formula expressions or in transformation macros.

3.25.7 Entering Formula Expressions

In addition to set texts and data references, you can also insert one-line formula
expressions as field functions in the cells of the table. First type an "=" character
in the cell and then the formula expression. You can use all the functions of the
Formula Compiler as well as macros in the expression. You can address data
channels via the reference names described above. With #A, #B, #C etc. you
address all the points of the corresponding object dataset, whereas with #A2,
#B5 etc. you can fetch individual points from datasets that consist of multiple
points.

Example 1
=max(#A)
This expression determines the maximum of the dataset which is linked to #A
and displays the result in the cell.

Example 2
If you want to address a dataset directly which you have not added to the object
and for which there is therefore no reference name, you have to use its full name
(with file alias and data key), e.g.
= PUMA1:FL'TORQUE

In formula expressions, however, you can also directly reference the contents of
other cells in the table. The columns of the spreadsheets are designated consec-
utively with letters (A, B, C ...) and the lines with numerals (1, 2, 3 ...). B3 there-
fore would represent the contents of the third field of the second column. Do not
confuse this with #B3 which represents the third point of the second object
dataset.
You can also select multiple points by specifying the top left and the bottom right
cell separated by a colon.

Example 3
=max(C5:D29)
This determines the maximum of the numeric values located in the rectangle
defined by the corner points C5 and D29.

When formula expressions are determined, type conversion is automatically

used.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

158 Diagrams

Example 4
=C5+D5
If numeric values are found in C5 and D5, an addition is carried out. If they
contain text, on the other hand, (i.e. characters other than numerals), the texts
are added to each other. If there is a mixture of texts and numerals, the first oper-
ator is the decisive factor.

If an error occurs when a formula expression is being executed, the text

#ERROR is output in the cell and a corresponding message inserted in the
message list.

3.25.8 Modifying and Locking Cell Contents

Editing • To modify cell contents that have already been input, select the cell and
press F2.
Firstly that switches the display from the value view to the field contents
view (e.g. the formula expression) and secondly it selects the text. If you
then click the field with the mouse, an input symbol appears with which you
can enter new or delete old text.
Alternatively, you can double-click to call up the Properties dialog and make your
input there.
Locking In the Properties dialog you can lock one or several lines by activating the
Disable check box (see Cell - Cell auf Seite 162). This applies to both empty
and filled cells. No inputs can then be made.

3.25.9 Formatting Cells

Each cell can be formatted separately. The usual formatting tools are available
on the toolbar:
„ Font
„ Font size
„ Bold
„ Italic
„ Underline
„ Text color
„ Background color ( = fill color)
„ Cell border
Further formatting options can be found on the property page Cell for form tables
(see Cell - Cell auf Seite 162).

[Link] Defining Decimal Places

The number of decimal places in a cell can be either cell- or data-related. If the
setting is cell-related, the number of decimal places is defined by the cell proper-
ties (see Cell - Cell auf Seite 162).
With dynamic form tables in particular in which data values are to be displayed in
different cells it is often necessary that decimal places are kept independent of
the cell settings. In this case, they can be defined as a property of the dataset
(i.e. display item) as follows:

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 159

1. Right-click the display item (data variable) and open its Properties dialog:

2. Deactivate the Auto check box and set the required number of decimal
places.
The cell format settings have priority over the settings of the display item. If the
procedure described above does not show any effect, activate the Auto check
box on the Cell property page for cells/form tables (Cell - Cell auf Seite 162).

3.25.10 Translation of Form Tables

Using a simple text file and the relevant entry in the [Link] file, you can
adjust the data contents of a form table language-specifically.
For more on this subject, see Translating Data Contents from Form Tables auf
Seite 38.

3.25.11 Transparency
For more on this subject, see Transparency auf Seite 59.

3.25.12 Properties Dialog

A form table's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on a cell
„ By right-clicking on a cell and selecting Properties on the context menu
„ By selecting multiple cells, right-clicking on the selection and choosing
Properties on the context menu
„ By right-clicking on the object in Layout Explorer and selecting Properties
on the context menu

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 160)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 161)
Wrap Mode Wrap Mode (see Table Layout - Wrap Mode auf Seite 135)
Cell Cell (see Cell - Cell auf Seite 162)

Tab. 25

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

160 Diagrams

[Link] General - General

Abb. 81

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnDraw / is called before an object is drawn,
OnSelChanged / is called if a table cell is selected).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Show Grid:
Used to display the grid lines even in normal view mode and therefore also in
printouts.
Border:
When this check box is activated, a frame is drawn around the object.
Position:
Defines the origin of the object which is the top left corner. The coordinates (0/0)
relate to the top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in
Design mode.
Size: Rows, Columns:
With these values you define the number of lines and columns in the table.
For more on this subject, see Creating a Form Table auf Seite 155.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 161

Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the form table is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the form table is excluded from printing.

[Link] General - Transformation

Abb. 82

This property page allows you to set transformations. These are additional calcu-
lations in the form of macros that are executed before the data is displayed.
Select Macro:
The drop-down list only shows those macros which are provided for the relevant
object.
It is possible to access all available macros by using the Select Macro button. In
a dialog you can select a transformation macro from the folders defined under
the entry "GlobalMacroDir" in the [Link] file (for each entry the relevant
node is shown) or from the current work environment's macro folder. If a macro
is selected whose transfer parameters are defined using the CalcGraf syntax, a
CalcGraf parameter dialog will appear in which you can set the relevant parame-
ters.
The search order for x- and y-transformation macros is as follows:
„ Current work environment
„ XTrafoMacroDir / YTrafoMacroDir
„ GlobalMacroDir
Edit Parameters:
For transformation macro parameters matching the CalcGraf syntax, this button
offers a convenient way to edit the parameters subsequently by calling the
CalcGraf parameter dialog. After clicking OK, the changes are taken over into
the Transformation property page.
If you want to create a suitable macro first, click the following button to start the
Formula/Script Editor:

In the text field next to it you can enter argument values as parameters for the
macro call. The individual values have to be separated by commas.
For more on this subject, see Transformations auf Seite 163.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

162 Diagrams

[Link] Cell - Cell

Abb. 83

On this property page you can enter the cell content of a single cell and specific
formatting for a cell or for a multiple selection of cells.
Text:
Input line for the cell content.
Precision:
list box where you can define the number of decimal places for numeric outputs.
If the Auto check box is activated, the number of decimal places is determined
automatically based on the data contents.
The setting refers to the cell and not to the value contained in it. With dynamic
cell contents it may be necessary to relate the decimal places setting to the value
(see Defining Decimal Places auf Seite 158).
Hor. Alignment:
Buttons for left-justified, centered or right-justified text alignment in the cell.
Vert. Alignment:

Buttons for vertical text alignment in the cell: top, center or bottom.
Wrap Text:
When this check box is activated and the adjacent cell to the right has something
in it, the text in the cell is wrapped around each time at a space in the text. The
line must be high enough, however, to contain the text. The line height is not
adjusted automatically but has to be set manually.
Any other formatting is done using the tools on the toolbar.
For more on this subject, see Form Table auf Seite 155.
Disable:
With this check box you can lock one or more cells.
For more on this subject, see Modifying and Locking Cell Contents auf
Seite 158).
Adapt Size:
If this check box is activated along with the Wrap Text function, the line height is
adjusted automatically if the cell contents exceed the cell width.
User Variable:
When the cell text is changed, the user variable defined here assumes the
current text. If the user variable is used in formulas, macros or scripts, recalcula-
tion is performed immediately after the value has changed.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 163

Information

When numeric information from user variables of type Text is used in calcula-
tions, its contents must first be converted into a normal number by using theC-
Real( ) function. A formula may then look like this:
result=value + creal(%variable name)
return result

User variables should begin with a percentage character ("%"), which not only
indicates the start of the variable but also means that it is stored in the uservari-
[Link] file for the next session.

3.25.13 Transformations
Special table displays can be achieved in form tables by using transformation
macros. By contrast with transformation macros for curves and tables, here it is
not just a question of converting data but also at the same time of influencing the
type of output (e.g. the position of a value). The transformation macro is passed
to an object variable for the form table object as its first argument. Class func-
tions (i.e. methods and properties) can then be called up directly with it. The
other parameters that follow it are the arguments of the Properties dialog argu-
ment field.
You have to first set a selection before you can fill a specific cell of the object.
You do this using the GetSelectedPoints method with which you pass the lines
and the number of columns as arguments. You can also select a rectangle
containing a number of cells by passing 4 arguments (x1,y1, x2,y2).
After the selection you can set the contents of the selected cells to a specific
value (i.e. text) using the object’s text method.
You can also carry out formatting with various other methods:
Bold, Italic, Colour, Fill Colour, Alignment etc.
Use the RowCount and ColCount methods to determine or change the number
of cells in the object by macro.

Example
The example below creates a form table automatically sized, where all the
values of dataset #A appear multiplied by 10 in the first column and all the values
of dataset #B appear multiplied by 100 in the second. The table is first appropri-
ately defined so that when the test from which the datasets originate is changed,
the table can adjust itself accordingly:
arg T
// T tis the object variable
//Resize the table object
[Link]= #[Link] //number of rows from point count of dataset #A
[Link] = 2 // 2 columns
for i=1 to #[Link] //loop over all points
[Link](i,1) //Select Cell
[Link]= 10 * #A.y[i]//Set contents of Cell
[Link](i,2)
[Link]=100 * #B.y[i]
next

A typical application for this function is the numeric display of a map (x,y,z) in
matrix form. There is already a suitable macro for this (TF_MATRIXMAP.MAC) in
the standard library. An appropriate class width has to be defined in the argu-
ment line for the x and y data. If, for example, x is to correspond to an engine
speed, you could set the class width to 100. All existing speed values are then
rounded to the nearest 100. That way you will still obtain a sensible matrix repre-
sentation even with x and y values that deviate slightly from the target grid.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

164 Diagrams

3.26 Legend
The legend object is a subobject of a diagram object. Each diagram object can
have its own legend object. Since there are different types of legends (channel,
file, etc.), a diagram object can have more than one legend object. Legends
belong to the diagram object and they move with it when the diagram frame is
moved.
A legend contains names of channels or files and a sample of the drawing style
for the curve (including markers), depending on the type.
Legends are created via the Object Library.

3.26.1 Property Pages

A legend's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on the object
„ By right-clicking on the object and selecting Properties on the context
menu
„ By right-clicking on the object in Layout Explorer and selecting Properties
on the context menu
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 147)
Legend Legend (see Legend - Legend auf Seite 165)
Table Datasets (see Table - Datasets auf Seite 166)
Layout (see Layout - Layout auf Seite 190)
Text Text (see Text - Text auf Seite 168)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes for Legend Entry auf Seite 168)

Tab. 26

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 165

[Link] Legend - Legend

Abb. 84

Type:
You have a choice of different types of legends:
„ Y Name: Displays the names of all datasets in use in the diagram object.
Dataset names used more than once only have one legend entry.
„ Y Name multiple: Displays the name of all datasets, even if they should
occur multiple times, e.g. because the file comparison mode is being
applied (due to a legend entry).
„ Y Name extended: Displays the data key and the names of all datasets in
the diagram object.
„ Y Name complete: Displays alias, data key as well as the names of all
datasets, even if they should occur multiple times, e.g. because the file
comparison mode is being applied.
„ Z Value: Z-value legend used for objects with z-classes and for contour
maps
With this type, you additionally have the following formatting options:
– Dataset Name: Shows/hides the dataset name in the legend (is set by
default).
– Description: Shows/hides the dataset description in the legend (if
specified).
– Units: Shows/hides the dataset unit in the legend.
– Legend entries: Shows/hides all legend entries (is set by default).
This option, for example, can be used to display which dataset was
used as z-information. The advantage over a simple text field is that
the legend has dynamic behavior, i.e. if the z-dataset is replaced by
another, the legend will adjust automatically to any changes.
„ File Name: Shows the names of all files/tests used within the diagram
object.
„ Measurement Name: Shows the names of all ASAM tests used in the dia-
gram object as well as the measurement number. This function is particu-
larly helpful when you open measurements as virtual tests.
„ Cylinder Number: Creates a lengend that includes all cylinders used in the
selected display window.
„ Colour (for maps with shading, such as 2D maps and surface diagrams):
Displays a legend of the z-values as a color bar corresponding to the pre-
defined shading (see Surface - Shading auf Seite 112). The number of

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

166 Diagrams

legend values displayed is determined automatically in relation to the

legend height.
Type Y Name or the last selected type is displayed in this field as standard. You
can change this and select another type by using the LegendDefaultType entry
in the [Link] file.
The following values can be set:

0 Y Name (default setting)

1 Z Value
2 File Name
3 Measurement Name
4 Unused
5 Colour
6 Cylinder Number
7 Y Name multiple
8 Y Name extended
9 Y Name complete

Example
LegendDefaultType=6

When creating a new legend, the program suggests type Cylinder Number.

Orientation:
Defines whether the legend is orientated horizontally or vertically.
Draw Frame:
Draws a frame around the legend.
Display standard legend text:
Shows/hides the legend text.
Font, Size:
Defines the font and font size.

[Link] Table - Datasets

Abb. 85

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 167

For legends of type File Name it is sometimes necessary for additional informa-
tion about a test (such as e.g. engine number, engine code, start time, etc.) to be
given in the legend.
For this drag the channels of interest from Channel Browser to the Datasets
field.

Abb. 86

Of course it is possible to show information from several tests in a single legend.

For this purpose, choose the option Add to this window on the context menu of
the additional test to be included in the legend (multiple selection possible):

Abb. 87

The legend will automatically be extended by the additional test(s) and the
defined information (as available in the test) will be shown in the legend.
Via the context menu you can remove tests from the legend or replace them by
other tests.
The settings for the legend text formatting are made on the Layout property
page.
To insert additional descriptive text, use the Text property page within the Text
category (see Text - Text auf Seite 168).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

168 Diagrams

[Link] Text - Text

Abb. 88

This property page is where you can specify additional text to be displayed in a
legend.

[Link] Attributes - Attributes for Legend Entry

Abb. 89

Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
In the selection box you can select the datasets whose attributes you wish to
change. The button Select All allows you to select all datasets.
Text:
Here you can input the text to be displayed for the legend entry. The name of the
display item can be displayed using a special variable ($ITEM). That allows
user-defined text to be combined with the name of the display item. Via the
buttons Insert Name, Insert Description and Insert Unit you can optionally
also show the name, description or unit of the dataset.
Use Display Item Attributes:
When this check box is activated, legend entries are derived directly from the
display items. The attributes of the display item are transferred as they are from
the diagram to the legend and cannot be changed.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 169

When the check box is deactivated, legend entries can be changed indepen-
dently of the display item. The following controls appear with which you can
change the graphics attributes of individual legend entries independently of the
display item.
„ Type:
The legend entries can be displayed as a line or as a bar.
„ Colour:
Line color setting.
„ Style:
Choice of line style (0 = invisible).
„ Width (not for line curve or bar curve):
Choice of line width in points (pts). 0 means that the line width is derived
from the setting made via Extras | Layout Settings | Window | Window
Styles (Auto Pen Width) (see Window Styles auf Seite 209).
„ Marker (not for line curve or bar curve):
When this check box is activated, the legend entry can be given any marker
you like.
If a display item is added to or deleted from the diagram, an entry is automati-
cally added to or deleted from the legend. It is not possible to add or delete
legend entries independently of the display items. In earlier versions of
CONCERTO, the legend only worked in this mode. If layouts are loaded from old
versions, the legend is written in this mode.
Visible:
With this check box you can show/hide the legend entries selected under
Dataset Items (multiple selection possible).

3.27 Picture
You can also include pictures in your diagram. This is especially useful for
including company logos in headers.
We strongly recommend a color depth of at least 16 bit (65536 colors, high color)
for displaying pictures. If you only have 256 colors, the color display may be
errored, i.e. the bitmaps are displayed in black. If you do not have the possibility
of displaying pictures with a high number of colors, there is a way around the
problem.
• Convert the existing 256-color bitmap into a 64K-bitmap using a graphics
program. The bitmap will then be displayed error-free.
A picture is inserted via the Object Library. It will appear in the middle of the
window and can then be moved and scaled.

3.27.1 Properties Dialog

A picture's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on the object
„ By right-clicking on the object and selecting Properties on the context
menu
„ By right-clicking on the object in Layout Explorer and selecting Properties
on the context menu

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 170)
Picture Picture (see Picture - Picture auf Seite 171)

Tab. 27

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

170 Diagrams

[Link] General - General

Abb. 90

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnDraw / is called before an object is drawn).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Position:
Defines the origin of the object which is the top left corner. The coordinates (0/0)
relate to the top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in
Design mode.
Size:
Object size in mm.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the picture is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the picture is excluded from printing.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 171

[Link] Picture - Picture

Abb. 91

File:
Here you have to specify the picture path. You can call up a Windows Explorer
file dialog by clicking on the following button:

However it is also possible to only specify the name of the picture file.
CONCERTO then automatically searches for it in the folders that were defined
for the BitmapDir parameter under Extras | Pre-Sets.
When the picture is found, you will see a preview of it.

3.28 Movie
You can also include videos ("movies", AVI) in your diagram. The movie object
appears in the left upper corner of the window and is then fully movable and
scalable. Initially, the first frame of the AVI file is shown in the movie object.
Use the slider at the window bottom to navigate within the movie. It is scaled in
milliseconds, enabling movies to be run synchronously, independent of their
refresh rate.
A typical application would be to display a Windows MediaPlayer object to play
videos (AVI, e.g. of crash tests) and the subsequent synchronization with
diagrams in which measured data is shown over time.
A Movie is inserted via the Object Library. It will appear in the middle of the
window and can then be moved and scaled.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

172 Diagrams

3.28.1 Property Pages

A movie's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on the object
„ By right-clicking on the object and selecting Properties on the context
menu
„ By right-clicking on the object in Layout Explorer and selecting Properties
on the context menu

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 172)
Picture Picture (see Picture - Picture auf Seite 173)

Tab. 28

[Link] General - General

Abb. 92

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnDraw / is called before an object is drawn).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 173

The list box also provides the following options:

„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Frame Rate
Here you can specify the actual number of pictures per second with which the
movie was recorded.
This is necessary because, if you are using high-speed cameras, a value is
specified in the AVI file for the frame rate that is different from the one actually
used when recording.
Offset
This function can be used to delay the start time of a video. This allows you to
synchronize videos with measured data or synchronize several videos with each
other.
Position:
Defines the origin of the object which is the top left corner. The coordinates (0/0)
relate to the top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in
Design mode.
Size:
Object size in mm.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the movie is hidden. The object is still visible
and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the movie is excluded from printing.

[Link] Picture - Picture

Abb. 93

File:
Here you have to specify the movie path. You can call up a Windows Explorer file
dialog by clicking on the following button:

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

174 Diagrams

However it is also possible to only specify the name of the movie file.
CONCERTO then automatically searches for the movie file in the folders that
were defined for the BitmapDir parameter under Extras | Pre-Sets.
When the movie is found, you will see a preview of it.

3.29 Line
Lines are used, for example, to point to specific points of a curve or link text
objects to another object. They can also be used as straight lines without an
arrow in headers etc.
A line is inserted via the Object Library. It will appear in the middle of the window
and can then be moved and scaled. Move the mouse to the desired starting point
and then draw a line to the end point while holding down the mouse button.

3.29.1 Property Pages

A line's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on the object
„ By right-clicking on the object and selecting Properties on the context
menu
„ By right-clicking on the object in Layout Explorer and selecting Properties
on the context menu
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 174)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)

Tab. 29

[Link] General - General

Abb. 94

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 175

Name:
Here you can give the auxiliary line a meaningful name so that you can identify it
in Layout Explorer.
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnDraw / is called before an object is drawn).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Starting Point:
Here you define the starting point of the line. The coordinates (0/0) relate to the
top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in Design mode.
End Point:
Here you define the position of the end point of the line.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the auxiliary line is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the auxiliary line is excluded from printing.

3.30 Rectangle / Oval

These objects form a rectangular frame or oval and can be used in diagrams and
for headings.
1. Select Rectangle or Oval in the Object Library.
2. Then drag the mouse to draw the rectangle/oval.
(By holding down the Shift key you can draw a square/circle.)
Displaying rectan- For more on this subject, see Visibility auf Seite 59.
gles / ovals trans-
parent

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

176 Diagrams

3.30.1 Properties Dialog

The Properties dialog of a rectangle/oval can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on the object
„ By right-clicking on the object and selecting Properties on the context
menu
„ By right-clicking on the object in Layout Explorer and selecting Properties
on the context menu
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 170)
Attributes Attributes (see Attributes - Attributes auf Seite 85)

Tab. 30

3.31 Controls
CONCERTO enables skilled users or application developers to insert controls
into a diagram or create their own dialogs with controls. The following controls
are available:
„ Button
„ List Box
„ Combo Box
„ Text Box
„ Frame
„ Check Box
„ Option Button
„ Channel Browser
To create a dialog window, proceed as follows:
1. Select File | New | Dialog Window and an empty dialog window will
appear.
2. Select a control from the Object Library.
3. Click on the dialog window and drag the selected control with the mouse to
define the size you want it to be.
For combo boxes and list boxes this area defines the scrollable space the box
will take up when displayed in full.

Information

A control or a dialog window can only be resized or positioned in Design mode.

In working mode, the controls respond as defined by their function.

A dialog frame is visible in Design mode. It represents the actual size of the
dialog window when called up by a script. When you single-click on the dialog
frame, three handles appear which allow the frame to be resized.
Each control has a Properties dialog. All settings that are defined by means of
the Properties dialog can also be set by means of a script.
Use File | Save/Export: Dialog Window to save or export a dialog that you
have created.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 177

3.31.1 Formats for Controls

Some controls can be assigned formats via the toolbar.
The toolbar automatically adjusts the possible format settings for each control.
For more on this subject, see Format auf Seite 27.

3.31.2 Properties Dialog

A control's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By double-clicking on the object
„ By right-clicking on the object and selecting Properties on the context
menu
„ By right-clicking on the object in Layout Explorer and selecting Properties
on the context menu

Category Property Page(s)

General General; see:
„ Button/Check Box/Option ButtonList Box/Combo Box/Slider - General auf
Seite 177
„ Text Box – General auf Seite 179
„ Frame – General auf Seite 180
Background Picture (see Button - Background auf Seite 181)
Text Text (see List Box/Combo Box – Text auf Seite 182)
Slider Slider (see Slider - Slider auf Seite 183)

Tab. 31

[Link] Button/Check Box/Option ButtonList Box/Combo Box/Slider - General

Abb. 95

Name:
Here you can give the control a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Label. (not available for every type):
Here you enter the text to be displayed on or next to the control.
Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

178 Diagrams

the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs:

Control Event
Button OnClick - when the button is clicked
Check Box OnClick - when the check box is clicked
Option Button OnClick - when the option button is clicked
List Box OnSelChanged - when another selection is made
Combo Box OnSelChanged - when another selection is made
Slider OnMove - when the slider is moved
OnRelease - when the slider is released

Tab. 32

Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].
The list box also provides the following options:
„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Position:
Defines the origin of the object which is the top left corner. The coordinates (0/0)
relate to the top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in
Design mode.
Size:
Object size in mm.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the control is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Exit Dialog Execution in Window (buttons only):
This check box is only available for buttons. It can be used to define a button as
an OK button. In real dialog windows, data can only be processed in the dialog
window itself and not outside it when the check box is displayed. To create a real
dialog window, the prepared dialog window has to be loaded in a script
(command LoadWindow) and then the [Link] method has to be
called. The dialog window is then displayed as a real (blocking) dialog which can
only be exited by clicking OK.
OK buttons are distinguished from other buttons in the dialog by means of this
check box. If required, there can even be several OK buttons which you can
label as you wish (e.g. with Cancel). If a script is also defined for an OK button,
it is called before the dialog is terminated.
No dialog frame is displayed if a dialog window is not called in the script but only
displayed in working mode. All the controls then work in the same way and only
OK buttons have no effect.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 179

[Link] Text Box – General

Abb. 96

Name:
Here you can give the text box a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Single Line:
Allows you to input single-line texts.
Multi Line:
Allows you to input multiline texts.
User Variable Name:
When the object text is changed, the user variable defined here assumes the
current text. If the user variable is used in formulas, macros or scripts, recalcula-
tion is performed immediately after the value has changed.

Information

When numeric information from user variables of type Text is used in calcula-
tions, its contents must first be converted into a normal number by using theC-
Real( ) function. A formula may then look like this:
result=value + creal(%variable name)
return result

User variables should begin with a percentage character ("%"), which not only
indicates the start of the variable but also means that it is stored in the uservari-
[Link] file for the next session.

Script:
In the right-hand drop-down list, you can select a script from the script folder of
the current work environment which is called up if the event selected in the
left-hand drop-down list occurs (OnKillFocus / is called if the given object loses
its focus because another object is selected or OnChanged / is called if the text
in the text box is changed).
Click the following button to open the Formula/Script Editor to select further
scripts:

Or you can simply enter the name of the script file. CONCERTO then automati-
cally searches for it in the folders that were defined for the ScriptDir parameter in
[Link].

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

180 Diagrams

The list box also provides the following options:

„ <None>:
No script is called up before the object is drawn.
„ <Embedded>:
With this function, a macro or script that you need exclusively within the cur-
rent layout can be saved directly in the layout. In this case, it is not neces-
sary/possible to save the macro/script separately.
Position:
Defines the origin of the object which is the top left corner. The coordinates (0/0)
relate to the top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in
Design mode.
Size:
Object size in mm.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the control is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.
Printable:
When you deactivate this check box, the text box is excluded from printing.
Password Mask:
When this check box is activated, input in the text box in working mode will be
shown in password format (***). This enables you to use a text box for password
input, too.
This property can also be set by using an object method in the Formula/Script
Editor.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about the Formula/Script
[Link]:
If this check box is activated, only numerical entries are accepted. In this entry
mode, the character "-" and the decimal separators "," and "." are also accepted.

[Link] Frame – General

Abb. 97

Name:
Here you can give the frame a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Label:
Here you define the text to be displayed in the frame.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 181

Information

Always position the frame in the background by right-clicking on the frame and
selecting Order | To the back.

Position:
Defines the origin of the object which is the top left corner. The coordinates (0/0)
relate to the top left corner of the printable area selected by the dotted frame in
Design mode.
Size:
Object size in mm.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the control is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.

[Link] Button - Background

Abb. 98

In addition to or instead of labeling, buttons may also be assigned a bitmap.

The button always shows the bitmap in its original size. If the bitmap is bigger
than the button, it will be cut off accordingly.
The bitmap and text on the button can be aligned by using the following tools:

These alignment tools are used for the text. For example, left-justified means
that the text is shown on the left-hand side and the bitmap to the right of the text.
Centered means that the text is shown below the bitmap.
File:
Here you have to specify the bitmap path. You can call up a Windows Explorer
file dialog by clicking on the following button:

However it is also possible to only specify the name of the bitmap file.
CONCERTO then automatically searches for it in the folders that were defined
for the BitmapDir parameter under Extras | Pre-Sets.
When the bitmap is found, you will see a preview of it.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

182 Diagrams

[Link] List Box/Combo Box – Text

Abb. 99

Use Dataset:
When this option button is activated, you can enter any dataset or drag one into
the line. The contents of the dataset are then used as the contents of the list box
or combo box.
Use Text:
When this option button is activated, you can enter any contents in the list or
combo box. The number of lines then represents the number of possible options.
The combo box also has the Editable check box. If it is deactivated, later you will
see a drop-down list with the entries you input. When the check box is activated,
the entries represent a list of suggestions. You can add a text yourself in the
dialog.
Editable (combo box only):
If this check box is activated, you cannot only select entries from the list box but
also specify a text.
Test:
If variables are used within the text, checking this box will resolve them and
show the results as they are displayed in the final object.

Example
$TIME

Automatically writes the current time into the text box.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Diagrams 183

[Link] Slider - Slider

Abb. 100

The slider enables you to vary a value within specified limits (Start Value and
End Value). You can move the slider with your mouse either continuously or in
freely definable steps (Interval) in order to select different numbers.
Vertical:
If this check box is activated, the slider is shown vertically.
Horizontal:
If this check box is activated, the slider is shown horizontally.
User Variable Name:
Slider objects can write their positions directly into a user variable.
When the slider position is changed, the user variable defined here assumes the
current slider position. If the user variable is used in formulas, macros or scripts,
recalculation is performed immediately after the value has changed.
If the user variable %SliderX is specified e.g. in a text object of a diagram
window, the layout shows the current position of the slider(s).
Start Value and End Value:
Specify the smallest value (Start Value) and the largest value (End Value) for
the slider. When the slider is moved, the current value is shown.
Interval:
The Interval enables you to define a step width by which you can move your
slider.
Invert:
By activating this check box you can change the slider's direction.
Logarithmic Scale:
If this check box is activated, the slider is shown logarithmized.
Show Values:
By activating this check box, start and end value of a defined user variable and, if
selected accordingly, the values of the logarithmic scale are displayed.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

184 Diagrams

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Reports 185

4 Reports

4.1 Report Window

The Report Window is used to display data in alphanumeric format.
It is made up of certain object types only. Basically it can consist of data lists,
forms, tables and texts.
All objects use the same character set specified via Extras | Layout Settings |
Fonts. We recommend using a fixed pitch font to ensure that the format is
retained.
Individual objects cannot be moved or resized interactively.

Create Report Click the following toolbar button to create a new window:
Window

Alternatively „ Menu option File | New | Window

1. Select the window type Report in the dialog that opens. In the Name input
field you can give the window a meaningful name so that you can identify it
in Layout Explorer. If you leave the name field blank, the name "Report1 ..."
is assigned, by default.
2. Click Next.
The Object Wizard opens with which you can also insert a data list or a
table.
Alternatively you can generate an empty page. You can also use the Object
Wizard to insert tables or data list objects retrospectively. You can insert
other objects such as forms or text objects via the Object Library.
Page Mode If a report is too long, it is spread over more than one page. The current page
can be selected using the Page up and Page down keys on the keyboard or the
following toolbar buttons:

To go to the last page press the End key or click the following button:

To go to the first page press the Pos1 key or click the following button:

Scroll Mode In addition to using the Landscape and Portrait format, there is also the option of
displaying a report with no formatting. This is done by selecting Scroll Mode in a
report's Properties dialog.
No page breaks are made in this display mode. Instead, you can navigate
through the report using scroll bars. In this view the protocol cannot be printed.
Exporting is possible without restrictions.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

186 Reports

4.1.1 Report Window – Properties

A report window's Properties dialog can be opened as follows:
„ By right-clicking on the window area
„ By right-clicking on the report window icon in Layout Explorer and selecting
Properties on the context menu
The settings are the same as the diagram window properties (see Properties
Dialog of Diagram Window auf Seite 45).

4.1.2 View
After activating the report window in Layout Explorer, or clicking the mouse
outside the diagram object, it is possible to resize the window by holding down
the Alt key and using the left or right mouse button, respectively (use left mouse
button to enlarge and right mouse button to reduce the report window). The
action is indicated by the shape of the mouse cursor:

4.2 Report Objects

A report window may contain the following objects:
„ Data List
„ Table
„ Text Object
„ Form
You can also use the Object Wizard to insert tables or data list objects. You can
insert other objects such as forms or text objects via the Object Library.
Order All the objects contained are listed in Layout Explorer. The order is the same as
the order in which they are displayed in the report window (with the exception of
header and footer lines which can be anywhere). To change the order, select an
entry, hold the Ctrl key down and move the entry up or down with the cursor
keys.

4.2.1 Properties Dialog

Unlike diagram windows, the Properties dialogs of the objects contained in a
report window can only be called up via the context menu of the relevant node in
Layout Explorer.
If you make changes in a Properties dialog, they are accepted when you click
OK. If you want to see what the changes will look like without quitting the dialog,
click Apply.

4.2.2 Multiple Selection

The same rules apply as for diagram windows (see Multiple Selection auf
Seite 58).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Reports 187

4.3 Data List

A data list is more or less equivalent to a normal table and is used when the data
to be displayed has an implicit base data trace (normally with recorder data, indi-
cating data, etc.). In contrast to a normal table, however, here you can define the
data extract to be displayed by means of a start value (X0) and an end value
(X1) and not just by means of a point count starting from the beginning or the
end. Interpolation at a specific interval is also possible.

4.3.1 Properties Dialog

When you right-click the object in Layout Explorer, a context-sensitive menu
appears. Selecting the Properties context menu option opens the Properties
dialog. This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more
Property Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that
belong together.
Since many objects have identical or almost identical property pages, these
property pages are described for one object and then referred to from other
objects:

Category Property Page(s)

General General (see General - General auf Seite 187)
Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 188)
X-Transformation (see General - Transformation auf Seite 66)
Datasets Datasets (see Datasets - Datasets auf Seite 83)
X-Scale X-Scale (see X-Scale - X-Scale auf Seite 189)
Layout Layout (see Layout - Layout auf Seite 190)
Wrap Mode (see Table Layout - Wrap Mode auf Seite 191)
Columns Name for display items (see General - Name auf Seite 130)
Unit for display items (see Y-Scale - Unit auf Seite 81)
Format for display items (see Columns - Format auf Seite 136)

Tab. 33

[Link] General - General

Abb. 101

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

188 Reports

Name:
Here you can give the object a meaningful name so that you can identify it in
Layout Explorer.
Orientation
A data list can be organized in columns (Vertikal) or in rows (Horizontal).
No File Comparison:
When this check box is activated, the object is excluded from the file compar-
ison.
Visible:
When this check box is deactivated, the data list is hidden. The object is still
visible and selectable in Layout Explorer.

[Link] General - Transformation

Abb. 102

This property page allows you to set transformations. These are additional calcu-
lations in the form of macros that are executed before the data is displayed (see
Exploration Guide, under Calculations).
You may only specify one transformation macro for the report which is applied to
all the datasets in the table. It is not possible to specify channel-specific transfor-
mations.
Select Macro:
The drop-down list only shows those macros which are provided for the relevant
object.
It is possible to access all available macros by using the Select Macro button. In
a dialog you can select a transformation macro from the folders defined under
the entry "GlobalMacroDir" in the [Link] file (for each entry the relevant
node is shown) or from the current work environment's macro folder. If a macro
is selected whose transfer parameters are defined using the CalcGraf syntax, a
CalcGraf parameter dialog will appear in which you can set the relevant parame-
ters.
The search order for x- and y-transformation macros is as follows:
„ Current work environment
„ XTrafoMacroDir / YTrafoMacroDir
„ GlobalMacroDir

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Reports 189

Edit Parameters:
For transformation macro parameters matching the CalcGraf syntax, this button
offers a convenient way to edit the parameters subsequently by calling the
CalcGraf parameter dialog. After clicking OK, the changes are taken over into
the Transformation property page.
1. Transform/Reduce:
This function allows you to call a macro which can either transform data points or
reduce the number of measurement points. Furthermore, the input field on the
right can be used to deliver a parameter to the macro.
Clicking on the following button displays the chosen macro in the Formula/Script
Editor:

In the text field next to it you can also enter argument values as parameters for
the macro call. The individual values have to be separated by commas.
Merge to a single resulting dataset:
If multiple datasets are defined in an object, the defined macro function is called
up separately for each of the datasets. The transformation therefore returns as
many transformed datasets to the display as are defined in the object.
If the check box is activated, only one dataset is returned, even if more than one
dataset is defined in the object. The macro function is then only called up once.
You can use this function to access all the datasets defined in the object to calcu-
late an averaged dataset, for example, which is then displayed.

[Link] X-Scale - X-Scale

Abb. 103

Range (Points):
The data range of the x-axis to be listed is defined by X0 and X1.
Unit:
You can select different units for the x-axis from this list box. All the datasets
shown in the list are then displayed in the selected unit. If necessary or possible,
the x-dataset is converted to the new unit. If conversion is not possible (e.g.
recorder data to crank angle data), the dataset is not displayed.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

190 Reports

Example
A recorder measurement is recorded with ms as the unit. When the measure-
ment is displayed in a data list, the unit ms is automatically selected for the
display. If the measurement is to be represented in seconds, you just need to
select Time[s] in the list box.

Draw with max. resolution:

When this is activated, all data points are listed.
Resolution (points):
Insert a number that represents how many points are listed. 1 for each point, 2
for every second point, 5 for every fifth point, etc. The Interpolate function calcu-
lates new points if you have defined intervals that don't match with the existing
measurement points (e.g. every 2.5 points).
Auto Range for new data:
CONCERTO matches the scale range to the value range of the displayed
dataset, as soon as new data is loaded.
To match the scale range to the value range of the currently displayed data,
select the Auto-Range button.
Minimum (Start Value) and maximum (End Value) are set to the x-scale of the
channel used.
Auto Shift for new data:
The selected range is automatically shifted when new data is loaded.
The range is shifted in the direction of the x-dataset maximum.
Very often the range changes on the x and y scales when new data is loaded.
The curves are then not displayed properly or even at all in the diagram because
the data no longer lies completely within, or lies outside, the scale range. You
can get round this by activating the check box. The axes are then automatically
re-scaled each time new data is loaded.

[Link] Layout - Layout

Abb. 104

This property page is part of the Properties dialog of several objects (many of the
objects have identical or almost identical property pages) and described here
representatively for all of these objects. Note, however, that depending on the
object type some of the controls might not be available.
This property page is where you can specify via check boxes whether the name,
description and unit of each dataset are to be displayed or not. You can also
assign the bold and italic attributes to different parts of the header.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Reports 191

The column width can be set separately for each dataset in vertical tables and is
therefore a property of the display item that the dataset contains.
In horizontal tables, the name, description, unit and the data can each be
assigned their own field width (measured in characters). The widths then apply
to all the channels in a table.
Unit:
If you activate the [ ] box, the unit is placed in square brackets.
Header Separator
For vertical tables, activating this check box allows you to draw a separator line
between header and data. For horizontal tables a colon is inserted.
Frame:
When this check box is activated, a horizontal line is drawn on top of an object so
that individual objects can be better distinguished in a report.
Values:
Here you can set the column width.
Show Base Channel:
If this box is checked, the internal base trace of the first dataset is displayed as
the first column/row.

[Link] Table Layout - Wrap Mode

Abb. 105

If the page width is too small to show all the defined data columns next to each
other, the lines are wrapped. You can choose between 4 different wrap mecha-
nisms:
Single Line:
A single measurement point from all channels is displayed with wrapped lines
before the next point is displayed.
Single Page:
The single page break attempts to display all the channels on each page and to
correspondingly reduce the number of measurement points.
Multi Page:
The multipage break tries to display the largest number of measurement points
on a page and, if there are a lot of channels, only shows the first channels of a
table. The others are printed later depending on the selected algorithm (1 or 2).
When you place the printouts together that have undergone this type of page
break, the result is one big table.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

192 Reports

Multi Page 1:
If there are too many measurement points to fit on a page, the channels are
printed successively on the following pages and then the remaining measure-
ment points are printed out.
Multi Page 2:
if there are too many measurement points to fit on a page, the remaining points
are printed out on the next page. The next channel block is not printed out until
all the measurement points of the first channel are printed.
When your table gets so large that it goes on to another page, it is often difficult
to compare the individual measurement points. You can obtain a better overview
by repeating the first column/line which usually serves as a reference, on print-
outs of several pages.
Fixed Columns:
This numeric field allows you to change the number of set columns.
If you set the value to 2, the first two columns are repeated on each page printed
out (e.g. if you inserted the speed and torque first and want to display them as
the reference).

Information

When using tables with x base, remember that the first column is always the x
column. If you want to set a column other than the x column, set the value to "2"!
When using horizontal tables, the first column is usually the channel name. Set
Fixed Columns to "1" if you want to display the channel name on each page of
a multipage report!

Fixed Rows:
This setting is also important in horizontal tables if you want to repeat a channel
as the reference for other channels on each page. Here too, the first two
datasets are printed out above the other channels.

Example
Table with 5 columns (A,B,C,D,E) and 7 lines:
A1 B1 C1 D1 E1
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3
A4 B4 C4 D4 E4
A5 B5 C5 D5 E5
A6 B6 C6 D6 E6
A7 B7 C7 D7 E7

Let us assume that the page is only large enough to show 3 columns and 4 lines.
The various options produce the following layouts:
Single Page option activated

Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4

A1 B1 C1 A3 B3 C3 A5 B5 C5 A7 B7 C7
A2 B2 C2 A4 B4 C4 A6 B6 C6 D7 E7
D1 E1 D4 E4 D5 E5
D2 E2 D4 E4 D6 E6

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Reports 193

Single Line option activated

Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4

A1 B1 C1 A3 B3 C3 A5 B5 C5 A7 B7 C
D1 E1 D3 E3 D5 E5 D7 E7
A2 B2 C2 A4 B4 C4 A6 B6 C6
D2 E2 D4 E4 D6 E6

Multi Page 1 option activated

Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4

A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 A5 B5 C5 D5 E5
A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 A6 B6 C6 D6 E6
A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 A7 B7 C7 D7 E7
A4 B4 C4 D4 E4

Multi Page 2 option activated

Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4

A1 B1 C1 A5 B5 C5 D1 E1 D5 E5
A2 B2 C2 A6 B6 C6 D2 E2 D6 E6
A3 B3 C3 A7 B7 C7 D3 E3 D7 E7
A4 B4 C4 D4 E4

4.4 Table
A table object in a report is very similar to a table object in a diagram window
(see Table auf Seite 131). There are, however, the following differences:
Property Page General:
There is no Position input field.
Property Page Header:
For more on this subject, see Layout - Layout auf Seite 190.
Property Page Wrap Mode:
This option only exists for tables in reports. The effect is the same as in data lists.
For more on this subject, see Layout - Layout auf Seite 190.
Property Page Links:
Not available.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

194 Reports

4.5 Text Object

A text object in a report is very similar to a text object in a diagram window (see
Text / Rich Text auf Seite 146). There are, however, the following restrictions:
Property Page General:
There is no Position input field.
Property Page Text:
The report font is always used (see Fonts auf Seite 203). It is not possible to
select a font or font attributes.
Property Page Links:
Not available.

4.6 Form
Form objects allow you to arrange alphanumeric output consisting of both data
and user-defined text. They can be used in diagram windows, irrespective of
whether or not a graph is available. Form objects can also be used in page
layouts and report windows.
A form object in a report is very similar to a form object in a diagram window (see
Form auf Seite 150). There are, however, the following restrictions:
Property Page General:
There is no Position input field.
Property Page Text:
The report font is always used (see Fonts auf Seite 203). It is not possible to
select a font or font attributes.
Property Page Links:
Not available.

4.7 Page Break

To force a page break at a certain position in a multipage report hardcopy, insert
an empty text object with the name "_P".
Insert a text object via the Object Library and rename it to "_P" on the General
property page. Hold the Ctrl key down and use the Arrow Up key to move the
text object to the proper position in Layout Explorer.

4.8 Header
You can specify a header for report windows which will appear at the top of every
page when printed out. To do that, simply define a form object with the name
"_H".
Insert a form object via the Object Library and rename it to "_H" on the General
property page. Since it is a normal form object it can contain text, data, system
and user variables, and can consist of multiple lines. The position of this object in
Layout Explorer is irrelevant.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Reports 195

4.9 Footer
You can specify a footer for report windows which will appear at the bottom of
every page when printed out. To do that, simply define a form object with the
name "_F".
Insert a form object via the Object Library and rename it to "_F" on the General
property page. Since it is a normal form object it can contain text, data, system
and user variables, and can consist of multiple lines. The position of this object in
Layout Explorer is irrelevant.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

196 Reports

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Page Templates 197

5 Page Templates
CONCERTO supports page layouts to guarantee a minimum of effort and
maximum display quality.
Instead of having to insert headers, company logos and set texts each time in
the diagram window, you can have diagrams and reports appear in the page
template. You can therefore handle the header and diagram contents as two
separate entities.
Using page templates, for example, you can embellish the purely alphanumeric
representation of reports with graphical elements.
Page templates also allow you to link several diagrams or reports on one page.
Page templates can be stored by the Administrator in a central library or in a
template folder where they are available to every user ([Link] Template-
Path entry). This means that standardized page templates are then used
throughout the company and are maintained by the Administrator.
Now you can specify that the page templates used in the layout are to be loaded
from the central template folder when the layout is loaded (see Properties Dialog
of Diagram Window auf Seite 45, function Always load this template from the
Template Directory). The advantage of that is that updated templates are
always used without your having to adapt your layouts. If the central template
pool is unavailable for any reason, the copy of the template saved in the layout is
used.

5.1 Page Template Window

A template window is a graphics window, like a diagram window. Its window area
represents the available space on a page minus the margins. You can insert
tables, forms and all kinds of auxiliary objects inside this area, just as in diagram
windows. A template window must also contain one or more placeholders
(Image) for diagram windows and report windows which can be moved and
enlarged. They therefore define the final size of the diagram or report windows
on the hardcopy.

5.2 Default Templates

Two default templates are available in CONCERTO:
„ NORMPAGL for landscape format
„ NORMPAGP for portrait format
If you activate the Template check box when creating a diagram or report
window in the Object Wizard, one of these two templates is displayed in addition
to the diagram/report.
If you have created your own templates and saved them in the StdLib\Templates
folder, you can select them on the Page property page via Extras | Layout
Settings | Window (see Page auf Seite 211).
You can also set the template in the [Link] file by means of the entries
DefaultTemplateLandscape and DefaultTemplatePortrait.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

198 Page Templates

5.3 Creating Your Own Templates

1. Click the following button and select the option Window:

2. Select the window type Template in the dialog that opens. In the Name
input field you can give the window a meaningful name so that you can
identify it in Layout Explorer. If you leave the name field blank, the name
"Template1 ..." is assigned, by default.

Abb. 106

3. Click Finish.
4. Now define the template to suit your needs by inserting e.g. text, graphics,
auxiliary lines, etc. in the template.
You can access tables and forms (e.g. to display engine parameters and
user comments in the header) and auxiliary objects, such as text, auxiliary
lines, frames and graphics, from the page template itself.
5. Select an image object from the Object Library and draw a frame of the
required size with the mouse. This frame (image) is the placeholder for the
diagram window. You can enlarge or reduce the image or change its posi-
tion as you wish. You can also insert multiple images.

Information

Note the dotted line in the window. It indicates the edge of the page. Although
you can move objects partly or completely outside the line, if you do, you will no
longer be able to see them properly.

6. When your template is complete, save it under File | Save as | Window.

If you want to know how to display several diagram windows in an image, see
Multiple Page Templates auf Seite 199.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Page Templates 199

5.4 Multiple Page Templates

If your layout contains several diagram windows and you want to present them
with the same page template, it is not necessary to create a separate template
for each window. Diagram windows and page template can be displayed as
follows:
Variant 1 • Activate the Draw Template Mask check box in the diagram window's
Properties dialog (see Properties Dialog of Diagram Window auf Seite 45).
The page template will then be displayed in the diagram window. This is the
simpler variant and should be preferred.
Variant 2 You represent the diagram window(s) in the page template. It makes sense to
use this variant especially if you wish to display/print several diagram windows in
a page template which has several images (see Printing Page Templates auf
Seite 200):
1. Create (see Creating Your Own Templates auf Seite 198) or open a page
template.
2. Then, in Layout Explorer, drag all the windows you want to display in the
template, to the image in which the new diagram is to be displayed.

Abb. 107

In effect you stack the windows on top of one another in the image. The
active one is the one displayed. In Layout Explorer you will see a tree of all
the windows assigned to an image. The active window is displayed in bold
font.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

200 Page Templates

If you want to see a certain window on top, open the relevant window's con-
text menu in Layout Explorer and select Properties.

Abb. 108

This setting does not, however, affect the print order (see Printing Order auf
Seite 201).
If your page template contains a text object in which contents related to the
relevant diagram window are to be shown, please see Description under
Properties Dialog of Diagram Window auf Seite 45.

5.5 Printing Page Templates

There are various ways to print out a page template.
If you have inserted only one diagram per image in a page template, select the
menu File | Print.
Page templates in which several diagrams are assigned to an image are treated
differently. The Print all pages option is used to print a page (page template) for
each diagram in the image. If you want to print a certain window from an image
with the page template, use Print selection.
You can also use Print Preview to preview your hardcopy. Page backward and
forward with Next and Previous.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Page Templates 201

5.5.1 Printing Order

If you need a special print order for your hardcopy, you can set it in the Proper-
ties of the image.

Abb. 109

Select the diagram and move it to the required position using the arrow buttons.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

202 Page Templates

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Layout Settings 203

6 Layout Settings
Via Extras | Layout Settings a dialog is opened where you can make global
settings (which are valid for all CONCERTO settings. These settings are applied
if the Auto option is selected in a Properties dialog.
Settings for individual windows, diagrams or objects are made in the related
Properties dialogs.
This dialog is subdivided into Categories, each containing one or more Property
Pages. A Property Page itself consists of a number of settings that belong
together.

Category Property Page(s)

Fonts Fonts (see Fonts auf Seite 203)
Scales Scale Layout (see Scale Layout auf Seite 204)
Scale Fonts (see Scale Fonts auf Seite 205)
Diagram Scales (see Scales auf Seite 206)
Diagram Grid (see Diagram Grid auf Seite 207)
Grid Attributes (see Grid Attributes auf Seite 208)
Window Window Styles (see Window Styles auf Seite 209)
Snap Grid (see Snap Grid auf Seite 210)
Page Page (see Page auf Seite 211)
Colours Colour/Styles (see Colour/Styles auf Seite 212)
Automatic Variation (see Automatic Variation auf Seite 213)

Tab. 34

6.1 Fonts

Abb. 110

The fonts used in graphic and numeric windows can be changed on this property
page.
You can change the font used for the x and y axes in the Scales list box.
You can change the table font and font size in the Tables list box.
The font size must be set in the Properties dialog for the object. The default font
size is 11 point. The font for text and form objects is used when the object is

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

204 Layout Settings

created, but can be changed in the object itself. Each text and each form can
have its own font.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

6.2 Scales

6.2.1 Scale Layout

Abb. 111

This property page is where you change the appearance of the scale axes. Each
change made in this dialog is shown immediately in the displayed diagram once
you have confirmed it.
Tick Line Length:
Specifies the length of the scale lines. It applies to both the x and y scale.
Spacing:
Specifies the distance between the scale numbering and the scale (applies to
both the x and y scale).
Default Scale Width:
Defines the overall width of the scale including the name and description.
Label Text:
The option buttons On Tick Line and Above Tick Line define whether the
values are written next to the scale line or above it (y-scales).
Scale End Markers:
When this check box is activated, horizontal names and units are not displayed
above the axis but inside it and a scale line is added to the end of the marker,
even if it is higher than the diagram range (for x and y).
Horizontal letters for vertical texts:
When this check box is activated, the scale labels are displayed horizontally
(y-scales).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Layout Settings 205

Name Orientation: Horizontal/Vertical

Unit Orientation: Horizontal/Vertical
These option buttons define the orientation of the name and the unit.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

6.2.2 Scale Fonts

Abb. 112

This property page is where you change the font size of the scale axes. Each
change made in this dialog is displayed in the diagram as soon as you have
confirmed it.
Tick Labels:
Here you can set the font size and style for the numeric labeling of the axis.
Name:
Enter the font size and style for the scale name in this box.
Description:
The default setting for the scale description is not normally displayed, but you
can display it if you want to by ticking this check box.
Unit Separator:
Here you can specify whether the units are to be output in brackets or not.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

206 Layout Settings

6.3 Diagram

6.3.1 Scales

Abb. 113

The diagram structure relating to the axis position can be defined on this prop-
erty page. These options do not become effective until new diagrams are
created or you click Rearrange.
If you specify m = 4 (4 = default value for portrait format), you define the
maximum number of scales that can be placed one above the other.
If you specify n = 0 (0 = default value for landscape format), you define the
maximum number of scales that can be placed next to one another.
The vertical axis setting has priority over the horizontal one. Since the values for
portrait and landscape format can differ, different settings are possible for each
page orientation.
Scales on left side and Scales on right side:
You can define which side of the diagram the scales are to be positioned.
Distance between Axis and Diagram Frame:
The default setting is 1 mm, but you can specify the distance in point (pt) instead
of millimeters if you wish – one point being 1/72 inch.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Layout Settings 207

6.3.2 Diagram Grid

Abb. 114

This property page contains settings for the diagram grid.

Defaults:
This is where you define the number of grid lines and distance between two grid
lines that CONCERTO is to draw. You can define different defaults or landscape
and portrait diagrams. The number of grid lines/distance between two grid lines
can also be set separately for x and y.
Changes made in this section only become effective when a new diagram is
created.
The check boxes in the Settings area of the window enable you to set the
diagram grid:
X Variable (deactivated):
The grid is divided into the specified number of divisions or at the specified inter-
vals. CONCERTO adjusts the area to make sure that odd values are avoided.
X Variable (activated):
CONCERTO does not change the specified x-range but draws grid lines for even
values only, i.e. when the curve is moved the grid is moved as well. The speci-
fied number of grid divisions is only used as orientation.
Visible Window Frame:
Defines whether a border is to appear around the diagram when printed out as
the default for newly created diagrams. This setting can also be made separately
for each diagram in the diagram window properties.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

208 Layout Settings

6.3.3 Grid Attributes

Abb. 115

This property page is where you can set attributes, such as color, line style and
line width, for the diagram grid lines.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

Diagram Fill Color:

You can define the fill color within the diagram frame via this list box.
With Quick Diagrams, this function is always applied because there is always a
diagram frame. With standard diagrams, a frame is only drawn if the Diagram
Frame option in the General property page within the General category is acti-
vated (see General - General auf Seite 60).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Layout Settings 209

6.4 Window

6.4.1 Window Styles

Abb. 116

Background Colour:
Defines the window's background color.
3D Look:
If this check box is activated, the objects in the diagram window and the diagram
window itself are given a 3D frame.
Auto Pen Width:
Defines the default line width of lines of a diagram (such as e.g. frames of
diagrams or objects) in all windows.
Auto Pen Width for Curves:
Defines the default line width of curves in all windows.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

210 Layout Settings

6.4.2 Snap Grid

Abb. 117
This property page contains advanced settings for the snap grid.
A snap grid is extremely useful when you create page layouts or diagrams in
which you want to precision-align text, frames, pictures, etc. Whenever you
move or enlarge an object, it snaps onto the nearest grid point.
This feature enables you to output diagram grids in real physical units. If you
generate a snap grid and change the diagram range, and you will see that the
diagram grid snaps onto the snap grid.
The property page defines the snap grid size either in mm or pt (1 pt = 1/72
inch).
You can activate the snap grid horizontally or vertically. If the check boxes are
deactivated, the grid is still displayed but has no effect.
You have to deactivate the Display Grid check box to switch off the snap grid
display.
Defining a snap grid does not mean that all objects will be moved to grid points
when the window is rebuilt. The objects only snap to the grid points when moved
or enlarged.
When an object is moved, its top left corner is snapped to a grid point. When an
object is enlarged, only the changed sides are snapped to the grid points.
That is why it is possible to change the snap grid while you are working and to
prepare to create the next objects without affecting the current ones.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Layout Settings 211

6.5 Page

Abb. 118

This property page is where you specify default settings for the page layout.
Output area:
This is for defining the page frame and the size of the layout. You can also switch
between landscape and portrait for easier visualization.
Default Templates:
Here you can select a template (portrait or landscape format) that is to be used
in the current CONCERTO session. This setting is saved in the layout.
The Portrait and Landscape list boxes contain all the templates stored in the
StdLib\Templates folder.
For more on this subject, see Default Templates auf Seite 197.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

212 Layout Settings

6.6 Colours

6.6.1 Colour/Styles

Abb. 119

This property page allows you to set line colors and line styles. You should use it
in particular when you want to print out a colored layout on a monochrome (black
and white) printer. You can define which line styles on the printout will replace
the colors on the screen.
The dialog has two columns. On the left is the color and on the right the line style
that will replace the color on the hardcopy.
Each color in the palette list box is freely selectable. When you double-click the
required entry in the box, the Windows color selection dialog appears where a
color can be selected or defined for the palette entry. Color 16/0 is used if there
is any color variation for the characteristic engine mean values of indicating data
identified by cylinder number 0.
If the colors are to be replaced on the printout by line styles, the check box
Replace Colours by Styles for printing has to be activated.
However, this only applies to the hardcopy where the line colors of the layout are
replaced by the selected line styles. The layout itself is not changed to
black-and-white. Only the colors of diagram lines are changed; the other object
types remain unaffected.
You can define for yourself the styles that will replace the colors. Just select a
line style in the list box on the right and move it using the following buttons to the
position that corresponds to the color you want it to replace.

The positions are numbered to make the assignment easier.

The first time you create a diagram, the curve lines are assigned the colors in the
order defined in the left-hand list box of the dialog. The settings can be changed
as described above and saved for each future CONCERTO session (see Save
button further below).
The current color palette and the automatic (curve color/style/marker) variation
can be saved with the layout (see Automatic Variation auf Seite 213). In this
respect, the status of the Local check box is relevant.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Layout Settings 213

Local:
Activated When a layout is loaded, the system does not use the layout's color palette and
variation settings but the CONCERTO default settings remain effective.
Deactivated When a layout is loaded, the color palette and the variation settings stored in it
are also loaded and used. This setting only remains active, however, until a new
layout is loaded, or a new layout is created via File | New | Layout. If the palette
and the variation settings contained in the loaded layout are to be used as the
CONCERTO default settings, use the Save button on the property page.
Load Colour Schema
Color scheme is taken to mean the sum of all the settings that define the color
design of a diagram:
„ Color palette
„ Background color
„ 3D effect
The color scheme is normally loaded with the standard settings from the
[Link] file. However, you can also load your own personal color scheme
using this menu option. When you have selected a color scheme file in a File
Selection dialog , the file is loaded and the colors of all open diagrams are
replaced by those of the color scheme just loaded.
If you want the colors of the loaded scheme to be used as defaults, they have to
be saved via the following button:
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

6.6.2 Automatic Variation

Abb. 120

This property page is where you define how the curves are displayed when the
diagram is created (color/style/markers).
The current variation settings can be saved with the layout. In this respect, the
status of the Local check box on the Colour/Styles property page is relevant
(see Colour/Styles auf Seite 212):
The drop-down list boxes provide the following options:
None All curves are drawn in the first color defined in the palette (default is black).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

214 Layout Settings

Axis All curves are drawn in the sequence defined in the palette.
File Alias Curves with the same file alias are drawn in the same color.
Cylinder Number A separate color is assigned to each cylinder number. Characteristic engine
mean values are drawn with color 16/0 if there is a variation in the cylinder
number.
Curve(all) All curves are drawn in the sequence defined in the palette across all the axes.
Curve(axis) All curves are drawn in the color that corresponds to their position inside an axis.
The distribution corresponding to the sequence of the palette is the same for all
axes.
Dataset Name In layouts with several diagram windows, the curves which are available in more
than one diagram window and have the same dataset name are displayed in the
same color. This function provides a clearly arranged display, which is helpful in
particular for file comparisons.
DS Name(Window) This variant is very similar to the Dataset Name variant described above. The
only difference is that the same color is only applied to the same datasets within
a given window. In this case, a dataset with the same name in another window
may have another color.
The same settings are available under Default Style Variation and Default
Marker Variation, but for the style and marker, respectively, instead of the color.
These changes are visible immediately in the diagram when you click Assign
Colours now, Assign Styles now or Assign Markers now.
Saves all settings of this property page as defaults in [Link] for use in
future CONCERTO sessions.
Resets all settings of this property page to the CONCERTO factory settings.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 215

7 Editing Data

7.1 Composer
In addition to the Diagram, Report and Page Template window types,
Composer windows are a further window type used in CONCERTO. The
contents of the Composer window are like a spreadsheet in MS Excel.
Composer can be used to change datasets. You might use it, for example, to
remove invalid or incorrectly measured data points from a curve. Those points
then do not appear in diagrams or reports.
If the changed data comes from an ASAM 3 Server (e.g. AVL Santorin) the
changes can also be saved permanently, with the original data being saved
beforehand.

7.1.1 Creating a New Composer Window

A Composer window can be created in the same way, for example, as a diagram
window.
1. Select the New | Window menu option.
2. Select the window type Composer in the dialog that opens. In the Name
input field you can give the window a meaningful name so that you can
identify it in Layout Explorer.
You will then see an empty Composer window.

7.1.2 Dragging Datasets to the Composer Window

1. Open a data key in Data Explorer.
2. Select a measurement. (For ASAM data, at least one measurement is
always displayed under the data key.)

Abb. 121

3. Drag datasets of a measurement from the channel list to the Composer

window.
The data is displayed along with its unit, base trace and line number (hide-
able via the context menu).
You can also load several datasets at the same time and add other ones
later.

Information

Only measurements can be loaded in a Composer window (no data keys!).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

216 Editing Data

7.1.3 Dragging Measurements to the Composer Window

1. Select a measurement.
2. Drag the complete measurement and drop it in a Composer window so that
all the channels of a measurement are transferred to the Composer window.

Information

Only measurements can be loaded in a Composer window (no data keys!).

7.1.4 Editing Data in the Composer Window

Only data from the same measurement can be loaded in a Composer window.
The main reason for this is that all data that is edited in Composer must have
exactly the same structure. This includes the number of measurement points,
the measurement resolution and other internal data structures (partial matrices).
If you attempt to drag data from another measurement to an already filled
Composer window, the cursor will tell you that the new datasets do not match the
ones already in the Window.
You have to create a separate Composer window if you still want to edit the data.
The data key and measurement are displayed as follows in Composer:
„ A measurement type usually only contains one measurement. The figure
below shows data keys of an ATF file:

Abb. 122

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 217

„ For ASAM data, at least one measurement is always displayed under the
data key. The figure below shows data keys and measurements of ASAM
data.

Abb. 123

In some situations, a data key may, however, contain more than one measure-
ment, in Recorder measurements for example. These measurements are
displayed under the data key in Data Explorer.
To select an entire column, click the column name (= name of the dataset
displayed in the column).

[Link] Operations with Cells

1. If you want to change the value of a cell, select it.
2. Now you can enter a new value which is then displayed in bold.
When a cell is selected, you can right-click to call up the context menu shown
below:

Abb. 124

Copy Value This command copies the value of the selected cell to the clipboard.
Paste Value This command transfers a value from the clipboard to the selected cell.
Auto Fill This command becomes active as soon as more than one cell has been
selected. All the selected cells are overwritten with the value of the first selected
cell.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

218 Editing Data

Replace Invalid This command becomes active as soon as more than one cell has been
with Interpolated selected. Within the selected area any invalid values are interpolated, and any
Values valid values within the area serve as grid points. It is therefore essential that at
least the first and the last selected values are valid.
Invalidate Value With Composer you can set data to invalid. Since invalid points are not displayed
in Diagrams and Records, this is an easy way to suppress unwanted data points.
The cell is then displayed in red to indicate an invalid value.
Validate Value If the selected cell already contains an invalid point, the context menu shows the
command Validate Value which resets an invalid value to valid.
Because an invalid value is written back as 1e10, it can only be reset to its orig-
inal valid value before it is written back.
Insert Values This command inserts a definable number of new, invalid values above the
selected cell.
This function is not available if the base is a virtual or multi-virtual dataset.
Remove Values „ Remove and Modify Following Base Values
The base of the succeeding values will be changed in a way that they will
assume the position of the deleted values (they will move up).
„ Remove and Keep Following Base Values
The base of the succeeding values will not be adjusted. The old base will be
retained, which causes a gap in the size of the deleted range.
This function is not available if the base is a virtual or multi-virtual dataset.
Shift Base Value This menu option provides the base with an offset.
By selecting a range this operation may also be applied to multiple channels.
The length of the selected range is irrelevant. The function is applied to all cells
beneath (and starting with) the first selected cell.
This function is not available if the base is a virtual or multi-virtual dataset.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 219

[Link] Operations with Records

1. Select a complete line in the grid (multiple selection is possible).
2. Right-click to open the context menu.

Abb. 125

Operations that affect the complete record affect all the datasets of the
measurement, i.e. the datasets that are not displayed in the Composer
window are affected too!
Cut Records This command cuts records out and places them on the clipboard.
Copy Records This command copies records to the clipboard.
Replace Records This command substitutes the selected records for the records from the clip-
with Pasted Data board.
from Clipboard
Example
The clipboard contains 3 records which are to be inserted starting from the
selected record. The values of the existing records are overwritten but when
there are no more records to overwrite, new records are added at the end.

Insert Records from This command inserts records from the clipboard in front of the selected record.
Clipboard Existing records are therefore pushed downward and not overwritten.
Select Records This command opens the Filter Conditions Editor (see Filter Conditons Editor auf
with Condition Seite 244). After clicking OK to terminate the Filter Conditions Editor, only the
records matching the data condition will be selected in the spreadsheet. Any
previous selections will be deleted in the process.
If you terminate the Filter Conditions Editor by clicking OK and keeping the Ctrl
key pressed, any previous selections will be retained.
Copy Selected This command copies the values from selected records into a new or existing
Records to Com- ComposerFile.
poserFile
Invert Selection This command inverts the record selection. So any records that were previously
selected become deselected, and vice versa.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

220 Editing Data

Delete Records This command deletes the selected records.

„ Delete and Modify Following Base Values
The base of the succeeding values will be changed in a way that they will
assume the position of the deleted values (they will move up).
„ Delete and Keep Following Base Values
The base of the succeeding values will not be adjusted. The old base will be
retained, which causes a gap in the size of the deleted range.
This function is not available if the base is a virtual or multi-virtual dataset.
Add Records at This command opens up a dialog which enables you to add new, immediately
Specified Position consecutive records, which are the same distance apart, in any position you
require.

Abb. 126

For this purpose, the following parameters have to be specified:

Start base value
This value specifies the base value (value of x-trace) of the first new record to be
created. After the dialog opens, a value is already automatically entered, which
is based on the currently selected record in the Composer window. A value is
suggested that is in between the first record selected and the one preceding it.
Number of records to add
Specify how many consecutive records you want to have created. By default,
only one record is created.
Distance between records
Define the distance between the records (increment of base value, starting with
the base start value) if more than one record is to be created.

The following functions displayed in the dialog will help you to estimate the situa-
tion; they are calculated based on the entered parameters.
The Recalculate button allows you to refresh the values.
This is required whenever you have changed the parameters in the dialog.
Existing previous base value
Displays the base value of the record which precedes the first new record to be
added.
New end base value
Displays the base value which the last new record to be added will assume.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 221

Existing following base value

Displays the base value of the record that succeeds the position at which the first
new record is to be added.
This value also serves as an indicator, stating whether the new records to be
added will have sufficient room in the already existing data. If the new records to
be added are expected to overlap already existing ones, a information (overlap-
ping) is output. In this case, the new records cannot be added. Remedy: Shift
the existing records; after that, the system additionally displays the base value
which results after the shifting procedure.

Establish how to proceed with the existing records:

Shift existing records to make room for new records
If you activate this checkbox, existing records are shifted, providing room for the
new records at the defined position.
Distance to following record
Here you can define what base distance is to be applied between the new record
added last and the first shifted record. So, indirectly, this parameter determines
the amount of shift.
Insert New Records This command inserts new records in front of the selected records. The number
of inserted records matches the number of previously selected records. New
records have the value 0 (for numeric cells) or an empty string (for ASCII cells).
Existing records are pushed downward.
Move Selected This command opens up a dialog which is basically identical to the one which
Records you can call via Add Records at Specified Position. Yet in this case, it is not
new records that are added. Instead, the ones which you have previously
selected in the Composer window are shifted to a different position within the
same data key. The base values (values of the x-trace) of this record can thus be
modified.
In this dialog the fields Number of reocrds to add and Distance between
records are missing compared to the dialog for adding new records.
Shift Starting from the current record position, this command provides the base value
Records of all channels with an offset to be entered which may be either positive or nega-
tive.
This function is not available if the base is a virtual or multi-virtual dataset.
Fill empty places in This command fills in missing points with invalid values.
all records with
invalid values
Invalidate Records When you select Invalidate Records, the entire line is invalidated and marked
in red.
Validate Records If the selected line already contains invalid points, the entire line can be reset to
valid with Validate Records.

[Link] Working with the * Line

An extra line is displayed at the end of every spreadsheet which has an asterisk
(*) in the first column.
Entering a Value in When you enter a value in one of the fields of this line, the line becomes another
the * Line data record. The asterisk in the first column is replaced by the record number of
the new record. At the same time another * line is created after the new record.
Insert Records If you select the Insert Records option from the context menu, new records are
inserted after the last point. Again a * line is created after this record.
Paste Records When you select the Paste Records option from the context menu, records from
the clipboard are inserted after the last point. Again a * line is created after these
records.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

222 Editing Data

[Link] Operations with Columns

1. To select a column in the spreadsheet, right-click the column name (= name
of the dataset displayed in the column). Multiple selction is possible.
2. Right-click to open the context menu.

Abb. 127

Remove Columns This function deletes the selected channel from the spreadsheet. The action
from spreadsheet does not affect the data in any way and is used purely to gain a better overview
of the data to be edited.
Cut Channels This function cuts channels out and places them on the clipboard.
Copy Channels This function copies channels to the clipboard. Channel information, such as
channel name, unit and description, are also copied.
Paste Channels This function inserts channels from the clipboard in front of the selected channel.
In this case, existing channels are moved to the right and not overwritten.
Freeze Channels This function only becomes active when the selected column is a formula
channel. All selected formula channels are calculated and their results are
written back to the database together with the measurement channels.
Delete Channels This function deletes the selected channel from the current measurement.
New Channel This function inserts a new channel in the current measurement (see Adding
Channels to a Data Key in the ComposerFile auf Seite 230).
Add Calculated This function opens the Calculator and uses the selected column(s) as vari-
Channel able(s). A new data channel is created for the result of the formula.
Transform Channel This function opens the Calculator and uses the selected column as Variable A.
The values in the selected column are replaced with the result of the calculation.
Shift This function provides the base value of the selected channels with an offset to
Channels be entered which may be either positive or negative.
This function is not available if the base is a virtual or multi-virtual dataset.
Invalidate If the selected column contains valid points, the entire channel can be invali-
Channels dated with this command.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 223

Validate Channels If the selected column contains invalid points, the entire channel be validated
with this command.
Invert Selection This function inverts the column selection. So any columns that were previously
selected become deselected, and vice versa.
display format This function opens a dialog for advanced column definition:

Abb. 128

Auto Format
This selection has the effect that the decimal places settings are adopted from
the dataset.
Floating Point Format
By selecting this option every value is individually given the optimum number of
decimal places.
Fixed Width
By selecting this option you can define any number of decimal places you
require.
Scientific Format
This allows you to represent the values in scientific number format.
Date and Time
By selecting this option, datasets are displayed as date and time information,
provided that the dataset contains time stamp data.
The time stamps can be edited either by the arrow keys or by directly clicking on
the figure.

Abb. 129

Unit for Display:

Here, a dropdown list enables you to choose the unit to be displayed. By default
it is taken over from the dataset.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

224 Editing Data

Information

Please note that a unit conversion affects the display but not the dataset. The
original unit remains in the dataset.

The list contains a group of possible units for a physical dimension which can be
displayed alternatively. These are saved in the unit table and can be adjusted
where necessary with the help of the unit editor (see Unit Conversion auf
Seite 263 and Unit Editor auf Seite 264).
The dataset's original unit is also listed.
Properties This function opens the channel properties dialog which displays channel infor-
mation. This dialog additionally enables you to change name, unit and descrip-
tion of the channel.

By right-click on # the context menu gives you access to the following features:

Abb. 130

Tuple Display Mode

By selecting this option the base trace is shown for every dataset.
Show Row Numbers
By selecting this option the row number is shown.

7.1.5 Saving Changed Data

If the changed data comes from an ASAM 3 Server (e.g. AVL Santorin) the
changes can also be saved permanently,
• Select the menu option File | Save Data. The changes are then written
back to the ASAM database.

[Link] Backup Copy of Original Data

The original data is automatically backed up beforehand. The original data key is
renamed by having _ORG appended to the original name. The changed data is
saved under the name of the data key.

Example
Data key $E is changed.

When saved, a new data key $E_org is created which contains the original data
of $E before the change. The modified data is saved under $E.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 225

[Link] Backing Up the Data Key before Saving

If data has already been saved once after a change, it is renamed when saved
with _BCK added to the original name. The newly modified data is then saved
under the data key name.

Example
ED has been changed several times and saved. There is therefore now a
ED_org (original data) and a ED_bck (backup of the latest version). The figure
below shows ED with the backup and original data key:

Abb. 131

7.1.6 Restoring Original Data and Backup Data

Restoring Original It is possible to restore the original data even after modifications have been
Data after a Change saved. The context menu of the measurements of all original data keys
(XXX_ORG) contains the option Restore Measurement for this purpose.
When original data is restored, only the original data key with its actual name is
then displayed (e.g. ED). The original data (e.g. ED_ORG) and backup data (e.g.
ED_BCK) in the data key that were created when data was modified are deleted.
Restoring Backup It is also possible to restore the data before the last save (i.e. the backup data).
Data The context menu of the measurements of all backup data keys (XXX_BCK) also
contains a Restore Measurement option. When backup data is restored, only
the original data key with its actual name (e.g. ED), and the original data (e.g.
ED_ORG) are displayed. The data keys XXX_BCK and xxx_bck are deleted.

7.1.7 Closing a Composer Window

When a Composer window is closed, the system checks whether it has been
modified and contains unsaved data. If it does, a dialog appears asking you
whether you want to save the data.
The data file remains open even when the Composer window is closed.
The command New Layout also closes all Composer windows.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

226 Editing Data

7.2 ComposerFile
A ComposerFile is a memory area managed by the software, which you can
access in the same way as you might access data files (ComposerFiles are
therefore also referred to as virtual data files). The ComposerFile also contains
channels (grouped by data keys), which you are free to edit. ComposerFiles are
mainly used to join together data from several tests, edit this data and create
entirely new data.
It is also possible to have several ComposerFiles, each of which has a name and
a file alias. This means that the data contained in the ComposerFile is addressed
in the same way as test data is.
The ComposerFile can be saved along with the layout and exported in data files
that have the formats ATF or CTF.
When creating a ComposerFile you can additionally specify whether or not a
contained data key should have a homogeneous structure. In the homogeneous
case, the system makes sure that when filling the ComposerFile with data all
channels always have the same amount of points. If necessary, any channels
that are too short are filled up with invalid points.
In addition, in the case of recorder data, you can define a demand resolution for
each data key. All the inserted datasets are then automatically interpolated or,
respectively, reduced to this resolution.
The ComposerFile channels are filled or edited via the Composer window (see
Composer auf Seite 215). You can create your own channels via the context
menu and then fill them manually with data values. But it is also possible to drag
datasets from other tests into the Composer window, thereby copying them into
the ComposerFile.
It is also possible to add all channels of a single test data key into a Compos-
erFile. This can be done via the data key’s context menu in Channel Browser.
When doing so, any attribute channels (channels that begin with $ and channels
that consist exclusively of invalid points) are automatically excluded.
If channels are inserted into a ComposerFile (more precisely to a data key in a
ComposerFile) and if the ComposerFile already contains any channels that have
the same name, the data is automatically concatenated.
This makes it very easy to join together the data of several tests in a single
ComposerFile without having to work with test series.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 227

7.2.1 Creating a New ComposerFile

If you want to create a new ComposerFile, you can either create an empty one,
which you then fill with data, or, by using already existing data, you can create a
ComposerFile, which will then already contain a copy of this data.
A ComposerFile can be created as follows:
„ Via the context menu in Channel Browser
(if, at the file/test level, you right-click into the empty field):

Abb. 132

Here you can choose between the option New ComposerFile, which cre-
ates an empty Composer window which you can fill with channels or data
keys of open tests, or the option New ComposerFile from Excel selec-
tion, if you would like to take over data from MS Excel. In this case, the data
to be transferred are first selected in Excel, best done by including name
and unit.
If only data is selected, CONCERTO generates its own channel names
(Ch1 to Chx) which can later be renamed.
If more than one instance of MS Excel is open, the data of the MS Excel
instance that was activated last are used.
„ Via a band cursor's context menu:
If you choose this method, first select the data range you would like to copy
into the ComposerFile by using the band cursor and then select the option
Copy to ComposerFile.

Abb. 133

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

228 Editing Data

You additionally may choose whether you want the data to be copied into a new
ComposerFile or into an already existing one. This enables you to put together
different data ranges of your own choice into a single ComposerFile by using the
band cursor to select the required sections one after the other and copying them
all into the same ComposerFile.
In all three cases, a new ComposerFile is created which already contains an
empty data key. The ComposerFile definition dialog is automatically selected,
which can be used to define the new ComposerFile’s and the data key’s proper-
ties:

Abb. 134

This is the dialog where you define the new ComposerFile's properties.
ComposerFile name
Defines the name of the new ComposerFile.
ComposerFile alias
Like any other opened file, ComposerFiles are provided with an alias by which
they can be unambiguously addressed.
Defines the alias for the ComposerFile. The alias must be unique, otherwise you
are prompted to specify a new alias. The alias cannot be changed later on.
Key
Defines the name of the new data key.
Description (optional)
Specifies the descriptive text for the new data key.
Homogeneous structure
This check box can be used to define whether the new data key is to have a
homogeneous structure. Homogeneous, in this case, means that all channels
have the same base trace and, thus, the same number of data points.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 229

Type
Defines the base type of the new data key.
The following options are available:
„ logpoint based: The point number is the base trace.
„ time based: The time is the base trace of the data key.
Resolution
Defines the resolution for time-based data. The option automatic means that the
source data resolution is also used in the ComposerFile.
Create Composer Window
This check box defines whether a Composer window is automatically created for
the data key. You may choose whether to create an empty window or a
Composer window containing all channels of the data key or load a saved
Composer window. This is useful if you predefine a Composer window with the
necessary channel names first and then save it in the template folder of the
CONCERTO standard library (StdLib\Templates).
ComposerFile data is embedded in Layout
This check box can be used to define whether the ComposerFile is to be auto-
matically saved in the layout. This is useful if you are using the ComposerFile to
create parameter data for calculations that is used in the layout. When the layout
is loaded, this parameter data is reloaded with the ComposerFile for further use.
Load Settings
(see also function Save Settings below)
This button enables you to load dialog settings from a previously saved file. A file
name selection dialog will appear where you can specify a file name.
Save Settings
This button enables you to save the settings made in this dialog for creating a
ComposerFile as a file (*.cfcreationsettings). A file name selection dialog will
appear where you can specify a file name.
ComposerFile name, ComposerFile alias, data key and description are not
saved.
You can, however, enter this information manually in the file *.cfcreationsettings
with the effect that such information can be loaded via the Load Settings button.
To do so, the following entries are additionally required (highlighted in yellow):

Abb. 135

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

230 Editing Data

Via the ComposerFile definition dialog, which is called by selecting Properties,

the following ComposerFile properties can be modified retrospectively:
„ ComposerFile name
„ ComposerFile data is embedded in Layout

7.2.2 Adding Channels to a Data Key in the ComposerFile

Channels can be added to a ComposerFile data key in different ways:
„ via the Composer window:
Right-click in the empty area in the Composer window and select New
Channel.
The following dialog opens where the parameters of the new channel can
be defined:

Abb. 136

Name
Here you enter the name of the newly created channel.
If any measurements are saved on an ASAM server, here you are offered
the choice of the channel names from the Quantity table.
Physical Dimension and Unit
These drop-down list boxes enable you to assign the new channel a unit.
Physical Dimension, in this respect, serves as a simple pre-selection
option for units that are compatible with each other, such as Length for all
length units, etc. Choosing a physical dimension has the effect that only
those units are offered under Uni that belong to this particular physical
dimension. Exactly which units and physical dimensions are offered
depends on what was saved in CONCERTO’s unit table (see Unit Conver-
sion auf Seite 263). Please note that you can always freely enter any unit in
the Unit field, even if it is not offered in the drop-down list.
Description
Here you enter a description of the newly created channel.
Type
Defines whether this is a numeric or alphanumeric channel.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 231

Template Base DS
This drop-down box is only visible if the data key contains non-homoge-
neous data.
This drop-down box enables you to choose which channel the new
channel's base trace is to be taken from.
This has the effect of giving the new channel the same amount of points and
the same base values (values of the x-trace) as in the here selected tem-
plate channel.
Two entries in the list are special:
<none>
In this case, no existing base trace is used, so the parameters of the
new base trace must be defined via Value Count, Base Start Value
and Base Step Width. Only channels with equidistant base can be
created by this method.
The second entry in the list is a special base trace, which is used to
transfer the channels currently displayed in the Composer window onto
a common grid. This base trace can be used as a template for creating
a new channel which contains a value for every cell shown in the Com-
poser window.

Information

This entry is only available if channels of this data key are already being shown
in a Composer window.

Value Count, Base Start Value and Base Step Width

These fields are only active if no Template Base DS is being offered (e.g. if
data keys are homogeneous) or if <none> was chosen as a Template
Base DS.
In this case, the information defines which base trace is to be created for
the new channel. Value Count specifies how many points the new channel
is to be given. Base Start Value defines the x-value of the first point with
each further point receiving x-values which are higher than that of the pre-
vious point by the Base Step Width. It is thus possible to define an equidis-
tant base trace with a certain start value.

Information

Please note that, in the case of homogeneous data keys, the length of all chan-
nels always has to be set to the length of the data key’s longest channel. The
resulting fields are filled with invalid values.

Value
Here you can enter a value with which the new channel is to be filled.

„ by dragging a channel from Channel Browser

Drag a channel from another open file in Channel Browser into the Com-
poser window. This enables you to copy the channel into the Compos-
erFile’s data key.
If the ComposerFile’s data key already contains a channel that has the
same name, the new data values are concatenated to the existing data
values. This feature gives you an easy way to concatenate data from dif-
ferent measurements.

„ by dragging a data key from Channel Browser into the Composer

window
Drag a data key from another open file in Channel Browser into the Com-
poser window. This enables you to copy all channels of a data key into the
ComposerFile’s data key.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

232 Editing Data

If the ComposerFile’s data key already contains channels that have the
same name, the new data values are concatenated to the existing data
values. This feature gives you an easy way to concatenate data from dif-
ferent measurements.

7.2.3 Deleting Channels from a ComposerFile Data Key

• Right-click a channel column in the Composer window of a ComposerFile
data key and select Delete Channels. The channel will be removed from
the data key.

7.2.4 Modifying Properties of a Channel in the ComposerFile

• Right-click a channel column in the Composer window and select Proper-
ties.
The channel's Properties dialog will open:

Abb. 137

Here you can change the channel's name, unit and description.

7.2.5 Adding a New Data Key to a ComposerFile

• Right-click the blank area in the data keys field in Channel Browser and
select the menu option New Data Key:

Abb. 138

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 233

The ComposerFile definition dialog will open:

Abb. 139

The fields for the ComposerFile itself are grayed out. Use the fields under
Data Key Properties to define the properties of the new data key (see Cre-
ating a New ComposerFile auf Seite 227).

7.2.6 Deleting Data Keys

• Right-click the data key in Channel Browser and select Delete Data Key.
The data key will be deleted.

7.2.7 Renaming Data Keys

• Right-click the data key in Channel Browser and select Properties. The
ComposerFile definition dialog will be opened. The fields for the Compos-
erFile itself are grayed out. Use the fields under Data Key Properties to
define the properties of the data key (see Creating a New ComposerFile auf
Seite 227).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

234 Editing Data

7.2.8 Copying Data from Existing Tests or Measurements to New or Existing Com-
poserFiles
To optimally support the typical processes when creating combined data,
ComposerFiles can be created directly from existing data in various ways.
If you would like to copy the data of one or more data keys of one or more
existing tests to a ComposerFile, this can be done via the context menu option
Copy to ComposerFile.
This option is available in the following context menus:
„ Data Explorer:
– in the context menu of a measurement of a test (open or closed)
– in the context menu of a data key of a test (open or closed), if it does
not contain any measurements
– in the context menu of one or more tests in Data Explorer (open or
closed)
„ Channel Browser:
in the context menu of an open test's data key
„ Composer window:
in the context menu of multiple selected records in the Composer window
By using all the context menu items mentioned above either individual data keys,
certain records belonging to one data key, several data keys or even combina-
tions of data keys of several tests can be copied to new or existing Compos-
erFiles. The different variants are described in detail as follows:

Copying a Data Key or a Measurement of an Existing Test to a New or

Existing ComposerFile
If you would like to copy the data of an existing test's data key to a Compos-
erFile, this can be done via the context menu option Copy to ComposerFile.
This option is available in the following context menus:
„ Data Explorer:
– in the context menu of a measurement of a test (open or closed)
– in the context menu of a data key of a test (open or closed), if it does
not contain any measurements
„ Channel Browser:
in the context menu of an open test's data key

The context menu provides the following options:

„ New ComposerFile
Creates a new ComposerFile and copies the data key and all its channels to
the new file.
Here, too, the ComposerFile definition dialog will open again. In this case
you can define the ComposerFile name and the used alias. You can also
change the name of the data key and its descriptive text. However, the base
type and further settings relating to data type are already defined by the
source and are therefore not editable.
Once the dialog is confirmed by clicking OK, the new ComposerFile is cre-
ated. The data key along with all the contained channels is copied to the
new ComposerFile.
„ Existing ComposerFile:
The context menu shows a list of the existing ComposerFiles in addition to
the New ComposerFile entry. When a ComposerFile is selected, the data
key will be copied to that file.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 235

Here, too, the ComposerFile definition dialog will open again. In this case
you are free to specify the name of the data key.
Once the dialog is confirmed by clicking OK, the data key along with all the
contained channels is copied to the selected ComposerFile.

Copying Multiple Data Keys of One or More Existing Tests to a New or

Existing ComposerFile
If you would like to copy the data of several or all data keys of one or more
existing tests to a ComposerFile, this can be done via the context menu option
Copy to ComposerFile.
This option is available in the following context menus:
„ Data Explorer:
in the context menu of one or more tests (open or closed)

The context menu provides the following options:

„ New ComposerFile
Copies the data key to a new ComposerFile.

Abb. 140

„ Existing ComposerFile
The context menu shows a list of the existing ComposerFiles. When a Com-
poserFile is selected, the data key will be copied to that ComposerFile.
In addition to the ways of copying individual data keys as described above, you
can also choose which of the data keys of the used tests you want to have trans-
ferred to the ComposerFile. To this end, you are offered a list of all data keys
contained in the selected tests. By activating the check box or the respective
name you can define whether or not a data key is to be transferred to the
ComposerFile.
By activating the check boxes Use custom channel filter and Copy only
records that match the filter criteria you can set conditions and rules to define
which data will be copied into a ComposerFile's data key. The check boxes for
selective data transfer are described in Selective Data Transfer auf Seite 238.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

236 Editing Data

The check box Create Composer Window can now be defined separately for
each of the data keys given in the list. It always refers to the selected data key in
the list.
If you previously selected several tests, you have even more possibilities:

Abb. 141

In the list of data keys, the keys that are present in all of the selected tests are
displayed in black. Keys that are not contained in all tests are colored gray.
A further check box Concatenate enables you to define whether the data of
several selected tests is to be concatenated. If this check box is not activated,
only the data of the first test are transferred from the list. Typically, this is useful if
you want to make a concatenated test out of several tests.
For example, data is to be concatenated for data keys that contain measuring
data. There would be no point in concatenating data for data keys that contain,
for example, descriptive engine data. These typically would contain identical
data, since all tests to be concatenated would contain data for the same engine.
For this reason, engine data should only have one record and not be concate-
nated.
You can use the Homogeneous check box to define whether or not the data
belonging to this data key is to be given a homogeneous structure in the gener-
ated ComposerFile.
If this check box is selected, all channels of this data key will receive the same
base trace in the generated ComposerFile.
In the case of time-based data keys, there is a drop-down list box that appears
underneath the list where you can specify the Resolution for the channels of a
homogeneous data key in the ComposerFile. By selecting the automatic option
the resolution of the source data is applied.
If a data key contains more than one measurement, a drop-down list box
appearing underneath the data key list enables you to select the Measurement
that is to be copied into the ComposerFile. Only one measurement at a time can
be transferred to the ComposerFile.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 237

Information

Please note that this measurement selection has to be done separately for each
test. This means that, in case there are more tests specified in the lower list of
the dialog, the contents of this measurement selection drop-down list will also
depend on the test you select here.

A second list shows the names of the previously selected tests. Here you can
exclude individual tests from being concatenated by deactivating the check box
Use.
The order of tests can be changed by the arrow buttons. The order of tests in this
list determines the order of data when they are concatenated.
These dialog settings always remain the same. If the dialog is used again to
concatenate several tests, the same settings will be active. This makes it easier
to perform similar, recurring copy processes.

New ComposerFile from Existing Measurements

Via the input fields ComposerFile name and ComposerFile alias, it is possible
to define the name and alias of the ComposerFile to be created, following the
same principles as described for creating a new, empty ComposerFile (see
Creating a New ComposerFile auf Seite 227).
Via the input fields Key and Description you determine which data key is to be
created in the generated ComposerFile. All data from the previously selected
source data keys are combined and copied into this data key.
The Homogeneous structure field allows you to specify a homogeneous target
data key in the ComposerFile. All data added to this data key are normalized by
interpolation if required (same resolution and number of data points).
By activating the check boxes Use custom channel filter and Copy only
records that match the filter criteria you can set conditions and rules to define
which data will be copied into a ComposerFile's data key. The check boxes for
selective data transfer are described in Selective Data Transfer auf Seite 238.
Adding Data from Existing Measurements to Existing ComposerFile
As the ComposerFile has already been established at this point, the corre-
sponding fields ComposerFile name and ComposerFile alias are now
displayed as information only and are unable to be changed.
It is, however, possible to use the Key field to define into which of the Compos-
erFile’s data keys the data is to be copied. This field is designed as an editable
combo box. This means that it is possible to either select a data key that already
exists in the ComposerFile or specify a new data key name. In the former case
the data from the source measurements is appended to the data in the already
existing target data key whereas in the latter case a new data key is created in
the ComposerFile and the source data is copied into this new data key.
If a new data key is specified, it is possible to use the Homogeneous structure
check box to define whether it is to be created as a homogeneous data key. For
existing data keys this field is not changeable and reflects the type of target data
key.
By activating the check boxes Use custom channel filter and Copy only
records that match the filter criteria you can set conditions and rules to define
which data will be copied into a ComposerFile's data key. The check boxes for
selective data transfer are described in Selective Data Transfer auf Seite 238.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

238 Editing Data

Copying Records from the Composer Window to a New or Existing

ComposerFile
If several records are selected in the Composer window, the context menu once
again shows the menu item Copy to ComposerFile. The process is equivalent
to the process Copying a Data Key or a Measurement of an Existing Test to a
New or Existing ComposerFile auf Seite 234. The only difference to the process
described above is that in this case only the selected records are copied. In addi-
tion, the same channels are automatically transferred to the target Composer
window that are also defined in the Composer window of the original Compos-
erFile.

[Link] Selective Data Transfer

Abb. 142

Selective data transfer refers to the process of defining the conditions and rules
according to which data is to be copied into a ComposerFile’s data key. These
conditions are applied to the data in the sources as filter criteria and only those
data is transferred to the ComposerFile which match these filter conditions.
The filter can apply at two levels: On the one hand, you can define which of the
channels are to be transferred from the sources to the target and which not and,
on the other hand, you can define the criteria relating to the data.
Channel Filter To apply a user-defined channel filter, activate the check box Use custom
channel filter. The filter conditions are defined in a separate dialog, which can
be opened via the button Channel Filter.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 239

Abb. 143

In the Channel Filter Definition dialog you can define:

„ whether and in what way formula channels are to be taken over (calculated
formula results or the formula definition from the original data);
„ whether certain channel types should not be taken over, such as channels
as to which the channel base type is different from the data key base type
(these are virtual channels, identifiable by the fact that their names start
with a $-character), log point-based channels, time-based channels and/or
ASCII channels (useful if there are large data quantities where ASCII data is
of no relevance);
„ whether it is to be filtered by channel name, i.e. with certain channel names
being excluded (field on the left) or included (field on the right);
If you activate the check box Match full name, only those channels are
excluded/included that have names which exactly match what was entered
in the field (e.g. entering CO would only exclude/include the channel with
the name CO, but not the CO2 channel, etc.).
It is additionally possible to store user-defined filter conditions in individual
channel filter definition files. A channel filter definition file is used if you activate
the option button Use Channel Filter Definition File and choose a previously
created and stored file via the Select File button.
Channel filter definition files are XML files in a certain format and have the exten-
sion ".channelfilter" (see Channel Filter Definition File auf Seite 240 for a
description of how this file is structured).
Data Filter The data filter allows you to transfer only those data from the sources into the
ComposerFile the data values of which match certain criteria.
These criteria are defined in the form of data filter conditions. Data filter condi-
tions may either be entered and changed as text as an expression in the corre-
sponding input field or via the Filter Conditions Editor. The Filter Conditions
Editor can be called using the Edit Condition button (see Filter Conditons Editor
auf Seite 244 for a description of this editor).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

240 Editing Data

The data filter is applied to the source data and only those datasets are trans-
ferred to the ComposerFile that satisfy this filter condition.
To activate the data filter, the check box Copy only records that match the
filter criteria must be activated and a condition must be specified.
If you activate the check box Add channels "_SourcePath_" and
"_SourcePathValue_ as back reference to original data, two channels are
created in Channel Browser for back reference to the source data.
In the _SourcePath_ channel, the path to the data key is entered from which the
corresponding record was transferred (source of the data).
In the channel _SourceBaseValue_, the base value (x-value) of the corre-
sponding record is entered in the form it originally existed.
By combining these two values the record copied to its target location can be
traced back to its source.

[Link] Channel Filter Definition File

The channel filter definition file is a file in XML format with the extension ".chan-
nelfilter". A channel filter file helps you to define which channels are to be taken
over from the sources when copying into a ComposerFile and which are to be
filtered out (in other words not transferred).
An example of the contents of such a file with a description of its elements is
given below:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="ISO-8859-1"?>
<plist version="1.0">
<dict>
<key>FilterChannelsVersion</key>
<string>1.0</string>
<key>FilterSpec</key>
<dict>
<key>Include</key>
<dict>
<key>NamePatterns</key>
<array>
<string>^AGR_RATE</string>
<string>^L(.*)</string>
</array>
</dict>
<key>Exclude</key>
<dict>
<key>NamePatterns</key>
<array>
<string>.*</string>
</array>
<key>Types</key>
<array>
<string>FormulaChannel</string>
<string>VirtualChannel</string>
<string>BinaryChannel</string>

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 241

<string>AllDataInvalid</string>
</array>
</dict>
</dict>
</dict>
</plist>
The file defines a "property list" which is defined by the elements <plist> and
</plist> and contains a dictionary.
A Dictionary consists of one or several pairs of keys and their related values. The
name of a dictionary key is entered between the XML elements <key> and
</key> and serves to identify the succeeding value. The name of the key is
immediately followed by the related value. A value may be a string, an array or
even another dictionary.
The FilterChannelsVersion The FilterChannelsVersion key is mandatory and
identifies the file as a channel filter specification file. Its value indicates the used
channel filter version as a string. Currently only version 1.0 is supported.
The FilterSpec key defines the actual channel filter. Its value is a dictionary with
the possible Include and Exclude keys. With Include you define which channels
are to be transferred and with Exclude you define which are to be excluded. The
channels may be specified either by their name or by their type.
Both the Include and the Exclude dictionary have the same options to address
one or more channels:
The NamePatterns key enables you to use regular expressions to specify refer-
ence samples for channel names. This is done by entering an array with strings
as a value for the NamePatterns key with each of these strings representing a
regular expression. In the example above, the expressions "^AGR_RATE" and
"^N(.*)" are entered under Include. This means that all channels with names
starting with "N" and the channel with the name "AGR_RATE" are explicitly
transferred (in other words not filtered out).
With the help of the Types key channels can be addressed by their type. Once
again, an array is specified as a value which contains strings which describe the
corresponding type. The following type specifications are supported:
LogpointBased The channel is based on log points.
TimeBased The channel is based on time values.
SameBaseTypeAsDataKey The channel has the same base type as the data
key to which it belongs.
FormulaChannel The channel is a calculated formula channel.
VirtualChannel The channel is a virtual channel (i.e. channel with
a name that starts with a "$" character).
BinaryChannel The channel contains binary data.
AllDataInvalid The channel only contains invalid channels.

A channel which is neither addressed by Include nor by Exclude is not filtered

out. In addition, addressing channels by their name has priority over addressing
them by their type. This means that if a channel is implicitly excluded via Name-
Patterns in Exclude, it is filtered out even though it might have been included in
Include via Types.
Furthermore, Include has priority over Exclude, which means that a channel with
a name that e.g. is addressed both by Include and by Exclude is not filtered out
because Include is given higher priority. The example above makes use of this
circumstance by the way all channel names are filtered out in Exclude by speci-
fying ".*" while certain ones are transferred explicitly by Include.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

242 Editing Data

7.2.9 Creating a New Composer File from the Results of a Query in Data Explorer
The results from a query in Data Explorer can be exported to a ComposerFile.
For more on this subject, see the documentation about Data Explorer.

7.2.10 Creating ComposerFiles from MS Excel

See Creating a New ComposerFile auf Seite 227.

7.2.11 Further Support in Composer for ComposerFile Features

Options for Record Selection in Composer
Composer provides special options for record selection.
The context menu that opens if you right-click the empty area behind the last
column in the Composer window contains the following options:
„ Select Records with Condition
If this menu item is selected, a dialog appears prompting you to enter a con-
dition. This dialog is identical to the one where you define the data point
filter conditions (see Filtering by Data Point auf Seite 257). If the condition is
defined, all records in the Composer are additionally selected that meet this
condition. Any already selected records remain selected. This also makes it
possible to add further areas via the context menu again.
„ Invert Selection
If this menu option is chosen, all records but the previously selected ones
will be selected.
Creating Calculated Channels in Composer
In addition, Composer enables you to add channels calculated by means of the
Calculator.
The context menu that opens if you right-click a channel name field or the empty
area behind the last column in the Composer window contains the following
options:
„ Add Calculated Channel
This option opens the Calculator (see Exploration Guide, under Calcula-
tions). The selected channel is shown in field A in the Calculator. Specify
the required calculation and click the Write button. A new channel is cre-
ated in the ComposerFile and added behind the last channel in the Com-
poser window.
„ Transform Channel
This option opens the Calculator (see Exploration Guide, under Calcula-
tions). The selected channel is shown in field A in the Calculator as input
channel for the transformation. Specify the required calculation and click the
Write button. The selected channel will be transformed according to the cal-
culation specification.

7.2.12 Exporting and Saving ComposerFile Data

ComposerFiles can be exported or saved in different ways:
„ Via the context menu item Export:
Right-click the ComposerFile in Channel Browser and select Export. A sub-
menu for format selection will open. The following options are available:
– ATF: Classic ATF Format (ASAM-ODS Transport File Format,
ASCII-based)
– ATF-XML: XML-ATF Format (ASAM-ODS Transport File Format,
XML-ASCII-based)

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 243

– CTF: CONCERTO Transport Format (Binary)

A file selection dialog to define the storage location appears. The entire
ComposerFile contents are exported into the relevant format.
„ Via Copy / Paste:
Right-click the ComposerFile in Channel Browser and select Copy.
Now you can insert the copied ComposerFile at the following locations in
Data Explorer:
– CTF data source
Select a CTF data source and select Paste from the context menu.
– ASAM-ODS data source
Select a test series of an ASAM-ODS data source. First of all, make
sure that you have Write access rights on the relevant ASAM-ODS
server. Select Paste from the test series' context menu to save the
ComposerFile as a test of this test series.
„ Embedding into a layout:
A ComposerFile may also be embedded in a layout, as described in section
Creating a New ComposerFile auf Seite 227. In this case, the Compos-
erFile is available again when the layout is loaded.

7.2.13 Example
1. Open three tests from an ASAM server (or three measurements from ASAM
tests).
2. Right-click the blank area of the file list in Channel Browser and select the
menu option New ComposerFile.
The ComposerFile definition dialog will automatically be selected.
3. Define a data key (e.g. D). Channel Browser will now show the new Com-
poserFile.
4. Now select the same data key in each of the open tests, one after the other,
and choose Add to ComposerFile from the data key's context menu.
In this way, all channels from data key D from all of the three tests are con-
catenated in the ComposerFile.
5. To display the ComposerFile data, drag the ComposerFile channels of
interest from Channel Browser to the Composer window that was created
when creating the Composer File. Now you can perform the usual editing
operations. If you delete a record via a row's context menu, the relevant
data points of the non-represented channels will also be deleted, as usual.
After you have finished editing, you can export the ComposerFile to a file (see
Exporting and Saving ComposerFile Data auf Seite 242).
If you wish to save the data as a new test on the ASAM server, select Copy from
the ComposerFile's context menu in Channel Browser, open Data Explorer and
select the relevant data source or test series. Then choose Paste from the
context menu to create a test.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

244 Editing Data

7.2.14 Filter Conditons Editor

Abb. 144

The Filter Conditions Editor is used to define and change data conditions.
This makes it possible, for example, when creating a ComposerFile from existing
data to apply exclusively data to the ComposerFile which match such data condi-
tions. Alternatively, all lines in a Composer window can be selected that match a
data condition. It is also possible to filter all data from a channel that do not fulfil
a data condition.
The data conditions for all of these cases mentioned above are interchangeable.
The Filter Conditions Editor allows you to store data conditions and reload them.
As a result, data conditions can be created, archived and re-used for all sorts of
different applications.
A data condition may be composed of three different elements:
The most important element is the relational expression. This consists firstly of
an identifier that represents a channel name and is entered in the Attribute
column. Secondly, the relational operator that is selected in the Operator
column.
Operators
= equal
!= unequal
> greater than
< less than
>= greater than or equal to
<= less than or equal to
Within inside a range
NotWithin outside a range
IsValid checking for valid value
IsInvalid checking for invalid value

Depending on the operator used, values also have to be specified in columns

Value1 and Value2 as additional arguments.
For the operators Within and NotWithin two numerical values have to be entered,
specifically the lower range value as Value 1 and the upper range value as
Value 2.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 245

For the operators IsValid and IsInvalid no further arguments are necessary, and
for all the other operators, a numerical value is specified in Value 1 which is
used as a reference for the comparison.
The relational expression delivers a Boolean result (TRUE or FALSE) for each
data value of its specified channel.
Several such relational expressions may be specified (each shown as a sepa-
rate line in the Filter Conditions Editor). These are linked by the logical operator
AND, i.e. all relational expressions must be valid to satisfy the data condition. If
different relational expressions refer to different channels within one condition,
the condition evaluation is dataset-based (channel data which have the same
base value are compared with one another).
So-called block operators, however, make it possible to influence the logic oper-
ation of the relational expressions. The following block operators are available:
AND logical AND operation
OR logical OR operation
( left parenthesis (for priorization of expressions)
) right parenthesis (for priorization of expressions)

In the case of block operators, specifications are needed neither in the Attribute
column nor in the Value1 or Value2 columns. Block operators rather more link
the lines that are above them in the Filter Conditions Editor with the ones below
them.
Consequently, using the block operator OR leads to two relational expressions
not being linked (as set by default) by AND but by OR.
The use of the block operator AND is optional, because two succeeding rela-
tional expressions are by default linked with AND.
The AND operator takes priority over the OR operator (normal Boolean priority
rule), however the priority rule may be influenced by using brackets (paren-
theses). To do so, the operators "(" (left parenthesis) and ")" (right parenthesis)
are applied. At the beginning of an area to be put in parentheses enter a line with
a left parenthesis in the Operator column of the Filter Conditions Editor and at
the end of the area to be put in parentheses enter a line with a right parenthesis
in the Operator column.

Information

Make sure that all opened parentheses are closed again.

Operators for recorder ranges:

IndexRange for specification via index position
BaseValueRange for specification via base value

Record ranges can be entered directly using the Filter Conditions Editor. To this
end, the IndexRange and BaseValueRange operators are provided. IndexRange
enables you to specify ranges via index positions, whereas BaseValueRange
allows you to specify ranges via their base values. The record ranges are speci-
fied via the Value1 and Value2 columns; the Attibute column has no relevance
for these operators and remains blank. Value1 defines the range's lower limit
while Value2 defines the upper limit.
Several range specifications can be combined using the OR operation.
Operators for recorder maximum and minimum:
Max for specification of recorder maximum
Min for specification of recorder minimum

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

246 Editing Data

Via the Max and Min operators, you can specify the record whose y-trace
contains the greatest (Max) or smallest (Min) value. To do so, you have to enter
the channel in the Attribute column, of which the y-trace is to have the compar-
ison applied upon.
The Enabled column defines whether or not the respective line is used to form
the condition. Deactivating it has the same effect as if the respective line did not
exist at all.
You may additionally select a unit from the drop-down list in the Unit column.
The displayed filter values then refer to the unit specified here. The display unit
used in the Composer window, however, remains unaffected.

Information

Please note that a unit conversion affects the filter values but not the dataset.
The original unit remains in the dataset.

The list contains a group of possible units for a physical dimension which can be
displayed alternatively. These are saved in the unit table and can be adjusted
where necessary with the help of the unit editor (see Unit Conversion auf
Seite 263 and Unit Editor auf Seite 264).
The Delete button enables you to delete the currently selected line from the
Filter Conditions Editor.
The Insert button adds a new empty line above the currently selected line.
The Load and Save buttons enable you on the one hand to save the currently
displayed condition in the Filter Conditions Editor to a file and on the other to
replace the currently displayed condition with another one loaded from a file.
The condition is saved as XML file with the file name extension ".conditions".

7.3 IFile Editor

The IFile Editor offers a convenient way to edit IFiles. When the editor is started,
the measurement parameters are loaded from the IFile into the memory. These
parameters contain the necessary definitions, thus only IFiles containing a
parameter file are supported by the editor.
If an IFile does not include a parameter file, the external editor IFED is started.
You can start the IFile Editor via the option IFile Editor in Channel Browser.

Abb. 145

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 247

7.3.1 IFile Editor Dialog

Abb. 146

Changes will only be accepted if the button Apply and Save is pressed. For
safety reasons, a backup copy is automatically created in the temporary folder
/tmp. Alternatively, the modified IFile can be saved under a new name via the
Apply and Save As button. A file selection dialog will open.
Via the button Apply to mulitple IFiles changes can be applied to multiple IFiles
in succession. In a file browser dialog you can select multiple IFiles on which you
wish to apply the modifictions. Also here, backup files are automatically created.
When the check box Create backup file (.org) is activated, a backup file with
the original name and the extension .org is automatically created in the source
data folder.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

248 Editing Data

7.3.2 Engine Parameters / TDC Values

Abb. 147

This property page allows you to change engine parameters and TDC values.
In the latter case, the TDC value for one or more cylinders can be shifted. The
change made to one certain cylinder affects the measuring ranges of all
assigned signals with the same cylinder number. It is additionally possible to
recalculate all RTP results in the file. The TDC shift is carried out by a shift of the
crank angle-based x-axis. This shifts the measuring range, but the measuring
data itself remains unaffected. A reset to the original range is no longer possible.
A reset to the original value is only possible if a TDC change is made again.

Information

Changes to the engine properties or the TDC value usually require a recalcula-
tion of the RTP results in the file (see Recalculation auf Seite 252).
When changes are made, this requirement is pointed out to the user upon
saving.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 249

7.3.3 Signals

Abb. 148

The channels are contained in a signal list. By double-clicking a channel or

selecting multiple channels and choosing Properties from the context menu you
can open the signal properties dialog. This allows you to change the properties
of multiple signals conveniently in a single step.

Abb. 149

[Link] Signal Parameters

Abb. 150

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

250 Editing Data

Signal properties are modified in the usual signal parameter dialog.

7.3.4 Operating Parameters

Abb. 151

Here you can change and specify operating parameters.

7.3.5 File Comment

Abb. 152

This is where you can change the saved IFile comment. Input is limited to 79
characters.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Editing Data 251

7.3.6 Cycle Extraction

This subdialog allows you to cut cycles from existing files.

Abb. 153

Apply cycle extraction on Save

When this check box is activated, you can use the Cycle Selection input field to
specify the cycles or cycle ranges to be extracted on saving (via Apply and
Save).
Cycle Selection
It is also possible to define multiple cycle numbers or cycle ranges separated by
commas. If defining a cycle range, enter the first and last cycle separated by a
hyphen. Alternatively, you can also define a dataset within angle brackets onto
which you wish to apply the extraction. Only those cycles are taken into account
whose value in the dataset does not equal zero.

7.3.7 Cycle Averaging

Via this subdialog you can average an IFile later on.

Abb. 154

Apply cycle averaging on Save

When this check box is activated, all cycles of all cyclic channels are averaged.
Cycle Variation
Channels (e.g. upper and lower envelope curve) can also be appended to the
IFile. The new channel name is created by means of the Post Fix Name. The
Post Fix string must precede the cylinder number so that the cylinder number
logic is preserved.

Example
Upper envelope curve for PCYL1… PCYLUE1

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

252 Editing Data

7.3.8 Recalculation
The IFile Editor supports the recalculation of RTP values.
If the IFile Editor is used to change significant parameters such as engine
parameters or the signal calibration, the RTP values lose their validity. When
saving the IFile, you will be made aware of this fact and asked to have the RTP
values recalculated.
It is possible to initiate a recalculation of the RTP values (cyclic results) from the
measured signal curves. Currently it is not possible to change the original result
calculation parameters (e.g. calculation range). To recalculate results, proceed
as follows:
1. Click the Recalculation button.
2. Activate the check box in the dialog that appears and click OK.
The RTP values will be recalculated, even you did not change them.
3. Click the Apply and Save button to save the recalculated RTP values in the
IFile.

Abb. 155

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 253

8 Special Functionalities

8.1 Special Channel Browser Functionalities

8.1.1 Comparison of Files

CONCERTO offers an easy way of comparing multiple files with each other. You
can choose between interactive (see Interactive File Comparison auf Seite 253)
and automatic file comparison (see Automatic File Comparison (File Comparison
Mode) auf Seite 256). The Interactive mode gives you complete flexibility and
the power to influence the comparison process and should therefore be given
priority. Automatic File Comparison is fully automatic, yet it requires certain struc-
tures in the displayed layout.

[Link] Interactive File Comparison

With the interactive file comparison method you have an easy way to fill up a
window or a whole layout that was created for the data of a file with data of other
files. In doing so you are not only able to replace the original file with another
one, but also to add further files to the original one for the purpose of comparing
them. Unlike with automatic file comparison (see Automatic File Comparison
(File Comparison Mode) auf Seite 256) the interactive comparison method gives
you more control over the files to be displayed.
In the following explanation, it is assumed that a layout was already created for
displaying the data of a file, so a file is already open in Channel Browser.

Abb. 156

When you prepare a layout for the file comparison, please keep in mind that only
certain graphical objects are suitable for comparing files. These include line
charts, bar charts and tables. Additionally, a legend of the type Filename is ideal
for such layouts.
If the current window displays channels of a given file, a red tick is shown on the
file symbol:

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

254 Special Functionalities

The layout displays the file data accordingly:

Abb. 157

• Via Data Explorer open another file.

Abb. 158

The additionally opened file will now also appear in Channel Browser under
the alias ATFFILE2.
Since the window does not yet display the channels of this file, no red tick is
visible on the file symbol:

The functions for the interactive file comparison are now on the context
menu of Channel Browser:

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 255

Case 1 Displaying data of another file in the same window/layout (replacement)

If you want to display the data of another file in a window instead of the data of
an already opened file, proceed as follows:
In the file's context menu you can choose whether the channels should only be
displayed in the current window or in all windows.
• Select the option Display in this window. The channels of the second file
will now be shown instead of those of the first. In this way, you can toggle
between two or more files as much as you like to display them.

Abb. 159

It is also possible to drag an open file into a window. This has the same effect as
using the Display in this window context menu option.
Case 2 Displaying data of an additional file in the same window/layout (file
comparison)
If you want to add the channels of another file to those of an already opened file
in a window, proceed as follows:
In the file's context menu you can choose whether the channels of the selected
file should only be added to the current window or to all windows.
• Select the option Add to this window (multiple selection possible). In doing
so, the channels of the additional file(s) are shown in addition to those of the
first.

Abb. 160

In Channel Browser all open files have now been given the relevant sym-
bols.

Abb. 161

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

256 Special Functionalities

It is also possible to drag an open file into a window. Keeping the Ctrl key
pressed while doing this has the same effect as using the Add to this window
context menu option.
For the graphical comparison of files you can define a color, line style or marker
variation by selecting the property page Automatic Variation via the menu
option Extras | Layout Settings | Colours (see Automatic Variation auf
Seite 213).

Removing datasets of a file

• If you specifically want to remove datasets of a file from the comparison, call
up the context menu of the open and displayed file and select the option
Remove from this window or Remove from all windows (multiple selec-
tion is possible).
Do not use the context menu option Close to remove the channels of a file
from the display. This would close the file, however the reference to the file
alias would remain in the layout.

[Link] Automatic File Comparison (File Comparison Mode)

The number of open files is not limited. It is easy to compare data from different
files as datasets are identified by the specification of file alias, data key and
channel name (e.g. IFILE1:CA'PCYL1).
A logic has been implemented to allow you to do that, which can be activated via
the menu option Extras | Automatic File Comparison Mode.
When tests are opened while the automatic file comparison logic is activated, the
system checks whether data of the same type is already being used in the
layout. If this is the case, a superimposed display with the already shown data is
automatically triggered. This enables the quick and simple comparison of data
from different files.

Information

In order to be able to work with File Comparison Mode, the layout must be struc-
tured as follows:
The alias for open files must end with "1" (e.g. ASAM1). All datasets in the layout
that refer to the open files are used in the file comparison.

For the graphical comparison of files you can define a color, line style or marker
variation by selecting the property page Automatic Variation via the menu
option Extras | Layout Settings | Colours (see Automatic Variation auf
Seite 213).
Additionally, when loading individual channels of an open file, the data of other
open files with the same alias names are automatically compared, too. Compar-
ison mode only works if the data structure is the same throughout several tests,
i.e. the same data key names and channel names.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 257

The following response can be defined for file comparison mode under Extras |
Pre-Sets.

AutoResetFileComparison=0(default) AutoResetFileComparison=1
File comparison mode is automatically activated if a File comparison mode is automatically activated if a
layout is loaded and more tests are selected in the file layout is loaded and more tests are selected in the file
selection window than were originally referenced in the selection window than were originally referenced in the
layout. layout.
File comparison mode is automatically deactivated if a File comparison mode is automatically deactivated if a
layout is loaded and the same number of tests are layout is loaded and the same number of tests are
selected in the file selection window as were originally selected in the file selection window as were originally
referenced in the layout. referenced in the layout.
When CONCERTO is started, file comparison mode When CONCERTO is started, file comparison mode is
adopts the settings of the last CONCERTO session. automatically deactivated.
If a new layout is created in a current CONCERTO If a new layout is created in a current CONCERTO
session, this does not change the currently set file session, file comparison mode is automatically deacti-
comparison mode. vated.

8.1.2 Filtering by Data Point

CONCERTO enables filtering at the test level (see documentation about Data
Explorer, under Filtering and Searching) and also by data point, as described in
this section.
Filtering by data point enables you to filter those points of an extensive measure-
ment which are relevant for a given evaluation.
A data point filter is automatically applied to all channels of a data key. To define
the filter, select Data Point Filter from the data key's context menu. In the
Attribute column in the filter dialog, you can select a channel and set one or
more conditions for it.
If one channel is sufficient, you may also call the filter dialog directly via the
context menu of the channel for which you wish to define a filter condition. The
channel name is automatically inserted into the Attribute column:

Abb. 162

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

258 Special Functionalities

The Filter Conditions definition dialog is opened (the dialog is scalable and the
column width can be adjusted individually):

Abb. 163

The condition in the example above filters the data points allocated to curve
number 2. Only the range matching the filter condition is shown:

Abb. 164

The filter is applied to all channels of the data key and displayed in Channel
Browser in addition to the data key name.
The filter condition can be extended as required, i.e. you may apply further
conditions to already filtered data.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 259

You may select further channels, operators and values via drop-down lists:

Abb. 165

In the example figure above, a further filter condition was added which fil-
ters all points with a speed higher than 2000:

Abb. 166

The individual conditions are, basically, logically linked by AND (all conditions
must be met). If you want to link conditions or blocks by means of OR, you can
insert a condition row in which only the OR operator is set. The overall condition
is met if the conditions block before the OR condition or the one after the OR
condition is met.
You may activate or deactivate individual filter conditions via the relevant check
box in the Filter Conditions dialog.
You may additionally select a unit from the drop-down list in the Unit column.
The displayed filter values then refer to the unit specified here.
The list contains a group of possible units for a physical dimension which can be
displayed alternatively. These are saved in the unit table and can be adjusted
where necessary with the help of the unit editor (see Unit Conversion auf
Seite 263 and Unit Editor auf Seite 264).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

260 Special Functionalities

If you want to delete a filter condition, click the gray area to the left of the relevant
check box to select the line and then click the Delete button.

8.2 Special Layout Explorer Functionalities

Channels are linked to alias, data key and channel name in the layout. However,
the data structure or the channel names often change. In such cases, the func-
tion described in the following gives you a convenient way to customize the
layout.
For this purpose, Layout Explorer provides the Channels in use view which lists
all the channels, data keys and file aliases used in a layout, enabling you to
adjust all channels linked within the layout.
Channels, data keys and file aliases that are used in the layout and that exist in
the opened file are marked with a green tick. However, the ones that are used in
the layout and are not contained in the opened file appear grayed out and are
marked with a gray checkmark.
The names of these unused channels can then be replaced with names used in
the layout via drag & drop (for more information on this, see below).

Information

All replacement operations refer to the selection made in the upper area of
Layout Explorer. Make sure that the layout (.cly) is selected, and not only a
diagram window, if you want the entire layout to be customized.

Abb. 167

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 261

The lists of a layout's used channels are divided into Channels, Data Keys and
File Alias. This makes it easy to change or remove channel names, data keys or
alias names:

Abb. 168

Via drop-down lists you can select how much additional information is to be
displayed. More detailed display is useful e.g. if you wish to change a channel
name of a certain file alias, but not of others.
Channels
The drop-down list under Channels provides the following display options:

Abb. 169

„ Names:
This option lists the names of all datasets in the layout or the selected
window. Each name is displayed only once, irrespective of how often it
exists in the different data keys and/or file aliases.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

262 Special Functionalities

In order to change a channel name across the entire layout independently

of its data key and file alias, simply drag a channel from Channel Browser
onto the channel to be changed:

Abb. 170

„ Names with Key:

This option lists the names and data keys of all datasets used in the layout
or the selected window. If a name exists in different data keys, it can be dis-
played multiple times. If it exists in different file aliases, it is listed only once.
In order to change a channel name across the entire layout independently
of its file alias, simply drag a channel from Channel Browser onto the
channel to be changed. This will not affect channels with the same name
existing in other data keys.
„ Full Names:
This option lists the names, data keys and file aliases of all datasets used in
the layout or the selected window. If a name exists in different data keys
and/or file aliases, it can be displayed multiple times.
In order to change a channel name across the entire layout, simply drag a
channel from Channel Browser onto the channel to be changed. This will
not affect channels with the same name existing in other data keys and/or
file aliases.
Data key selection
The drop-down list under Data Keys provides the following display options:

Abb. 171

„ Data Keys:
This option lists all data keys used in the layout or the selected window.
Each name is displayed only once, irrespective of how often it exists in the
different file aliases.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 263

In order to change a data key across the entire layout independently of its
file alias, simply drag a data key from Channel Browser onto the data key to
be changed.
„ Data Keys with Alias:
This option lists all data keys used in the layout or the selected window
together with the file alias. If a data key exists in different file aliases, it can
be displayed multiple times.
In order to change a data key across the entire layout, simply drag a data
key from Channel Browser onto the data key to be changed. This will not
affect data keys with the same name existing in other file aliases.
File Alias
This option lists all file aliases used in the layout.
In order to change a file alias across the entire layout, simply drag a file alias
from Channel Browser onto the file alias to be changed.

8.3 Unit Conversion

The Unit Conversion function (menu option Extras | Unit Conversion) enables
you to convert data into other units and display it.
Unit Conversion is performed using unit tables, which are included in a standard
CONCERTO installation by default (see ASCII Table for Unit Conversion auf
Seite 264).
For ASAM data, a unit table is used for conversion that is stored on the
AVL Santorin ASAM ODS server.
You can change this behavior via Extras | Pre-Sets by setting the entry Alway-
sUseGlobalUnitConverter=1. This setting has the effect that the files described
in ASCII Table for Unit Conversion auf Seite 264 are also used for conversion in
the case of ASAM data.
The unit table contains groups of units for different physical dimensions. All units
that can sensibly be used in association with a physical dimension are stored in
the group for that dimension.
The user interface for unit conversion based on an ASCII table is the same as for
the ASAM unit table.
In CONCERTO you can activate a unit conversion for line and table objects,
which is the last transformation before the screen output. All transformations
before this last one see the data with its original units. In other words, formulas
and macros always work with the original units unaffected by the unit conversion.
The unit conversion can be defined for each axis of line objects and for each
dataset of table objects. Two conversion units can be defined (see Definitions for
Line Curve and Table Objects auf Seite 267).
You can define whether the original unit or one of the two alternatives is to be
used for all objects in a layout.
It is also possible to define unit conversion already in Data Explorer. In this case
the data is converted straight after having been loaded. This enables
CONCERTO to access converted data (see documentation about Data Explorer,
under Special Features for Accessing Data - Translate Channel Names and
Convert Units).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

264 Special Functionalities

8.3.1 ASCII Table for Unit Conversion

There are two ways to convert units:
„ Using a convenient editor (see Unit Editor auf Seite 264)
„ Using two text files which can be edited with any text editor (e.g. Notepad).
Both files are installed as standard during CONCERTO installation. The files
reside in the \StdLib\Desc folder:
– [Link]:
This file contains different physical dimensions, their units as well as
their conversion factors.
The file can be renamed or further physical dimensions can be added
to it.
– [Link]:
This file contains alternative ways of writing the same units and factors.
You can add new spelling variants to the file or change existing ones.
You can also rename the file.
The UnitConversionFiles entry in the [Link] file defines where the two
files are stored so that CONCERTO can use the ASCII table. This entry is
set accordingly during installation and, normally, it is not necessary to
change it.

[Link] Unit Editor

• Select the Extras | Unit Conversion | Edit Units menu option.
The units browser opens:

Abb. 172

Here you can see the relationship between the different designations of units as
well as their conversion factors and offsets to the base unit.
The list at the left-hand side of the dialog displays all physical dimensions known
to the system.
If you open a dimension by clicking the + symbol, all supported units are listed.
A further click on the + symbol shows all available spelling variants for the rele-
vant unit.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 265

Now you can do the following:

„ Right-click a dimension (e.g. Length) to add a further unit.
(You can then specify factor and offset for the new unit. You can also define
the system of units the unit belongs to, e.g. SI).

Abb. 173

„ Right-click the unit to add, rename or delete an alias name

„ Right-click an alias name to rename or delete it
At the right-hand side of the dialog, the factors and the calculation formula used
for the conversion are displayed.
Changes made to this dialog are written back into the [Link] file.

[Link] Unit Table

The unit table consists of the entries for the various dimensions.
Length
m mm Cm km in ft mi
SI Metric Metric Metric Imp Imp Imp
1 1.00E+0 1.00E+0 1.00E-0 39.370078 3.2808398 0.0006213
3 2 3 74 95 71

Area
m2 mm2 cm2 in2 ft2
Metric Metric Metric Imp Imp
1 1.00E+06 1.00E+04 1550.0031 10.76391042

Volume
L mm3 cm3 m3 in3 ft3 gall
Metric Metric Metric Metric Imp Imp Imp
1 1.00E+0 1.00E+0 0.00 61.023744 0.0353146 0.2199736
6 3 09 67 03

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

266 Special Functionalities

Definitions Dimension name:

A single dimension entry consists of the name of the dimension (e.g. Length).
Unit names:
The next line shows the names of the units that can be used for the dimension.
The entries are separated by tabs.
(Example m mm cm km in ft mi)
:

Units system:
The next line contains the units system for the unit.
Not currently used!
Conversion factor:
Next come the conversion factors for converting the units to the basic unit.

Example
Meter (m) is the basic unit for the dimension Length. The factor for the entry
Meter therefore is the value 1, the factor for the unit Millimeter (mm) is 1000, and
for Centimeter (cm) 100.

Conversion offset:
If an offset is also required, it is defined in the next line. If no offset is required,
this entry can be omitted.
Example: Temperature
Temperature
deg_C deg_F K
Metric Imp SI
1 1.799856012 1
0 32 273.15

Example
The basic unit is degree Celsius (deg_C). The factor here therefore is 1 and the
offset 0. The entry for Kelvin: 0 deg. Celsius corresponds to 273.15 Kelvin. The
factor for Kelvin therefore is also 1, but the offset is 273.15.

[Link] Unit Name Table

In the unit table described above, there is only one name for each unit, e.g. ‘s’ for
seconds. In the measurement data, however, other abbreviations are often used
for these units, e.g. sec.
The unit name table exists so that the unit conversion function recognizes that
seconds are meant. It contains a list of the conversion unit names available for a
unit. This table is also divided into groups of dimensions:
# Temperature
deg_C = c | dc | deg c
deg_F = f | deg f
K = deg_K | deg k

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 267

# Time
ms =
s = sec | secs | second

min =
h = hours | hr | Hrs
year = yr | years

If the unit ‘sec’ appears in the file, for example, the system still searches under ‘s’
in the unit table.

8.3.2 Definitions for Line Curve and Table Objects

The Properties dialog of a line curve or table object includes the property page
Unit.

Abb. 174

You can activate the appropriate option buttons to define whether the original
signal unit is to be used for the object or one of the two conversion units.
If you activate Conversion Unit 1 or Conversion Unit 2, you can select the
conversion unit from the list box. The list box contains all conversion units for the
physical dimension of the original unit.
You can actually define two conversion units but, of course, only one can be
used at a time.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

268 Special Functionalities

Unlike a line curve object, the table object allows you to define a separate
conversion unit for each dataset displayed:

Abb. 175

Dataset Items:
Selection of the dataset to be modified.
In the selection box you can select the datasets whose attributes you wish to
change. The button Select All allows you to select all datasets.
To add or delete datasets, use the Datasets category.

8.3.3 Global Unit Conversion

The menu option Extras | Unit Conversion | Define allows you to define the
units to be used for all objects in a layout:

Abb. 176

Object specific
This is the default setting. If this option button is activated, the system uses the
unit defined under Unit in the corresponding object properties dialog for every
object.
Original Unit
If this option button is activated, the original unit is always used irrespective of

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Functionalities 269

the object-specific setting. This is also indicated accordingly in the object's Prop-
erties dialog.

Abb. 177

The above example shows Original Unit activated. None of the two conversion
units can then be selected. The definitions for the conversion units, however, are
preserved.
Conversion Unit 1 / Conversion Unit 2
If either of these option buttons is activated, Conversion Unit 1 or 2 defined in the
object is used for all objects in a layout.
The complete layout can thus be converted from one units system to another,
e.g. from SI to the English units system. The units for both systems can be
specifically defined in each object.

8.4 Automatic Operation / Batch Mode

CONCERTO is switched to automatic operation by selecting Extras | Batch
mode:
If CONCERTO is set correctly, it will check a specific folder at certain intervals to
see whether script files are there. If there are, they are processed consecutively
and then deleted. CONCERTO is then completely disconnected from the host
creating the script file. At the end of a test, the host creates a script file in which
only the test name/layout name is changed in accordance with a template.
CONCERTO can access these tests via the set data sources and load their data.
If the host copies the script file to a specific folder, CONCERTO processes it and
then deletes it. When a test is finished therefore, several script files have been
created that can load data from different test beds. This allows you, for example,
to create fully automated reports after test run completion with no need for
further input by the user.
You have to make a few settings in Extras | Pre-Sets to be able to use Batch
mode:
BatchDir This is the folder where CONCERTO checks to see whether there are any script
files. Since the scripts are deleted once they have been executed, the folder
does not have to be write-protected.
BatchCheckTime This entry defines the interval in seconds at which CONCERTO checks the
folder defined under BatchDir. If this entry is missing or set to 0, automatic mode
cannot be used.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

270 Special Functionalities

RemoteActive If this entry is set to 1, CONCERTO boots already in automatic mode. Otherwise
you have to activate the mode manually via Extras | Batch mode.
If you set RemoteActive to 1 and put CONCERTO in the Windows Autostart
group, CONCERTO runs as a batch server without you doing anything else.
If you call up Extras | Batch mode once again when in active batch mode, you
cancel the mode. The same applies when you call up a dialog etc. during a wait
time in the BatchCheckTime.

8.5 Remote Operation

CONCERTO can be operated in remote mode, for example, by the AVL POI test
bed software (PUC - a reduced CONCERTO version is supplied together with
POI).
By selecting Extras | Batch mode you set CONCERTO into remote mode.
There are two special functions in POI:
„ Measurement point graphic
„ Alphanumeric results
In the [Link] file, there are entries for both actions which contain a CONCERTO
script file. POI transmits a Windows message to CONCERTO which contains the
script entries. The current TRR file is also substituted in the script file
($ACTNAME). When CONCERTO is in remote mode, this string is written to a
script file and the script is executed.
POI transmits a signal to CONCERTO each time a new measuring point is
measured and the display is refreshed. You therefore see a curve developing
slowly in the application window.
POI transmits certain events when the user triggers them in POI. CONCERTO
responds to such messages provided they have been defined. In the [Link]
start file, you can define entries with the following format:
Puma_Event_n = scriptfile

Example
Puma_Event_1=c:\concerto\scripts\[Link]

You can create several such entries in the [Link] file to produce a response
to events generated by POI. CONCERTO always executes the script file defined
for the specified event.
POI also sets a user variable called “$CURRENT_FILE” that can be used in
script files. The variable contains the file name of the measurement currently in
progress.
For more information on the communication between POI and CONCERTO, see
the PUMA software documentation.
Do not use Puma_Event_0 because this is already assigned for refreshing the
data loaded in CONCERTO (i.e. reading in again of opened files).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 271

9 Special Tools and Applications

9.1 ECU Map Interpolator

The ECU Map Interpolator enables you to create regular, rectangular maps with
pre-settable grid points:
„ either from existing ECU maps that are available in DCM format
(INCA/ETAS data format for saving maps)
„ or from ECU maps that were recorded on a test bed and are available in
test bed data format (e.g. ASAM ODS).
Both interpolation and extrapolation are possible.
This utility program is an active window in CONCERTO with embedded scripts.
The window is automatically loaded from the AVL library the first time the
program is launched.
Any changes are applied in the window and saved in the personal library. The
next time the ECU Map Interpolator is launched, the window is loaded from
there, which means that it always shows the last settings.

9.1.1 Operating Procedure – Basic

First of all, define the source map which will immediately be displayed as a 3D
diagram.
Next, define the grid points which you want to use for the new ECU map to be
created. If the initial dataset is an ECU map already, you can also take over the
existing grid and simply adjust it. To define the grid, it is possible to enter both
individual values and ranges with a certain interval.
If you then select interpolation, the required grid points are extracted from the
source map by interpolation (if the grid points are outside of the existing data
range, the z-values are kept constant) and the display switches to the target
map. The target map is always shown as a direct grid with no further changes
(non-interpolating map object). You can finally export this target map as a DCM
file.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

272 Special Tools and Applications

9.1.2 Operating Procedure – in Detail

Abb. 178

[Link] Defining the Source Data Map

Depending on the source map’s origin, there are two types of input:
Map from DCM file
1. Activate the From DCM file check box.
2. Drag the map dataset (ending with #) from the data key MAP of the opened
DCM files into the dataset field X/Y/Z (e.g. channel
MAP'AirCtl_mDesBas_MAP# from demo data file [Link] in folder
DemoData\DCM).
The source map is then automatically shown as a 3D diagram.
Map from test bed data
1. The From DCM file check box has to be deactivated.
Separate input fields for three datasets (X, Y, Z) are then available.
2. Drag the required channels from the test bed file into the input fields.
3. Click Update.
The source map is then shown as a 3D diagram.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 273

[Link] Source Map - Smoothing and Range Definition

If the check box Smooth source map via fine intermediate grid is activated, a
fine grid is laid over the source map which is used for map smoothing.
If you have test bed data which generally do not fit into an exact rectangular grid,
this is always necessary.
The smoothing algorithm (typically Cubic Spline) can be set in the 3D display
object's properties (see Properties Dialog auf Seite 110).

NOTICE

Make sure that option button Source Map is activated under Display. Equally
effective are all the other 3D map object settings such as e.g. the calculation
parameters that are used to create the grid (see Isolines - Algorithms auf
Seite 100).

As an alternative, you can also click the Extend range button to set the calcula-
tion limits for x/y by using a separate dialog. The map is then extrapolated
according to the set smoothing algorithm and by the area it defines.

[Link] Target Map Interpolation

The input fields X Grid and Y Grid allow you to define the required new grid
points for the target map to be created. You can enter either individual values
separated by semicolon or entire value ranges in the form of
"from...to@Interval".
Do not forget to also put a semicolon after the last definition.
If you have a source map available with regular grid, you can also transfer the
grid points and just make any adjustments afterwards. To take over grid points,
click on the Use existing Grid button.
If the Range detection check box is activated, ranges with regular grid point
interval are entered, also in the form as defined above, otherwise only individual
values.
It is also possible to take over the required grid points of another map from a
DCM file. To do so, activate the check box Use different target channel, drag
the map channel out of the data key MAP into the dataset field now shown and
then click on Use existing Grid.
By clicking the Run interpolation button, the required grid points are now inter-
polated to the source map and the resulting values are shown in the form of a
table.
At the same time, a temporary DCM file is created, automatically opened and
displayed graphically as a target map. Display allows you to view either the
Source Map or the Target Map.
By clicking the Save target map button, you can save the created map in DCM
format. The file name you entered is also used as an internal function name, i.e.
it also appears as channel name when this file is opened in Data Explorer.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

274 Special Tools and Applications

[Link] Special Hints

Extrapolation If you have defined any grid points that are outside of the source map’s grid point
range, the same map values will be used for these points as for the last existing
points, i.e. the map is presumed to be constant outside the existing data range.
If, instead, you prefer a linear extrapolation, activate the check box Smooth
source map via the intermediate grid and enter the required x and y limits by
using the button Extend range. Using the algorithm set in the object, a fine
smoothing grid is then interpolated into the source map and extrapolated up to
the defined limits. The smoothing algorithm consequently also has an effect on
the type of extrapolation.
This makes it possible for the target map’s grid points to stay within the source
map range that was extended according to this method, ensuring that no
constant values occur at the edge any more.
Changing Values You can also change individual points of the target map after interpolation by
Manually selecting the relevant cells in the table and entering the required values right
there.
To apply these changes, click Save target map.
In case you do not yet wish to create an external file for the time being, click on
Cancel when the Save dialog is shown. The shown temporary target map will be
refreshed all the same.

9.2 IFile Coldstart Converter

Information

This utility program is only available with CONCERTO Advanced for Indicating
and CONCERTO Premium.

The IFile Coldstart Converter enables you to generate crank angle data from a
Recorder measurement if angle marks (or a trigger signal) have been measured
as separate channels. In this way, combustion measurement data can be
combined with measurement data prior to engine start.
Features
„ Calculation of crank angle-based data from time-based data.
„ Calculation of cyclic data: speed SPEED, cycle time CYCTIME, cycle dura-
tion CYCDUR.
„ Cylinder numbers are determined automatically from the signal names.
„ Different zero level correction (ZLC) methods can be applied to the crank
angle data.
„ The generated crank angle data and the time-based data can be combined
into an IFile.
„ Dialogs and messages support multi-language texts.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 275

9.2.1 User Interface

1
7
2

3
8
4
5
10
11
6

12 13 14

1 .....Cylinder pressure channels: These channels are used to determine the

compression TDC (AutoPhase).
2 .....Polytropic coefficient and two crank angle positions in degrees for thermo-
dynamic zero level correction of cylinder pressure signals
3 .....Channels with reference value correction
4 .....Reference angle and reference value for reference value correction
You can input a reference angle and a reference value.
All curves are shifted parallel until the curve value at the reference angle
corresponds to the reference value.
5 .....AutoPhase: If there is no cylinder pressure signal, the channels with refer-
ence value correction are used to find the compression TDC.
6 .....Other channels: These signals retain the set calibration without further zero
point correction.
7 .....TDC value for each cylinder in degrees.
Ambiguous values (e.g. 90, -90, -90, 90) in a four-cylinder engine are
corrected to 90, 630, 270, 450 by the AutoPhase function.
8 .....TDC from Channels: IFiles from IndiCom V2.0 or higher contain the TDC
value for the related cylinder in the attributes of each channel (also
Recorder channel). TDC from Channnels reads this attribute from all chan-
nels listed and sets the values in the TDC list.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

276 Special Tools and Applications

9 .... Analog CDM Channel:

– CDM Signal Name: Signal with the crank angle marks.
– Edge Detection Threshold [V]: A crank angle mark is detected every
time the CDM signal intersects the threshold in the set direction (see
Slope Selection). If the threshold is outside the signal range, a sepa-
rate threshold is determined. Depending on the signal shape, a
selected threshold can cause crank angle marks to be omitted or to be
detected incorrectly from the signal noise.
– Slope Selection: Falling or rising edge for mark detection.
– Number of teeth/marks: Number of crank angle marks per revolution.
– Number of missing teeth/marks: Number of crank angle marks that
are skipped as TDC mark.
– Resulting CDM resolution [deg]: Crank angle resolution of the recal-
culated signals.
– Trigger signal name (if 0 missing teeth): If there is a separate trigger
signal and the number of missing teeth (Number of missing
teeth/marks) equals 0, the trigger signal has to be included in this list.
Only the first entry in this list is used.
– Extension to be appended to resulting IFile: The result file name is
composed of the source file's name to which this extension is added as
a prefix or suffix. If the extension ends with a dot, it is used as a prefix.
10 .. Performs an IFmerge to collect all data in an IFile.
11 .. Opens the new file as IFILE2.
12 .. Opens the Online Help.
13 .. Closes the dialog.
14 .. Starts the IFile conversion.
Any error messages are output in the message window.
Abb. 179

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 277

9.2.2 Conversion
The following procedure describes a typical conversion:
1. Click Utilities on the workflow bar:

2. Select the option IFile Coldstart Converter.

The window described in User Interface auf Seite 275 opens.
3. Drag the channels from Channel Browser to the channel lists.
There are three channel types which are processed in different ways:
– Cylinder pressure channels:
These channels use thermodynamic zero level correction (you can
enter the polytropic coefficient and both crank angle positions) and, in
four-stroke engines, they apply the automatic phase correction in order
to determine the compression TDC.
– Channels with reference value zero level correction:
Reference value zero level correction is applied to these channels: You
can enter reference angle and reference value.
If no cylinder pressure signals exist, these signals can be used for
automatic phase correction in four-stroke engines.
– Other channels:
These channels use channel calibration without separate zero level
correction.
4. Drag the angle mark channel from Channel Browser into the field CDM
Signal Name.

Information

Specify one channel only!

5. Enter the TDC values for the cylinders. For the first conversion, set all
values to 0 (if the TDC values are unknown), otherwise enter the TDC
values.
When converting IFiles that were recorded using IndiCom V2.0 or higher,
you can have the channel attribute TDCvalue entered in the TDC list. For
this, click TDC from Channels.
6. Enter a suitable threshold value for mark detection. Select the required
edge and enter the number of teeth and the number of missing teeth per
revolution.
7. Enter the desired angle resolution.
8. Click Start Conversion.
The result file is opened as IFILE2 (see new file in Channel Browser).
9. Create a diagram from the crank angle data.
10. Use the slide bar in the status bar to find a cycle which shows the TDC from
the pressure maximum.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

278 Special Tools and Applications

Abb. 180

11. If necessary, refine the TDC values and repeat the conversion.

Example
Here, the TDC of Cylinder 1 is at 90 deg., thus enter 90 as TDC 1 and use the
known firing order 1-3-4-2 for the other TDC values: 630, 270, 450.
You can also use the values 90, -90, -90, 90 because the automatic phase
correction feature compensates for an offset of 360 deg.

[Link] Improving Signals with CalcGraf

If the angle marks are noisy or distorted, you can improve the signal by using
CalcGraf calculation functions and use the formula channel as CDM signal.

Abb. 181

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 279

Here, digital filters effect a bandpass filtering (50 - 4000 Hz).

[Link] Application Examples

Angle marks from the engine control unit (ECU) with gaps:
In this example, the control device outputs 60 marks with 2 missing teeth per
revolution:

Abb. 182

Angle encoder:

Abb. 183

Digital Angle In the cases described above, the angle signal may also exist as a digital signal
Marks that were scanned via the digital inputs of an Indi-Advanced device.
Set the digital signal as angle signal and leave the trigger signal field blank. The
threshold for mark detection is not applied.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

280 Special Tools and Applications

9.3 Working with Windows Media Player

CONCERTO enables you to insert Active-X controls into its display windows,
i.e., for example, to display a Windows Media Player object to play videos (AVI,
e.g. of crash tests) and the subsequent synchronization with diagrams in which
measured data is shown over time. This function is also available via a movie
object from the CONCERTO Object Library (see Exploration Guide, under
Basics of Operation - Graphical Data Analysis).
Active-X controls are inserted using a script:

Example
win = GetActiveWin()
obj = [Link]("AVI","MEDIAPLAYER")
if [Link] then
[Link]
else
TraceError("Active X Control couldn't be created")
endif
A=GetApplication()
file=[Link](%CurrentWorkDir+"\Others","*.avi")
[Link]=file
MsgBox("Resize Control in Height and Width."+"
Notebook Users :" + "
Leave the Design Mode,select the objects context menu ""Options..."" " + "
and switch off the Hardware Acceleration")
[Link]

The example script is available under SdtLib\Scripts\Active-X\AddMedia-

[Link] in the CONCERTO installation folder.
The Active-X control appears in the left upper corner of the window and is then
fully movable and scalable. Initially, the first frame of the movie is shown in the
Windows Media Player object.
Use the slider at the window bottom to navigate within the movie. It is scaled in
milliseconds, enabling movies to be run synchronously, independent of their
refresh rate.
That causes an object to be inserted in Layout Explorer whose name corre-
sponds to the path of the AVI file.

Information

If you are working on a Notebook, you should deactivate the hardware accelera-
tion here, otherwise no image is displayed.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 281

9.4 MATLAB Interface

Via the COM interface CONCERTO can be controlled from MATLAB Simulink
(see COM Interface auf Seite 284).

Information

Option R is required to be able to use the COM Interface.

MATLAB Simulink can request data, process them in a calculation model and
send them back to CONCERTO afterwards. The file requested by MATLAB
Simulink must be opened in CONCERTO. CONCERTO automatically generates
datasets in ComposerFiles for the simulation’s result channels.
The dataflow takes place via an input block and an output block (FromConcerto
and ToConcerto) which can be integrated in a MATLAB Simulink model in the
form of S-functions (dll files). These can be integrated in a MATLAB Simulink
model by using the Simulink Library Browser and the Concerto Link node.
The S-functions FromConcerto and ToConcerto supplied with CONCERTO are
located in the subfolder MatlabInterface in the CONCERTO folder. In order to be
able to use these S-functions in MATLAB, the path to this subfolder must be
added to the MATLAB search path. This can be done with the MATLAB
command AddPath.

Example
Addpath(’C:\Concerto4.x\MatlabInterface’,0)

Abb. 184

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

282 Special Tools and Applications

In the following example one FromConcerto block and several ToConcerto

blocks were integrated into MATLAB Simulink:

Abb. 185

Every FromConcerto and ToConcerto block corresponds to a channel.

FromConcerto Double-clicking the S-function FromConcerto opens an initialization dialog:
Block

Abb. 186

By using the drag&drop function, CONCERTO channels that need to be passed

through a MATLAB Simulink model can be dragged out of Channel Browser or
Data Explorer into the ChannelString line.
This is also where you can select the interpolation method applied by MATLAB
Simulink. CONCERTO delivers data with the highest resolution possible and
uses linear interpolation.
Along the same lines, channels that have been passed through a MATLAB
Simulink model can be imported back to CONCERTO by applying the S-function
ToConcerto .

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 283

ToConcerto Block Double-clicking the S-function ToConcerto opens another initialization dialog:

Abb. 187

In this initialization dialog you choose the alias, the name of the ComposerFile
and whether a new file is to be created for each simulation run or if the old one is
to be overwritten. The alias number is assigned automatically.
If the ReplaceLastFile check box is deactivated, consecutive numbers are auto-
matically appended to the ComposerFiles (SimulinkFile1, SimulinkFile2 etc.).
This function is especially useful if further calculation runs with changed parame-
ters are performed and the results are to be displayed in separate files.
The ComposerFiles are available in Channel Browser where they can be visual-
ized and post-processed in the usual manner.

Abb. 188

Related Subjects ComposerFile auf Seite 226

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

284 Special Tools and Applications

9.5 COM Interface

CONCERTO can be addressed by other programs via a COM link.

Information

Option R is required to be able to use the COM Interface.

9.5.1 CONCERTO Interface

To be able to use this in Visual Basic, for example, you have to integrate the
ConcertoAutomation reference in the Project/References... menu.

[Link] Functions
After creating a new instance using
Dim CONCERTO As New CONCERTO

the methods below are available to the CONCERTO instance:

HRESULT ChangeDataEnv( String dxvfile)
Changes the data environment.
BOOL COMStartup()
Delivers TRUE if CONCERTO is running. A COMStartup call ensures that
CONCERTO is running.
HRESULT EnableVBScriptSupport(long enable)
When CONCERTO is being controlled by VBScript, this command ensures that
exchanged data is VBScript-compatible (0-based arrays and all data is
converted to Variants).
HRESULT EndSession()
This function should be called as the very last function before releasing the Inter-
faces.
VARIANT ExecuteMacro(String macroFileName [, [VARIANT arg1]
[, VARIANT arg2] …, [VARIANT arg10]] )
Executes the macro with the name macroFileName and the optional arguments.
Up to 10 arguments are permissible. The return value of this function is the
return value of the macro called.
HRESULT ExecuteScript(String scriptFileName)
Executes the Script with the name scriptFileName.
HRESULT ExecuteScriptDirect(String name, String script)
Executes the passed command line script. Any string can be passed under
"name" which is then displayed, for example, in an error message.
HRESULT ExecuteScriptDirectAsync(String name, String Script)
Executes the passed command line script. Any string can be passed under
"name" which is then displayed, for example, in an error message.
This function is executed asynchronously, i.e. the function returns immediately
and CONCERTO executes the command line script in the background.
CONCERTO provides an event interface (IConcertoEvents) with the following
events so that the script progress can be monitored:
„ ScriptRunning()
„ ScriptFinished(long retval), where retval is normally 0 and a number other
than 0 when an error occurs.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 285

IDualDataSetInterface* GetDataSet(String name)

Delivers a dual Interface on the CONCERTO dataset with the name "name".
long GetWindowCount()
Delivers the number of open diagram windows.
BSTR GetWindowName([in] long nr)
Delivers the name of the diagram window with index nr that was passed.
HRESULT Hide()
Hides the main CONCERTO window.
long IsInitialized()
The function delivers 1 if CONCERTO startup was successful and 0 if it was not.
Long IsMinimized()
Delivers 1 if CONCERTO is minimized, otherwise 0.
Long IsVisible()
Delivers 1 if CONCERTO is visible, otherwise 0.
String LoadFile(String fileGroup, String fileName)
Loads the file fileName from the data source fileGroup and returns the alias of
that file.
HRESULT LoadLayout(String layoutName)
Loads the layout with the name layoutName which was passed. If layoutName is
an empty string, a new layout is opened.
HRESULT LoadLayoutDialog()
Opens the CONCERTO Open dialog where you can select a layout.
HRESULT Maximize()
Shows and maximizes the main CONCERTO window.
HRESULT Minimize()
Hides and minimizes the main CONCERTO window.
HRESULT PrintWindow(String windowName)
Prints the window with the name windowName. If no windowName is passed, all
windows are printed.
HRESULT Recalculate()
Makes CONCERTO recalculate all formulas/macros.
HRESULT Redraw()
Redraws all windows.
HRESULT Refresh()
Reloads all the data of the data environment.
HRESULT RemoveFile(String alias)
Closes the file with the defined alias.
HRESULT Restore()
Restores the main CONCERTO window.
HRESULT SetArrayBase(long lBase)
This function is used to set whether the arrays delivered by CONCERTO are 0 or
1-based. That relates mainly to VB script because it only understands 0-based
arrays. The default setting for arrays delivered by CONCERTO is 1-based.

Example
SetArrayBase(0)

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

286 Special Tools and Applications

HRESULT Show()
Shows the main CONCERTO window.
HRESULT ShowDataExplorer()
Opens Data Explorer.
long StartedByCOM()
This function is used to check whether the CONCERTO instance being used
was started via COM. The return value is 1 if it was, and 0 if not. It is useful to
know that when a new instance is required in addition to an instance of
CONCERTO that is already running.

9.5.2 CONCERTO RunningInterface

This Interface can be used to fetch an interface to the CONCERTO instance that
was started first and is still running.
In addition to the CONCERTO interface methods, the function described below
is also available:
ConcertoInterface* GetConcertoInterface()
Delivers an interface to the CONCERTO instance that was started first and is still
running.

9.5.3 DataSet Interface

This interface allows you to access datasets.

[Link] Functions
After creating a new instance using
Dim DataSet As DataSet

and assigning a CONCERTO dataset using

Set DataSet = [Link](DataSetName)

the methods below are available to the "DataSet" instance.

String Alias()
Returns the alias of the dataset.
VARIANT aMax()
Returns the x-value at which the dataset has its highest y-value.
VARIANT aMin()
Returns the x-value at which the dataset has its lowest y-value.
long Count()
Returns the number of measurement points in the dataset.
long Cycle()
Returns the active cycle set on the cycle bar.
long CycleCount()
Returns the maximum number of cycles.
String DataType()
Returns the data key of the dataset.
String Description()
Returns the description of the dataset.

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 287

String FullName()
Returns the full name of the dataset.
long iMax()
Returns the index of the maximum y-value.
long iMin()
Returns the index of the minimum y-value.
BOOL IsXAscii()
Returns TRUE if the dataset base is generic ASCII.
BOOL IsYAscii()
Returns TRUE if the data format of the dataset is generic ASCII.
VARIANT Max()
Returns the dataset maximum.
VARIANT Min()
Returns the dataset minimum.
String Name()
Returns the name of the dataset.
void SetFormat(unsigned short width, unsigned short nDec)
Sets the output format of the dataset with field width "width" and decimal places
"nDec".
void SetName(String strName)
Sets the interface to the dataset with the name "strName".
void SetXFormat([in] unsigned short width, [in] unsigned short nDec);
Sets the output format of the x-axis with field width "width" and decimal places
"nDec".
String Unit()
Returns the unit of the dataset.

[Link] Properties
VARIANT array
Returns a list of the y-values starting with the first point.
VARIANT doubleArray
Returns a list of the y-values in DOUBLE format.
VARIANT doubleXArray
Returns a list of the x-values in DOUBLE format.
BOOL i(long i)
Returns the IsInvalid Flag (read only) of the measurement point with index "i".
VARIANT StringArray
Returns a list of the y-values as strings.
VARIANT StringXArray
Returns a list of the x-values as strings.
VARIANT xArray
Returns a list of the x-values starting with the first point.
VARIANT x(long i)
Returns the x-value with index "i". This property is slow if called frequently.
Therefore use the "array" method instead (see VARIANT xArray auf Seite 287).

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

288 Special Tools and Applications

VARIANT y(long i)
Returns the y-value with index "i". This property is slow if called frequently.
Therefore use the "array" method instead (see VARIANT array auf Seite 287).
The very last function has to be EndSession(). Do not forget to release all inter-
faces (no passed parameters). Otherwise the CONCERTO shutdown might fail.

9.5.4 Events
CONCERTO fires the follwing events:
„ ScriptRunning(): Is called during execution of an asynchronous script.
„ ScriptFinished(long retval): Is called after execution of an asynchronous
script.
„ ApplicationClosed(): Is called before the application is closed. Release the
interfaces here.
Create the CONCERTO interface with the keyword WithEvents to be able to
catch the events.

Example
Dim WithEvents Concerto as New Concerto

Define the event functions like this:

Example
Private Sub Concerto_ScriptRunning()
End Sub

9.5.5 Error Handling

Possible COM errors can be caught with the "On Error Goto .." statement.

9.5.6 VB Examples
We recommend using early binding although it is also possible to use late
binding. Below is an example, which shows how to use both:

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Special Tools and Applications 289

Example 1
In this example, a new instance of CONCERTO is to be created:
Dim Concerto As New Concerto
Dim DataSet As DataSet ' early binding
Dim DataSetObject As Object ' late binding, nicht empfohlen

Private Sub Form_Load()

Set DataSet = [Link](DataSetName)

‘ possible but not recommended:

Set DataSetObject = [Link](DataSetName)
End Sub

Private Sub Test_Click()

On Error Goto ComError
Dim arr() As Double
Dim var As Variant
Dim arr2(5 To 10) As Variant

[Link]

MsgBox [Link]()
‘ MsgBox [Link]() ‘ ebenso möglich aber
‘ not recommended

DataSet.y(1) = 8.2
DataSet.x(0) = 10

arr = [Link]
arr(1) = 4

[Link] = arr

for i = 5 to 10
arr2(i) = i
Next i

[Link] = arr2

var = DataSet.y(0)
DataSet.y(1) = var

[Link]
Exit Sub

ComError:
MsgBox “COM Error”

End Sub

Example 1
In this example, a new CONCERTO instance is to be created in addition to one
that is already running.
Dim RunConcerto As New RunningConcerto
Dim Concerto As Concerto

Private Sub Form_Load()

Set Concerto = [Link]()

'now you can use the CONCERTO interface as usual'

[Link]

End Sub

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

290 Special Tools and Applications

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Index 291

Index
Symbols band … 90
# … 149 x/y … 51
in a form table … 156 y/t / y/CA / y/n … 50
in form … 153-154 bar color … 131
in RichText object … 149 bar curve … 89
x/y … 51
Numerics y/t / y/CA / y/n … 50
bar diagrams … 54
3D bar … 54, 120
batch
3D curves … 54, 120
CheckTime … 269
3D diagram … 116
Dir … 269
3D frame … 209
batch mode … 269
borrow license … 24
A boxes
Active-X control … 280 x/y … 51
algorithm … 100 y/t / y/CA / y/n … 50
alias
build number (variable) … 149
variable … 148
button … 177
auto with bitmap … 181
shift … 118
Auto Range … 26 C
auto range … 44
automatic operation … 269 calculation
AutoResetFileComparsion … 257 new via IFile editor … 247
auxiliary line … 174 calculation grid … 99
suppress display … 175 calendar scale … 70
suppress printing … 175 Campbell diagram … 53, 107
channel
average contour map … 94
add (Composer) … 230
AVI … 171
AVL Download Area … 24 Channel Browser
axis functionalities … 253
arranging … 73, 206 channel filter
arranging curve lines … 74 ComposerFile … 238
hide (band diagram) … 92 channel filter file … 240
check box … 177
hide (radar diagram) … 143
classification … 55
hide (X) … 65
color … 28
hide (Y) … 76 curve … 213
labeling … 205 definition for alarms/warnings … 129
labeling off (band diagram) … 92 diagram frame … 63
labeling off (radar diagram) … 143 diagram object … 113
labeling off (X) … 65 fill color … 28
labeling off (Y) … 76 grid lines … 62
labeling orientation … 82 label … 88
layout … 204 lines … 212
link … 31 markers … 214
link to cursor … 68 scheme … 213
logarithmic (x) … 70 table text … 137
logarithmic (y) … 80 window (global setting) … 209
mirror … 59 COM interface … 281, 284
move … 58 combo box … 177
scientific number format (X) … 71, 80 command bar
set scale range … 69 define icons … 34
synchronize … 73 translate … 35
unhide (band diagram) … 92 comment
unhide (X) … 65 change via IFile editor … 247
comparison bar … 54, 125
B comparison table … 49, 54
backup data … 225 Composer … 215
decimal places … 223
display unit … 223

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

292 Index

scientific number format … 223 text, individual … 89

show row numbers … 224 curve
time stamp data … 223 color/style/marker … 213
tuple display mode … 224 curves
ComposerFile … 226 arrange … 74
compressor map … 95 cycle
algorithm … 100 averaging via IFile editor … 247
[Link] entries cut via IFile editor … 247
AllowNegativeZValuesForSpikeFilter … 98 variable … 149
AlwaysUseGlobalUnitConversion … 263 cycle-based
AutoMarkerCount … 87 data … 49
CalculateXUnitTransformationFirst … 67, 79
CommandDir … 34 D
CustomConcertoMenu … 39 data
DefaultTemplateLandscape … 197 compare … 256
DefaultTemplatePortrait … 197 variable in form … 154
ExportBitmapDPI … 16 variable in RichText object … 149
FormTableMaxColCount … 155 data cursor … 121
FormTableMaxRowCount … 155 data filter
Language … 35 ComposerFile … 239
LayoutMLG … 36 data key
LegendDefaultType … 166 reference … 240
MapConfig … 100 data list
in report … 187
MapZSpikeFilter … 99
suppress display … 188
ObjectWizardExtensions … 39-40
data point
Puma_Event_n … 270
display (contour map) … 85-87
ScriptDir … 46, 61, 132, 147, 151, 160, 170,
172, 175, 178-179 data point filter … 257
data variable … 149
TemplatePath … 197
in text object … 146
UnitConversionFiles … 264
dataset
[Link] … 38
change … 215
container … 15
hide … 48
context menu
axis (x-axis) … 73 show all names on axis … 77, 92
command bar … 34 date (variable) … 148
decimal places … 136, 162
diagram window … 43, 73
Composer column … 223
report … 186
in a form table … 158
window area … 43
in form … 154
contour map … 94
default template
cross-sections … 104
NORMPAGL … 197
measured values, display … 94
NORMPAGP … 197
overlay … 53, 95
Delauney triangulation … 100
control dataset … 122 design mode … 19
marker color (shading) … 124
diagram
controls … 176 arrange … 43
formatting … 177
grid (global setting) … 207
conversion unit … 263, 269
grid line attributes (global setting) … 208
converting
diagram frame … 61
time-based data to angle-based data … 274
attributes … 63
copy
attributes (global setting) … 208
from Excel … 227
diagram name (variable) … 149
to Composer File … 227
diagram object … 60
crank angle data … 48
frame … 61
CReal … 163, 179
suppress display … 61
cross-sections
through contour maps … 104 suppress printing … 61
cursor diagram window … 43
decimal places … 89 background color (global setting) … 209
link … 68 change sequence … 43
cursor window description … 45
change (for display item) … 88 display in page template … 199
hide display item … 88 export … 16

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Index 293

objects … 47 by idle points … 98

sequence in page template … 200 for ComposerFiles … 238
show template … 46 filter condition
show text in template … 45 activate/deactivate … 259
suppress display … 47 delete … 260
suppress printing … 47 filter conditions editor … 239
difference contour map … 94 filter out negative values … 98
display (menu) … 25 font … 29
display format … 223 alignment … 30
Composer column … 223 color … 30
display item … 48, 57-58 global setting … 203
hide … 48 size … 30
hide in cursor window … 88 style … 30
show all names on axis … 77, 92 footer in report … 195
display mode … 19 form … 150
display offset … 74 decimal places … 154
in report … 194
E link … 68
ECU map interpolator … 271 suppress display … 151
edit (menu) … 18 suppress printing … 151
engine parameters translate … 37, 150
change via IFile editor … 247 transparency … 59
envelope curve … 99, 102 variables, use of … 148
attributes, change … 85 form table … 155
Types … 102 column number … 155
event column widths, line heights … 156
script (button) … 177 create … 155
script (diagram window) … 46 decimal places … 158
script (diagram) … 61 define print order … 135
script (form table) … 160 enter formula expressions … 157
script (form) … 151 equal column widths, line heights … 155
script (line) … 175 format cells … 158
script (movie) … 172 insert data … 156
script (picture) … 170 lock cell(s) … 158, 162
script (table) … 132 modify cell contents … 158
script (text box) … 179 row number … 155
script (text) … 147 suppress display … 161
Excel suppress printing … 161
copy data to ComposerFile … 227 table headers … 155
execute (menu) … 23 translate … 38, 159
extras (menu) … 21 transparency … 59
use of user variables … 162
F wrap text … 156
favourites … 49 format (menu) … 21
file format brush … 27
comparison … 253 format settings … 203
extension … 13, 15 for controls … 177
file (menu) … 13 frame … 180
file comment [Link] … 281
change via IFile editor … 247 full screen mode … 19
file comparison … 256
file date (variable) … 148 G
file name (variable) … 148
GCA/Burn parameters … 19
file size (variable) … 148
grid points … 210
file time (variable) … 148
fill color … 28
diagram frame … 63
H
diagram object … 63 header in report … 194
waterfall diagram … 86 HTML … 16
filter
by data point … 257 I
by data points … 257 IDH_47 … 100
idle point filter … 98

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

294 Index

IFile style … 28
averaging later on … 251 style (global setting) … 212
change comment later on … 250 type … 29
edit … 246 unit definition … 267
IFile editor … 246 line curves … 75
image … 197 with markers on all points … 51
indicating curves … 48 with tdc offset … 49
indicating favourites … 48 x/y … 51
interpolation … 100 y/t / y/CA / y/n … 49
interpolation algorithms … 100
link
interval rounded … 71, 80
objects … 67
isolines … 94
y-axis … 67
create and edit … 101
list box … 177
display … 115
lock cells … 158, 162
map (contour map) … 52
log. pV diagram … 52
set colors … 101 logarithmic
shade label … 88 scale (x) … 70
scale (y) … 80
L slider … 183
label logfiles … 23
alignment … 88
background … 88 M
decimal places … 88 macro
frame … 88 [Link] … 32
position … 87 TF_MatrixMAP.MAC … 163
text … 88 map
labeling algorithms … 100
axis … 82 interpolator … 271
layout overlay … 53, 95
add layout … 14, 34 shading … 113
create … 13 map cross-section … 104
customize … 260 markers … 29, 86
replace channel names … 260 color … 214
replace line color by line style in black-and-white MATLAB
printout … 212 Interface … 281
settings (global) … 203 measured value
translate … 35-36 shade label … 88
Layout Explorer measured values
functionalities … 260 display (contour map) … 86
layout name (variable) … 149 measurement point
layout path (variable) … 149 display (contour map) … 85, 87, 94
legend … 164 shade label … 88
add test … 167
show (surface) … 111
channel description on/off … 165
menu
dataset name on/off … 165 customize … 38
edit entry … 169 menu commands … 13
format text … 167 message number
hide (all) entries … 165 variable … 149
hide (single) entries … 169 metafile/text … 18
insert additonal text … 168 movie
modify default type … 166 insert picture in a window … 171
show additonal test information … 167 suppress display … 173
unit on/off … 165 suppress printing … 173
limit violations … 129 MS Excel
line copy data to ComposerFile … 227
auto pen width (global setting) … 209 multiple selection … 58
auto pen width for curves (global setting) … 209
color … 28 N
color (global setting) … 212 NORMPAGL … 197
end … 29 NORMPAGP … 197
line width … 28 number of pages (variable) … 148
markers … 29

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Index 295

O picture
object … 47 insert picture in a window … 169
add object types … 39 suppress display … 170
arrangement (order) … 59 suppress printing … 170
change in background … 59 pie chart … 56, 139
link … 67 suppress display … 140
move … 58 suppress printing … 140
resize … 59 plausibility limits … 129
POI … 270
select … 58
print options … 16
suppress display … 59
printing order for diagram windows … 201
suppress printing … 59 program version (variable) … 149
transparency … 59 property page
Object Wizard algorithms … 100
define sequence … 40 attributes (lines/bars) … 85
extend … 39 attributes (result bars) … 130
OnChanged auxiliary line … 174
text box … 179 calculation parameter … 98
OnClick cell … 162
button … 178
colors (data cursor) … 124
check box … 178
cursor marker … 123
option button … 178
dataset (band) … 92
OnDraw
datasets … 83
diagram … 61
envelope curve … 102
form … 151, 160
format … 136
line … 175
general … 76
movie … 172
general (band) … 91
picture … 170
general (form table) … 160
table … 132
general (pie chart) … 140
text … 147
general (radar diagram) … 142
OnFileExchange … 46
general (result bars) … 126
OnKillFocus
text box … 179 general (result table) … 138
online update … 24 general (surface) … 111
OnLoad general (table) … 132
diagram … 61 grid … 62
diagram window … 46 grid (3D) … 119
OnMove grid (radar diagram) … 143
slider … 178 grid (result bars) … 127
OnRelease grid attributes … 62
slider … 178 header (data list) … 190
OnSelChanged isolines … 101
combo box … 178 labels … 87-88
form table … 160 labels (result bars) … 128
list box … 178 legend … 165
open directly limit display … 129
IFiles … 14 link … 67
operating parameters markers … 86
change via IFile editor … 247 picture … 171
option button … 177 pie chart … 141
original data, restore … 225 scale range (x-axis) … 69
oval … 175
scale range (y-scale) … 79
transparency … 59
shading … 112
statistics (result bars) … 128
P
table (legend) … 166
page
text … 152
specify settings … 211
transformation … 66, 77
page break in report … 194
unit … 81
page number (variable) … 148
page template … 197 wrap mode … 135
diagram sequence … 200 wrap mode (data list) … 191
show in diagram window … 46, 199 x-axis (data list) … 189
password mask … 180 x-scale … 64

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

296 Index

z-class (line curve) … 84 scaling

z-class (scatter) … 109 for new data … 99
pV … 52 scatter … 108
pV diagram … 52, 93 contour maps … 52-53
fill marker with shading … 115
Q scientific number format
quick diagram … 74 x-axis … 71, 80
quick hull … 100 script
include in menu … 38
R run if event occurs … 46, 61, 132, 147, 151,
160, 170, 172, 175, 177, 179
radar diagram … 56, 141
scroll mode … 185
fill diagram object … 142
sequence
filled … 56, 86
change sequence of windows … 43
suppress display … 143
settings
suppress printing … 143 global … 203
with marker … 56 shading
range … 118 data cursor … 124
recalculate … 31 signal
rectangle … 175 change via IFile editor … 247
transparency … 59
Simulink … 281
reference object … 67 slider … 177, 183
remote mode … 270 logarithmic … 183
RemoteActive … 270
snap grid … 210
replace channel names … 260
snap to grid … 210
report
software update … 24
create … 44
SourceBaseValue … 240
report window … 185 SourcePath … 240
forced page break … 194 special characters in text object … 146
object order … 186 spike filter … 98
properties dialog … 186 stacked bar … 54, 125
resize … 186 x/y … 51
scroll mode … 185 y/t / y/CA / y/n … 50
specify footer … 195 stair curve
specify header … 194 x/y … 51
report window objects y/t / y/CA / y/n … 50
data list … 187 stairs
form … 194 x/y … 51
table … 193 y/t / y/CA / y/n … 50
text … 194 statistics … 32
request option … 24 bar … 54, 125
resolution of calculation grid … 99 box … 54, 125
restore data … 225 table … 49, 54
result window … 129
bar … 54, 125 surface … 53, 110
table … 54, 137 add fourth dimension … 112
result dataset … 78, 189 non-interpolation … 53
result table projecting … 114
suppress display … 138 scatter … 53
suppress printing … 138 synchronize
rich text … 146 x-axes … 73
rounding … 71, 80, 118 system variable … 148
RTP values
recalculate later on … 252
T
S table … 55, 131
define print order … 135
scale
horizontal … 55
labeling … 82
in report … 193
modify … 72
link … 68
unhide (Y) … 76
show n points … 133
scale labels
suppress display … 132
invert (x) … 70
suppress printing … 132
invert (y) … 80
unit definition … 268

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

 Index 297

vertical … 55 unit conversion … 263

TDC definition file … 264
change via IFile editor … 247 definition file, change … 263
template … 197 unit editor … 264
create template … 198 unit table … 265
default templates … 197 update … 24
folder … 197 user variable … 22, 148
load from template folder … 47 editor … 22
multiple … 199 in form object … 152
print … 200 in form table … 162
save … 198 in layout … 22
show diagram window description … 45 in text boxes … 179
show in diagram window … 46 in text object … 152
test attribute (variable) … 148 in work environment … 22
text [Link] … 22
box … 179
color … 146 V
fill color … 146 variable … 22, 148
link … 68 alias … 148
object … 146 build number … 149
Rich Text object … 146 cycle … 149
suppress display … 148 date … 148
suppress printing … 148 diagram name … 149
translate … 146 file date … 148
transparency … 59 file name … 148
use of data variables … 146 file size … 148
use of special characters … 146 file time … 148
text box layout name … 149
suppress printing … 180 layout path … 149
use of user variables … 179 message number … 149
text object number of pages … 148
in report … 194 page number … 148
translate … 37 program version … 149
variables, use of … 148, 152 test attribute … 148
time (variable) … 148 time … 148
time-based data … 49 variable (#)
[Link] … 281 in a form table … 156
toolbar in form … 153-154
customize … 33 in RichText object … 149
move to new position … 33 view (menu) … 19
transformation … 66 visible … 48
contour map … 189 VisioFlame diagram … 56, 144
form table … 163 color definition … 115
order … 67, 79 VisioKnock statistics … 56, 145
transformation macro color definition … 115
select … 77
transparency … 59 W
trend analysis … 84 waterfall diagram … 53, 115
fill color … 86
U filled … 86
unit window
add … 265 (menu) … 23
[Link] … 264 background color (global setting) … 209
Composer … 223 create … 13
[Link] … 264 export … 16
convert … 21, 263 filter … 20
convert, globally … 268 sequence … 43
convert, object-specifically … 81 suppress display … 47
definition for table objects … 267 suppress printing … 47
definitions for line objects … 267 window list … 43
edit … 264-265 Windows Media Player, insert … 280
name table … 266

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

298 Index

work environment
save … 16
workbook mode … 20

X
x/y … 51
x/y/z … 53
x-axis
calendar scale … 70
hide … 68
link … 68
modify multiple axes simultaneously … 73
synchronize … 68, 73

Y
y/t / y/CA / y/n … 49
y-axis
hide … 67
link … 67

Z
ZClassTolPercent … 84
z-dataset … 84, 109
zoom … 19, 25
auto … 25
into diagram … 72
zoom in … 25
zoom out … 25
z-value
tolerance … 84

User Interface Functionalities — User’s Guide

FOR FURTHER INFORMATION PLEASE CONTACT:

AVL List GmbH, Hans List Platz 1, 8020 Graz, Austria

Phone: +43 316 787-0, Fax: +43 316 787-400, eMail: info@[Link], [Link]